g190 service manual
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
SERVICE MANUAL
003603MIU
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
SERVICE MANUAL
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
SERVICE MANUAL
003603MIU
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2008 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT
CODE
G190
GESTETNER
SP C420DN
COMPANY
LANIER
RICOH
LP331cn
SP C420DN
SAVIN
CLP131DN
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
DATE
04/2008
COMMENTS
Original Printing
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................................1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.......................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ..........................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ........................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS .........................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS..........................................................1-2
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ......................................................1-3
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS ...................................................................1-3
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ...........................................................1-3
PRINTER INSTALLATION..........................................................................1-4
1.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE....................................................1-4
Unpacking .......................................................................................1-4
Installing the toner .........................................................................1-11
Loading Paper ...............................................................................1-13
Turning Power on ..........................................................................1-15
Selecting the Panel Display Language..........................................1-16
Printing the Test Page...................................................................1-16
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract .....................................1-16
1.2.4 METER CLICK CHARGE...........................................................1-17
1.2.5 MOVING THE MACHINE...........................................................1-19
1.2.6 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE.............................................1-19
1.3 OPTIONS INSTALLATION .................................................................1-20
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ...................................................................1-20
1.3.2 TRAY HEATER..........................................................................1-20
1.4 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ..................................................................1-22
1.4.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................1-22
I/F Card Slots ................................................................................1-22
SD Card Slots................................................................................1-22
G190
i
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1.4.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE ............................................................1-22
Overview .......................................................................................1-22
Move Exec.....................................................................................1-23
Undo Exec.....................................................................................1-24
Storing the SD Card ......................................................................1-25
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ...............................................2-1
2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS .............................................................2-1
2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE ...................................................................2-2
2.2.1 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE .............................2-2
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ....................................3-1
3.1 BEFORE YOU START..........................................................................3-1
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS..................................................3-2
3.2.1 TOOLS.........................................................................................3-2
3.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .............................................................3-3
3.3.1 ELECTRICAL BOARD UNIT........................................................3-3
3.3.2 IOB (INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD) ...................................................3-6
3.3.3 CONTROLLER BOARD...............................................................3-6
3.3.4 INSTALLING THE NEW NVRAM.................................................3-8
3.3.5 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT) BOARD.......................................3-8
3.3.6 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD 1............................3-9
3.3.7 EGB (ENGINE BOARD) AND HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
BOARD 2 ............................................................................................3-10
3.3.8 LCD PANEL ...............................................................................3-11
3.3.9 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ..................................3-11
NVRAM on the EGB (Engine Board).............................................3-11
NVRAM on the Controller ..............................................................3-12
NVRAMs on the EGB and Controller.............................................3-13
SM
ii
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.4 LASER OPTICS ..................................................................................3-14
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS ................................................3-14
3.4.2 LD UNIT .....................................................................................3-14
Replacement .................................................................................3-14
Color Registration Adjustment.......................................................3-15
3.4.3 LDB ............................................................................................3-18
3.4.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ...................................................3-18
3.4.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ...................3-19
3.4.6 LDU SHUTTER MOTOR UNIT AND SENSOR..........................3-20
3.5 PAPER FEED .....................................................................................3-21
3.5.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER .............................................................3-21
3.5.2 PAPER FRICTION PAD.............................................................3-22
3.5.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR .............................................3-22
3.5.4 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER, FRICTION PAD ..............................3-23
Reassembling the by-pass friction pad..........................................3-24
3.5.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR ........................................................3-25
3.5.6 PAPER VOLUME SENSOR, END SENSOR AND PAPER WIDTH
SENSOR.............................................................................................3-25
3.5.7 PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND TEMPERATURE/ HUMIDITY
SENSOR.............................................................................................3-28
3.5.8 PAPER FEED MOTOR ..............................................................3-28
3.5.9 PAPER REGISTRATION CLUTCH, PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND
BY-PASS CLUTCH .............................................................................3-29
3.6 DEVELOPMENT .................................................................................3-31
3.6.1 COLOR DEVELOPMENT MOTOR, COLOR OPC MOTOR AND
BLACK OPC/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR .............................................3-31
3.6.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH ........................................................3-32
3.6.3 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR .....................................3-32
3.6.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR .........................................................3-33
3.6.5 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR................................3-33
3.6.6 ID SENSORS.............................................................................3-35
3.7 DRIVE .................................................................................................3-36
3.7.1 DRIVE UNIT...............................................................................3-36
3.8 DUPLEX..............................................................................................3-38
3.8.1 DUPLEX JAM SENSOR ............................................................3-38
3.8.2 INVERTER SENSOR.................................................................3-39
G190
iii
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.8.3 DUPLEX MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR ............................3-40
3.9 FUSING ..............................................................................................3-41
3.9.1 FUSING UNIT ............................................................................3-41
3.9.2 THERMISTOR AND THERMOSTAT .........................................3-41
3.9.3 FUSING LAMP...........................................................................3-44
3.9.4 FUSING EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR..............3-44
3.9.5 FUSING REGISTRATION SENSOR .........................................3-45
3.9.6 FAN DIRECTION .......................................................................3-45
3.10 ADJUSTMENTS............................................................................3-46
3.10.1 GAMMA ADJUSTMENT.......................................................3-46
Summary .......................................................................................3-46
Adjustment Procedure...................................................................3-48
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL RESULTS.........................................................4-1
4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .............................................................4-3
4.2.1 SUMMARY...................................................................................4-3
4.2.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS.........................................................4-4
Engine SC .......................................................................................4-4
Controller Error..............................................................................4-25
4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE............................................................4-43
4.3.1 BLANK PRINT ...........................................................................4-43
4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT....................................................................4-44
4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR .............................................................4-45
4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT.............................................................................4-46
4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS ............................4-47
4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS .........................................4-47
4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS ................................4-48
4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES ..................................................4-49
4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND..............................................................4-49
4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS.............................................4-49
4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS .......................4-50
4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS ................................4-50
4.3.13 GHOSTING ..........................................................................4-50
SM
iv
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS ......................4-51
4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW ......................................................................4-51
4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN ........................................................4-52
4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE .......................................4-52
4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE...............4-53
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ............................................4-54
4.4.1 SENSORS .................................................................................4-54
4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .............................................................4-59
4.5.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT .............................................................4-59
4.5.2 IOB.............................................................................................4-59
4.6 LEDS...................................................................................................4-60
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...............................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION ...................................................5-1
Entering the Service Mode ..............................................................5-1
Accessing the Required Program....................................................5-2
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program .........................5-2
Exiting Service Mode.......................................................................5-2
5.1.2 REMARKS ...................................................................................5-3
Display on the Control Panel Screen...............................................5-3
5.1.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING ...................................................5-6
5.2 SERVICE MODE TABLE ......................................................................5-7
5.2.1 CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE ................................................5-7
5.2.2 ENGINE SERVICE MODE.........................................................5-14
SP1-XXX (Feed)............................................................................5-14
SP2-XXX (Drum) ...........................................................................5-38
SP3-XXX (Process).....................................................................5-111
SP5-XXX (Mode).........................................................................5-136
SP7-XXX (Data Log) ...................................................................5-179
SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) ................................................................5-207
SP9-XXX .....................................................................................5-224
5.2.3 INPUT CHECK TABLE ............................................................5-231
5.2.4 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ........................................................5-237
G190
v
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE .......................................................................5-240
5.3.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE .............................................................5-240
5.3.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .............................................................5-241
5.3.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE ..........................................................5-241
File Arrangement.........................................................................5-241
Update Procedure .......................................................................5-242
Error Handling .............................................................................5-243
Power Failure ..............................................................................5-243
5.3.4 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD....................................5-245
Uploading NVRAM Data..............................................................5-245
Downloading NVRAM Data .........................................................5-246
5.3.5 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD...............................5-247
Download ....................................................................................5-247
Upload .........................................................................................5-247
5.3.6 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ..........................5-249
Error Message Table...................................................................5-249
5.4 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS..............................................5-251
5.4.1 OVERVIEW..............................................................................5-251
5.5 USING THE DEBUG LOG ................................................................5-252
5.5.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ......5-252
5.5.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ................5-256
5.5.3 DEBUG LOG CODES ..............................................................5-257
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key.........5-257
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log......................5-257
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log................5-257
5.6 DIP SWITCHES ................................................................................5-258
5.6.1 CONTROLLER BOARD...........................................................5-258
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS....................................................6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW...........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ..............................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT...........................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE .................................................................6-4
SM
vi
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS .................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..........................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL...............................................................6-8
Overview .........................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self-check .............................................................6-9
Process Control Self-Check Procedure.........................................6-10
6.2.3 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL.....................................................6-12
Toner Supply Control Modes.........................................................6-12
Low Image Coverage ....................................................................6-12
6.2.4 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION .......................6-13
Introduction....................................................................................6-13
Toner Near End Detection.............................................................6-14
Toner End Detection .....................................................................6-14
Toner End Recovery .....................................................................6-14
6.2.5 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION..................................................6-15
6.3 PAPER FEED .....................................................................................6-16
6.3.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-16
6.3.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE ................................................................6-17
6.3.3 PAPER TRAY ............................................................................6-18
Paper Lift .......................................................................................6-18
Paper Size Detection.....................................................................6-19
Paper Near End/End Detection .....................................................6-20
6.3.4 BY-PASS TRAY FEED AND SIZE DETECTION .......................6-21
Paper Feed Mechanism ................................................................6-21
Paper Size Detection Mechanism .................................................6-21
6.3.5 DUPLEX.....................................................................................6-22
Drive..............................................................................................6-23
Interleaving....................................................................................6-24
6.4 LASER EXPOSURE ...........................................................................6-26
6.4.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-26
6.4.2 OPTICAL PATH .........................................................................6-27
6.4.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR....................................6-28
Overview .......................................................................................6-28
Main Scan Start Detection.............................................................6-28
6.4.4 LD SAFETY SWITCH ................................................................6-29
G190
vii
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
6.4.5 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT..........................6-30
Overview .......................................................................................6-30
Summary of Each Adjustment .......................................................6-30
Adjustment Conditions ..................................................................6-31
Main Scan Skew Adjustment.........................................................6-34
LDU Shutter...................................................................................6-34
6.5 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT...............................................................6-35
6.5.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-35
6.5.2 DRIVE AND DRIVE GEAR POSITION SENSOR ......................6-36
Mechanism ....................................................................................6-36
Initialization Process and SC Codes .............................................6-36
6.5.3 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING ........................................6-38
6.5.4 DRUM CLEANING .....................................................................6-39
6.5.5 WASTE TONER COLLECTION.................................................6-40
6.5.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION AND SET
DETECTION .......................................................................................6-41
6.5.7 PCU DETECTION (DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION) ........6-42
Unit Set Detection Pins .................................................................6-42
New Unit Detection........................................................................6-42
Error Message...............................................................................6-42
6.6 DEVELOPMENT .................................................................................6-43
6.6.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-43
6.6.2 DRIVE ........................................................................................6-44
6.6.3 DEVELOPER MIXING ...............................................................6-44
6.6.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS...............................................................6-45
6.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM ................................................6-46
Overview .......................................................................................6-46
6.7 IMAGE TRANSFER ............................................................................6-47
6.7.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-47
6.7.2 TRANSFER UNIT DETECTION AND NEW UNIT DETECTION6-48
6.7.3 DRIVE AND TRANSFER BELT ROLLER VOLTAGE ................6-49
Transfer belt contact......................................................................6-50
Transfer Belt Cleaning...................................................................6-51
6.7.4 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT .......................................................6-52
Discharge ......................................................................................6-53
Transfer Roller Contact .................................................................6-54
SM
viii
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
6.8 FUSING ..............................................................................................6-55
6.8.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-55
6.8.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL .......................................6-56
Overall Procedure .........................................................................6-56
Fusing Roller Idling........................................................................6-56
Idling Ready Temperature before First Print Job: [A] ....................6-57
Machine Ready Temperature: [B]..................................................6-57
Print ready temperature: [C] ..........................................................6-57
Target Printing Temperature: [D]...................................................6-57
First Print Temperature: [G]...........................................................6-57
Corrections for Small Paper Sizes (less than A5)..........................6-58
Overheat Protection ......................................................................6-58
6.8.3 DRIVE ........................................................................................6-59
6.9 CONTROLLER....................................................................................6-60
SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................7-1
7.1 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................7-1
7.1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ......................................................7-5
7.1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES......................................................7-7
Printer Drivers .................................................................................7-7
Utility Software ................................................................................7-8
7.1.4 MACHINE CONFIGURATION .....................................................7-9
G190
ix
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
TAB
POSITION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
TAB
POSITION 6
TAB
POSITION 5
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 3
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
TAB
POSITION 4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 1
INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 8
APPENDIX
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Read This First
Safety Notices
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1.
Before disassembling or assembling parts of the printer and peripherals, make sure
that the printer power cord is unplugged.
2.
The wall outlet should be near the printer and easily accessible.
3.
If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open
while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically
driven components.
4.
The printer drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be
careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the
printer starts operation.
5.
The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the printer
is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
Health Safety Conditions
Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it
may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
The printer and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who
has completed the training course on those models.
Lithium Batteries
Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the EGB and controller board may pose risk
of explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1.
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when
exposed to an open flame.
2.
Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic
photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3.
Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4.
When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more
than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart
may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based
optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a
location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a
qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer
engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or
service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
ƒ
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ƒ
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser
Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
ƒ
CAUTION MARKING:
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Symbols, Abbreviations, and Trademarks
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses the symbols and abbreviations shown below.
Symbol
Meaning
Refer to section number
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
=
Clamp
E-ling
SEF
Short Edge Feed
LEF
Long Edge Feed
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Installation Requirements
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1.
Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)
2.
Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3.
Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4.
Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5.
Do not let the machine get exposed to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6.
Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7.
Install the machine at locations lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.
8.
Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more
than 5 mm.)
9.
Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")
G190
1-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation Requirements
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS
ƒ
This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas.
High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be
installed in a well-ventilated room.
ƒ
Left side:
Over 50cm (19.7”)
ƒ
Rear:
Over 10cm (4”)
ƒ
Right side: Over 10cm (4”)
ƒ
Front:
Over 70cm (27.6”)
Put the machine near the power source with the clearance.
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
ƒ
Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.
ƒ
Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
ƒ
Ground the machine.
1.
Input voltage level:
2.
120 V, 60 Hz: More than 11 A
3.
220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A
4.
Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %
5.
Do not put things on the power cord.
SM
1-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Optional Unit Combinations
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS
U: User installation, C: CE installation
No.
1
Options
Remarks
Paper Feed Unit Type 4000 (G392)
U
Up to x 3
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
U: User installation, C: CE installation
No.
Options
Remarks
1
Printer Hard Disk Drive Type 420 (M344)
U
2
Memory Unit Type G /128MB (M345)
U
3
Memory Unit Type G /256MB (D362)
U
4
IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A (B679)
U
IEEE802.11a/g Interface Unit Type L (M344)
5
-or-
U
IEEE802.11a/g Interface Unit Type M (M344)
I/F slot
6
IEEE802.11g Interface Unit Type P (M344)
U
7
Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A (874)
U
8
Bluetooth Interface Unit (B826)
U
9
Camera Direct Print Card Type E (M344)
U
10
Data Overwrite Security Unit (M344)
U
11
Data Storage Card Type A (G874)
U
12
HDD Encryption Unit Type C (M344)
U
13
VM Card Type H (G344)
C
G190
1-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SD slot 1
SD slot 2
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
PRINTER INSTALLATION
1.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
ƒ
Remove the tape from the development units before you turn the main switch on.
The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tape.
ƒ
Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in
the future if you transport the machine to another location.
Unpacking
ƒ
When lifting the machine, use the inside grips on both sides of the machine.
ƒ
If not, the machine could be dropped. This may cause an injury and may damage
the machine.
ƒ
Place no objects to the left or on the cover.
1.
Remove the plastic bag.
2.
Lift the machine with two people by using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
3.
SM
ƒ
Do not remove the tapes before placing the machine.
ƒ
Lower the machine slowly and carefully, so as not to pinch your hands.
Remove the tape from the printer.
1-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Printer Installation
4.
Open the left cover [A] of the printer.
5.
Turn the two green levers counterclockwise {, and then slowly open the inner cover 
G190
1-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
6.
Remove the end of the tape from the printer.
7.
Remove the four pieces of tape from the PCU in a horizontal direction.
8.
Remove the securing pin, as shown, from the transfer unit.
9.
Turn the green lever of the transfer unit counterclockwise to unlock the unit.
SM
1-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Printer Installation
10. Remove the protective sheet.
11. Turn the green lever clockwise to lock the unit.
G190
1-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
12. Close the inner cover.
13. Push the two green levers { to lock the inner cover, and then turn them clockwise .
14. Close the left cover.
15. Open the top cover [A] by grasping the handles on the left and right sides.
SM
1-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Printer Installation
ƒ
Be sure to remove the caution sheet, which is attached to the toner
compartment.
16. Remove the tapes and cover.
17. Remove the clips protecting the mouths of all four toner compartments.
18. Close the top cover.
G190
1-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
19. Put labels “1” on the front of the paper tray.
ƒ
Be sure to read the label which is attached to the front surface of the printer.
This warns you that ink-jet paper cannot be used with this printer.
SM
1-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Printer Installation
Installing the toner
1.
Open the top cover [A].
2.
Shake the toner bottles up and down seven or eight times before installing.
3.
Remove the tape from the toner bottle.
G190
1-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
4.
Install the yellow toner bottle first. Holding the toner bottle horizontally { with the
locking lever on the upper side, install the toner bottom first, and then move the locking
lever to the triangle mark .
5.
Turn the locking lever to the circle mark. Pull the locking lever toward front side of the
printer, until it locks and clicks into place.
ƒ
6.
Do not repeatedly insert and remove toner bottles. This causes toner leakage.
Do the same procedure to install the other three bottles: cyan (C), magenta (M), and
black (B).
7.
SM
Close the top cover.
1-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Printer Installation
Loading Paper
1.
Pull out tray 1 [A] of the printer until it stops.
2.
Lift it slightly, and then pull it out.
3.
Adjust the green clips of the side guide and the end guide to the paper size you want.
G190
1-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
4.
Move the green switch on the front of the tray to match the type of paper to be loaded.
Move the switch to the left when you load thick paper of 75 g/m2 or more.
5.
Arrange and load a stack of new paper into the tray with the print side up. Make sure
that there is no gap between the paper and the paper guides. Adjust the paper guides
to close gaps if necessary.
SM
1-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Printer Installation
6.
Lift the front of paper tray 1, and slowly slide the paper tray back until it stops. Make
sure that the paper tray is fully inserted, to prevent paper jams.
Turning Power on
ƒ
Turn off the power switch whenever you plug in and unplug the power cord.
1.
Make sure that the power switch is set to " " (Off).
2.
Plug in the machine.
3.
Turn on the power switch.
ƒ
Do not turn off the power switch until initialization is completed (‘Ready’
appears on the display when initialization is completed). Otherwise, the
machine may malfunction.
G190
1-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
Selecting the Panel Display Language
ƒ
You can select one of these languages (the default is English): English, German,
French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese,
Czech, Polish or Hungarian.
ƒ
You do not have to do this procedure if you use English. Do this procedure if you
want to use a different language.
1.
Turn on the power switch of the printer.
ƒ
2.
“Ready” shows on the panel display after the machine warms up.
Press the "Menu" key.
ƒ
“Menu” shows on the panel display.
3.
Press the "%" or "#" key to select “Language.”
4.
Press the "OK" key.
5.
Press the "%" or "#" key to select the language you want.
6.
Press the "OK" key.
7.
Press the “Menu” key to return to the initial screen.
Printing the Test Page
1.
You can check if the printer works correctly by printing a test page such as the
configuration page. However, you cannot check the connection between the printer
and the computer by printing the test page.
2.
Turn on the power switch of the printer.
ƒ
“Ready” shows on the panel display after the machine warms up.
3.
Press the "Menu" key.
4.
Press the "%" or "#" key to select “List/Test Print.”
5.
Press the "OK" key.
6.
Press the "%" or "#" key to select “Config. Page”.
7.
Press the "OK" key.
8.
The test printing starts shortly after.
9.
Press the “Menu” key to return to the initial screen.
10. Turn off the power switch of the printer.
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract
Change the necessary settings depending on the each customer's service contract. For
SM
1-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Printer Installation
details, refer to "Meter Click Charge" following this section.
1.2.4 METER CLICK CHARGE
Basically, there are two ways to set up this function.
Meter click change enabled (SP 5-930-001 set to ‘enabled’): The counter can be
displayed and printed by the customer. The technician can then call the customer and ask
them to read the counter.
Meter click charge disabled (SP 5-930-001 set to ‘disabled’; this is the default
setting): The counter cannot be displayed or printed by the customer. To check the counter,
the technician must print the SMC report (SP 5-990).
ƒ
You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance
with the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item
Meter Click
G190
SP No.
Function
SP5-930-001
Enables or disables Meter Click
1-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Default
"0": OFF
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Printer Installation
Charge
Charge.
When enabled:
ƒ
The counter menu shows
immediately after you push
the "Menu" key. The
"Counter Method"
(SP5-045) sets the type of
the counter.
ƒ
You can print the counter
from the counter menu.
When disabled:
ƒ
The counter menu does
not show.
Enables or disables the PM alert for
the PCUs.
Meter Click
Charge:
SP5-930-010
If this SP is enabled, an alert
"1": No alert
message is displayed when the
PCU
PCUs need to be replaced.
Enables or disables the PM alert for
Meter Click
the image transfer belt unit.
Charge:
Image
SP5-930-014
Transfer Belt
If this SP is enabled, an alert
message is displayed when the
"1": No alert
image transfer belt unit needs to be
Unit
replaced.
Enables or disables the PM alert for
the fusing unit.
Meter Click
Charge:
SP5-930-016
If this SP is enabled, an alert
"1": No alert
message is displayed when the
Fusing Unit
fusing unit needs to be replaced.
Counter
method
Service Tel:
SM
Specifies if the counting method
SP5-045-001
used in meter charge mode is
“1”: Prints
based on developments or prints.
SP5-812-001
-001: shows or sets the telephone
1-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
-
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Telephone
and -002
/Facsimile
Installation
Printer Installation
number of the service
representative.
-002: shows or sets the fax number
of the service station. The number
is printed on the counter list when
the "Meter Click Charge" is
enabled. User can send a fax
message with the counter list.
1.2.5 MOVING THE MACHINE
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor.
See the section “Transporting the Machine” if you have to pack the machine and move it a
longer distance.
ƒ
Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit.
1.2.6 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE
1.
Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays.
2.
Do one of the following:
ƒ
Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
ƒ
Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
G190
1-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Options Installation
1.3 OPTIONS INSTALLATION
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT
For details, refer to the “Hardware Guide” for this machine.
1.3.2 TRAY HEATER
ƒ
Before installing, make sure that the power source rating of the tray heater is same
as the machine.
1.
Electrical board unit [A] (: Electrical board unit)
2.
Rear cover [B]
3.
Rear cover piece [C] for the power supply connector
4.
Decal [D]
5.
Decal [E]
SM
1-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Options Installation
6.
Harness [F] ( x 2, = x 3)
7.
Tray heater switch [G]
8.
Tray heater [H] ( x 2, x 1)
ƒ
You can adjust the tray heater switch setting with SP5953-001 as shown in the
following table.
SP5953-001
0: Off
1: On
G190
Tray heater
When the Main Power
When the printer is in
switch
turns on
energy saver mode
On
No power supply
Power supply
Off
No power supply
No power supply
On
Power supply
Power supply
Off
No power supply
No power supply
1-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Controller Options
1.4 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
The following options are available for this machine; refer to the “Hardware Guide”.
ƒ
Hard Disk Drive
ƒ
IEEE1284
ƒ
IEEE802.11a/g,g
ƒ
Gigabit Ethernet
ƒ
Bluetooth
ƒ
Camera Direct Print Card
ƒ
Data Storage card
ƒ
VM Card
The following options are available for this machine; refer to the “Security Guide”.
ƒ
Data Overwrite Security Unit
ƒ
HDD Encryption Unit
1.4.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it.
I/F Card Slots
ƒ
Slot A is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be installed):
IEEE1284, IEEE802.11a/g, IEEE802.11g, Bluetooth, Gigabit Ethernet,
SD Card Slots
ƒ
SD Slot 1 is used for PictBridge, Data Overwrite Security Unit. Data Storage Card.
ƒ
SD Slot 2 is used for installing the VM card or HDD Encryption Unit or one of the
optional applications for service only (for example, updating the firmware).
1.4.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Overview
The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs
from one SD card to another SD card.
Do not try to copy the VM card or the HDD encryption unit to another SD card.
SM
1-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Controller Options
You cannot run application programs from Slot 2. However you can move application
programs from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure.
ƒ
Make sure that the target SD card has enough space, and put it in slot 1.
ƒ
Enter SP5873 “SD Card Appli Move”.
ƒ
Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 2 to the card in slot 1.
ƒ
ƒ
Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.
Exit the SP mode.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
ƒ
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from
an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after
you copy the application program from one card to another card.
ƒ
Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation
is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
ƒ
Keep the SD card in the storage place (: NOTE) after you copy the application
program from the card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
1.
The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
2.
You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
ƒ
Refer to “Storing the SD card” at the end of this chapter.
Move Exec
The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original
SD card to another SD card.
ƒ
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD
card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error
Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1.
Turn the main switch off.
2.
Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied to
this SD card.
3.
Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2. The application
program is copied from this SD card.
4.
Turn the main switch on.
5.
Start the SP mode.
6.
Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”
G190
1-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Controller Options
7.
Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8.
Turn the main switch off.
9.
Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
“Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to
the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly
copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
ƒ
Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD
card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error
Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1.
Turn the main switch off.
2.
Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back
into this card.
3.
Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1. The application
program is copied back from this SD card.
4.
Turn the main switch on.
5.
Start the SP mode.
6.
Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.”
7.
Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8.
Turn the main switch off.
9.
Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
ƒ
This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by
the machine.
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
SM
1-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Installation
Controller Options
Storing the SD Card
After moving an application, the original SD card must be kept. Keep the SD card in the
location [A] shown in the drawing and fasten it with tape.
G190
1-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Controller Options
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SM
26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
User Replaceable Items
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The user replaces these items if the service contract requires that the user does some of
the PM.
Item
Remarks
PCU
50kP (YMC, BK)
Transfer Belt Unit
100kP
Waste Toner Bottle
50kP
Maintenance Kit:
ƒ
Fusing Unit
ƒ
Transfer Roller
ƒ
Paper Feed Roller x 3
ƒ
Friction Pad x 3
ƒ
Dust Filter x 2
100kP
Feed Roller Kit (For tray 4)
ƒ
Paper Feed Roller x 1
ƒ
Friction Pad x 1
100kP
Chart: A4 (LT), 5%
Mode: Continuously Printing
Environment: Recommended temperature and humidity
Yield changes depend on circumstances and print conditions
An error message appears when a maintenance counter gets to the value in the PM table,
when the machine’s default settings are used.
It is not necessary to reset counters for each part if the technician does the PM. The
machine detects new components automatically and resets the necessary counters.
SM
2-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Preventive
Maintenance
2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Maintenance
2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE
2.2.1 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE
1.
Turn off the main switch.
2.
Remove the waste toner bottle.
3.
Remove the PCUs.
4.
Remove the transfer belt unit.
ƒ
Do not touch the transfer belt surface.
5.
Remove the fusing unit.
6.
Remove the standard paper tray.
7.
Clean the paper path.
8.
Clean all printer rollers with dry cloth only.
ƒ
9.
Do not clean the transfer roller.
Use a blower brush to clean the laser unit windows.
10. Vacuum the interior of the printer.
11. Carefully clean the area around the transfer roller.
G190
2-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Before You Start
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 BEFORE YOU START
ƒ
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before you do the
SM
ƒ
Remove these before you do the procedures in this section:
ƒ
4 toner bottles (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black)
ƒ
Waste toner bottle
ƒ
Standard paper tray
3-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
procedures in this section.
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Special Tools and Lubricants
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3.2.1 TOOLS
Item
Part Number
1
B6455010
SD Card
1
2
B6456705
PCMCIA Card Adapter
1
3
B6456820
USB Reader/ Writer
1
4
VSSM9000
Digital Multimeter - FLUKE87
1
5
G0219350
Loop Back Connector - Parallel
1
6
C4019503
20X Magnification Scope
1
7
A2579300
Grease Barrierta – S552R
1
8
52039502
Silicon Grease G-501
1
9
B6795100
Plug - IEEE1284 Type C
1
G190
Description
3-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Q’ty
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
3.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
ƒ
Before you replace the EGB (Engine Board), the controller, or the NVRAM, print out
the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”).
ƒ
After you replace the EGB (Engine Board) or the controller, remove the NVRAM
from the old board and install it on the new board. If the NVRAM on the old board is
defective, replace the NVRAM ( NVRAM Replacement procedure).
1.
Front door
2.
Top cover
3.
Right cover [A] ( x 1)
SM
3-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
3.3.1 ELECTRICAL BOARD UNIT
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
4.
Color development motor unit [B] ( x 3, x 1)
5.
Side bar [C] ( x 4)
6.
IOB (Input/Output Board) [D] ( x 2, x 3)
7.
[E] x 1
G190
3-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Electrical Components
8.
Left cover [F]
9.
Drum positioning plate [G]
10. Drum positioning plate belt [H] ( x 1)
11. [I] x 3, [J] x 1
12. Electrical board unit [K] ( x 4, x 2)
SM
3-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
3.3.2 IOB (INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD)
1.
Front door
2.
Top cover
3.
Right cover ( Electrical board unit)
4.
Side bar ( Electrical board unit)
5.
IOB [A] ( x 2, x all)
3.3.3 CONTROLLER BOARD
1.
Controller unit [A] ( x 3)
G190
3-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Electrical Components
2.
Controller unit cover [B] ( x 4)
3.
Controller board [C] ( x 5, x 1)
4.
Two NVRAMs [D]
5.
Two rails [E]
ƒ
Removed NVRAMs musrt be installed on the new board.
ƒ
Keep NVRAMs away from objects that can cause static electricity. The data in
NVRAMs can be corrupted by static electricity.
ƒ
SM
Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. A half-disk is
3-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
engraved on one side of the NVRAM, and a guide mark is on one side of the
NVRAM slot. When you install the NVRAM, the half-disk and the guide mark
must be on the same side.
3.3.4 INSTALLING THE NEW NVRAM
When the NVRAM on the controller board is detective, you must replace the detective
NVRAM with a new NVRAM.
1.
Controller board (see Controller Board)
2.
Remove the defective NVRAM.
3.
Install the new NVRAM on the controller board.
4.
Reassemble the machine.
5.
Plug in and turn on the main power
6.
Set the date and time with the timer setting in the UP (Maintenance > Menu) after
installing a new controller board.
ƒ
If the date and time setting is not done, WebImage Monitor cannot be used.
3.3.5 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT) BOARD
1.
Electrical boards unit ( Electrical board unit)
2.
PSU board [A] ( x 6, x 5)
G190
3-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
Replacement
Adjustment
3.3.6 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD 1
1.
Electrical board unit ( Electrical board unit)
2.
PSU board ( PSU (Power Supply Unit) Board)
3.
Electrical board unit frame [A] ( x 4)
4.
High voltage terminal plate [B] ( x 1)
5.
High voltage power supply board 1 [C] ( x 4, x 4, stand offs x 2).
ƒ
Make sure that each high voltage terminal is connected securely after you
replace this board.
SM
3-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
3.3.7 EGB (ENGINE BOARD) AND HIGH VOLTAGE POWER
SUPPLY BOARD 2
1.
Electrical board unit ( Electrical board unit)
2.
EGB shield [A] ( x 3, x 1)
3.
EGB [B] ( x 4, x 4)
ƒ
Remove the NVRAM from the old board. Then install it on the new board.
4.
High voltage terminal plate [C] ( x 1)
5.
High voltage power supply board 2 [D] ( x 3, x 2)
ƒ
Make sure that each high voltage terminal is connected securely after you
replace this board.
ƒ
Keep NVRAMs away from objects that can cause static electricity. The data in
NVRAMs can be corrupted by static electricity.
ƒ
Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. A half-disk is
engraved on one side of the NVRAM, and a guide mark is on one side of the
NVRAM slot. When you install the NVRAM, the half-disk and the guide mark
must be on the same side.
G190
3-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
Replacement
Adjustment
3.3.8 LCD PANEL
1.
LCD panel [A] ( x 1)
3.3.9 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings) before beginning the following
procedure.
NVRAM on the EGB (Engine Board)
For this procedure, you must know the device number and the destination code ( step 8).
1.
Start the SP mode.
2.
Use SP5-990 to print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) if
possible.
3.
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord.
4.
Replace the NVRAM on the EGB and reassemble the machine.
5.
Plug in the power cord.
6.
Turn on the main power switch.
7.
Start the SP mode.
8.
Contact your supervisor to enter the machine’s device number.
ƒ
SC542 may be displayed until the machine’s device number and destination
code are programmed properly.
9.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
10. Start the SP mode.
SM
3-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
11. Use SP5-801-002 to reset the engine settings.
12. Reset the meter charge settings (SP5-930-001).
13. Enter the SP mode changes previously made at the factory and the field.
14. Replace all maintenance kits with new ones.
NVRAM on the Controller
1.
Start the SP mode.
2.
Use SP5-990 to print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) if
possible.
3.
Use SP5-824 to upload the NVRAM data if possible.
4.
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord.
5.
Replace the NVRAM on the controller and reassemble the machine.
6.
Plug in the power cord.
7.
Turn on the main power switch.
8.
Start the SP mode.
9.
Use SP5-825 to download the NVRAM data if possible. If it can be done, the following
steps are not required.
10. Use Memory Clear (SP5-801) to reset this data:
ƒ
SCS (SP5-801-003)
ƒ
PRT (SP5-801-008)
ƒ
NCS (SP5-801-011)
11. Do Counter Clear (SP7-810).
12. Make these contract-related settings:
ƒ
Counter Method (SP5-045)
ƒ
Telephone Number Setting > Fax Telephone Number (SP5-812-002) if the meter
charge mode (SP5-930-001) is “ON” (enabled)
13. Enter the SP mode changes previously made at the factory and the field.
G190
3-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Components
NVRAMs on the EGB and Controller
For this procedure, you must know the device number and the destination code ( step 10).
1.
Start the SP mode.
2.
Use SP5-990 to print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) if
possible.
Use SP5-824 to upload the NVRAM data if possible.
4.
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord.
5.
Replace the NVRAMs on the EGB and the controller, and reassemble the machine.
6.
Plug in the power cord.
7.
Turn on the main power switch.
8.
Start the SP mode.
9.
Use SP5-825 to download the NVRAM data if possible.
Replacement
Adjustment
3.
10. Contact your supervisor to enter the machine’s device number.
ƒ
SC542 may be displayed until the machine’s device number and destination
code is programmed properly.
11. Turn the main power switch off and on.
12. Start the SP mode.
13. Use SP5-801-002 to reset the engine settings.
14. Use Memory Clear (SP5-801) to reset this data:
ƒ
SCS (SP5-801-003)
ƒ
PRT (SP5-801-008)
ƒ
NCS (SP5-801-011)
15. Do Counter Clear (SP7-810).
16. Reset the meter charge settings (SP5-930-001).
17. Make these contract-related settings:
ƒ
Counter Method (SP5-045)
ƒ
Telephone Number Setting > Fax Telephone Number (SP5-812-002)
18. Enter the SP mode changes previously made at the factory and the field.
19. Replace all maintenance kits with new ones.
SM
3-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Optics
3.4 LASER OPTICS
ƒ
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the printer before you do the procedures
in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS
The caution decal is attached as shown below
ƒ
Make sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet before you do any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This
printer uses a class 3B laser beam with a wavelength of 648 to 663 nm and an
output of 9 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
3.4.2 LD UNIT
Replacement
ƒ
G190
Print the SMC report with SP 5990 2 before you replace the LDU.
3-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Optics
1.
Electrical board unit ( Electrical board unit)
2.
LDU [A]
Color Registration Adjustment
ƒ
You must manually do the color registration adjustment after you install the new
LDU.
ƒ
When the polygon mirror motor or LDB unit is defective, only replace the defective
adjustment procedure.
1.
Print the SMC report with SP 5990 2 before you replace the LDU. Find the values for SP
2181 1, SP 2181 11, 2181 21, and 2181 31.
2.
Do SP 2111 2 (Pro. Position Adj > Execute) to roughly adjust the line position after you
install the new LDU. “Result = OK” shows on the LCD if this is done correctly. If not, do it
again until you get “OK”.
3.
Do SP2111 3 (Skew Adjust. > Execute) to measure the skew values for each color.
“Result = OK” shows on the LCD if this is done correctly. If not, do it again until you get
“OK”.
4.
Check the skew values with SP 2181: Then write down the values. (You can also check
these if you print the SMC report again with SP 5990 2. The values will probably be
different from the values on the report that you printed in step 1.)
5.
SM
ƒ
SP 2181 1 for black skew
ƒ
SP 2181 11 for magenta
ƒ
SP 2181 21 for cyan
ƒ
SP 2181 31 for yellow
Open the left cover
3-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Replacement
Adjustment
parts. At this time, if only the motor is changed it is not necessary to do this
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Optics
6.
Adjust the skew adjustment cam [A] for each color with a screwdriver. You must adjust
the skew values for each color until they are all the same as the value for magenta that
you found in step 1, before you replaced the LDU.
ƒ
For example: If the new value for K (after step 4) is -300 and the old value for
magenta (in step 1) is –250, you must adjust the skew for K until it is -250.
ƒ
Turn the cam as shown in the “Cam Rotation Direction” column below to increase
the skew value.
ƒ
Turn it in the opposite direction from this to decrease the skew value.
ƒ
“Adjustment value” shows the change when you turn the cam one click.
Color
Cam Rotation Direction
Adjustment Value
Yellow
CW
14 μm
Cyan
CW
10 μm
Magenta
CCW
10 μm
Black
CCW
10 μm
ƒ
The adjustment values in the table are not exact values. These are
approximate values.
ƒ
ƒ
CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counter-clockwise
The diagram shows the effect on line skew [B] when you turn the cam in a counter
clockwise direction.
7.
Close the left cover. Then measure the skew values again with SP 2111 3. (To do this,
G190
3-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Optics
repeat step 3.)
ƒ
If these are close to the value for magenta that you found in step 1 (within one click
in the above table), go to the next step. If not, do SP 2111 3 again until you get a
good result.
8.
Do SP 2111 1 to finely adjust the line position for each color.
ƒ
When you get “Result = OK”, this adjustment is completed.
Replacement
Adjustment
9.
Try SP 2111 2 if “Result = OK” does not show.
SM
3-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Optics
3.4.3 LDB
1.
LDU ( LD unit)
2.
LDB [A] ( x 2)
ƒ
Make sure that the spring plate [B] holds the LDB unit.
3.4.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
1.
LDU ( LD unit)
2.
Top cover [A] ( x 5, tabs x 4)
ƒ
G190
Do not touch the mirrors. Clean with an optics cloth if you touch the mirrors.
3-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
3.
Polygon motor cover [B] ( x 3), shading plate [C], sponge [D]
4.
Polygon mirror motor [E] ( x 4), drive board [F] ( x 2, x 1, 1 flat cable)
Replacement
Adjustment
Laser Optics
3.4.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS
1.
LDU ( LD unit)
2.
Top cover
3.
Synchronizing detector board unit [A] ( x 1)
4.
Synchronizing detector board [B] ( x 1, x 1)
ƒ
SM
Do not touch the mirrors. Clean with an optics cloth if you touch the mirrors.
3-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Optics
3.4.6 LDU SHUTTER MOTOR UNIT AND SENSOR
1.
Electrical board unit ( Electrical board unit)
2.
LDU ( LD unit)
3.
LDU shutter motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, = x 1)
4.
Slide up the gear [B] ( x1).
5.
LDU shutter sensor [C]
6.
LDU shutter motor [D] ( x 2, x 1)
ƒ
To do this, place the projection [E] of the gear as shown in the diagram below.
The worm gear [F] must turn.
G190
3-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
3.5 PAPER FEED
Replacement
Adjustment
3.5.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER
1.
Standard tray [A]
2.
Slide the side roller holder [B]
3.
Paper feed roller [C]
SM
3-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
3.5.2 PAPER FRICTION PAD
1.
Standard tray ( Paper feed roller)
2.
Paper friction pad [A]
ƒ
Make sure that the paper friction pad stick is put through the spring when you
reassemble it.
3.5.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR
1.
By-pass tray cover [A]
2.
By-pass paper size sensor [B] ( x 1)
G190
3-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
3.5.4 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER, FRICTION PAD
1.
By-pass tray cover [A]
2.
By-pass tray [B] ( x 2, x 1) and the harness cover [C]
3.
By-pass feed shaft cover [D]
4.
Move the holding roller left [E]
5.
By-pass feed roller [F]
SM
3-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
6.
By-pass friction pad [G]
ƒ
Pull up the edge of the by-pass friction pad ({).
ƒ
Pull the by-pass friction pad forward. When you do this, hold down the edge where its
shaft is located ().
Reassembling the by-pass friction pad
1.
Place the spring [H] on the projection [I] of the by-pass tray.
2.
Hold down the by-pass friction pad after you put the spring on the projection of pad’s
reverse side (}).
3.
Release the by-pass tray friction pad when it passes through the bushing [J].
4.
Pull up the shaft of the by-pass friction pad to the busing until it is clicked.
G190
3-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
3.5.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR
1.
Front Door
2.
Fusing unit ( Fusing unit)
3.
Registration guide [A]
4.
Registration sensor [B] ( x 1)
3.5.6 PAPER VOLUME SENSOR, END SENSOR AND PAPER
WIDTH SENSOR
1.
Standard tray ( Paper feed roller)
2.
Front door
3.
Fusing unit ( Fusing unit)
4.
Harness cover [A] ( x 1)
5.
Front door cover [B] ( x 1, x 2)
SM
3-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
6.
Registration guide ( Registration sensor)
7.
Paper dust case holder [C]
8.
Tray paper sensor box [D] ( x 2)
G190
3-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Paper Feed
9.
Tray paper sensor box cover [E] ( x 1,)
10. Paper height sensor [F] ( x 1)
11. Paper height sensor [G] ( x 1)
12. Paper end sensor [H] ( x 1)
13. Paper width sensor [I] ( x 1)
ƒ
Each sensor and each cable have a number written on them. Make sure to
connect the correct cables to each sensor.
SM
3-27
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
3.5.7 PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND TEMPERATURE/ HUMIDITY
SENSOR
1.
Standard tray ( Paper feed roller)
2.
Rear cover [A]
3.
Paper size sensor [B] ( x 1)
4.
Temperature/Humidity sensor [C] ( x 1, x 1)
3.5.8 PAPER FEED MOTOR
1.
Front door cover ( Paper volume sensor, end sensor and paper width sensor)
2.
Right cover ( x 1)
3.
Side bar ( Electrical board unit)
4.
Harness guide [A] ( x 1, x 3)
G190
3-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Front support unit [B] ( x 3)
6.
Paper feed motor [C] ( x 4, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
5.
3.5.9 PAPER REGISTRATION CLUTCH, PAPER FEED CLUTCH
AND BY-PASS CLUTCH
1.
Front door
2.
Front door cover ( Electrical board unit)
3.
Right cover ( Electrical board unit)
4.
Side bar ( Electrical board unit)
5.
Harness cover ( Duplex motor and inverter motor)
6.
Paper registration clutch [A] ( x 1, h x1)
SM
3-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
7.
By-pass clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)
8.
Front support unit ( Transfer roller contact motor)
9.
Paper feed clutch support [C] ( x 1)
10. Paper feed clutch [D] ( x 1)
G190
3-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
3.6 DEVELOPMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
3.6.1 COLOR DEVELOPMENT MOTOR, COLOR OPC MOTOR
AND BLACK OPC/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
1.
Front door
2.
Right cover ( Electrical board unit)
3.
Color development motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
4.
Color OPC motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
5.
Black OPC/development motor [C] ( x 4, x 1)
SM
3-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
3.6.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH
1.
Front door
2.
Top cover
3.
Right cover ( Electrical board unit)
4.
Development clutch plate [A] ( x 2)
5.
Development clutch [B] (metal pin x 1, x 1)
3.6.3 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR
1.
Front door
2.
Top cover
G190
3-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
3.
Right cover ( Electrical board unit)
4.
Transfer belt contact motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
3.6.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
1.
Front cover
2.
Top cover
3.
Right cover ( Electrical board unit)
4.
Toner supply motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
5.
Toner supply motor [B] ( x 2)
3.6.5 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR
1.
Front door
2.
Left cover
3.
Front door support unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
SM
3-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
4.
Inner cover [B] ( x 2)
5.
Transfer roller contact motor unit [C] ( x 2, x 1)
6.
Transfer roller contact motor [D] ( x 2)
G190
3-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
1.
Front door
2.
Fusing unit ( Fusing unit)
3.
ID sensor cover [A] ( x 1)
4.
ID sensor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1)
SM
Replacement
Adjustment
3.6.6 ID SENSORS
ƒ
Do SP 2111 4 to adjust the ID sensors after you replace the ID sensor.
ƒ
Do SP 3148 1 to input the bar code number of the ID sensor board.
3-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Drive
3.7 DRIVE
3.7.1 DRIVE UNIT
1.
Top cover
2.
Front door
3.
Left cover
4.
Transfer belt unit
5.
PCU x 4
6.
Toner bottle x 4
7.
Toner supply motor unit x 4 ( Toner supply motor)
ƒ
Clean the toner hopper and toner transport path before you remove the toner
supply motor unit. If not, toner scattering can occur.
8.
Right cover ( Electrical board unit)
9.
Top frame [A] ( x 5)
10. Fusing unit fan [B] ( x 1)
G190
3-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Drive
11. Harness guide [C] ( x 2)
12. Drive unit [D] ( x 6, x 16)
SM
3-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Duplex
3.8 DUPLEX
3.8.1 DUPLEX JAM SENSOR
1.
Front door cover ( Paper volume sensor, end sensor and paper width sensor)
2.
Duplex jam sensor 1 [A] ( x 1)
3.
Duplex jam sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)
G190
3-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Duplex
Replacement
Adjustment
3.8.2 INVERTER SENSOR
1.
Front door
2.
Duplex paper guide plate [A] ( x 6)
3.
Inverter sensor board [B]
4.
Inverter sensor [C] ( x 1)
SM
3-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Duplex
3.8.3 DUPLEX MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
1.
Front door
2.
Front door cover ( Paper volume sensor, end sensor and paper width sensor)
3.
Duplex paper guide plate [A] ( x 6)
4.
Harness cover [B] ( x 2)
5.
Inverter motor [C] ( x 2, x 1)
6.
Harness [D]
7.
Harness cover [E]
8.
Duplex roller unit [F] ( x 4)
9.
Duplex motor [G] ( x 2, x 1)
G190
3-40
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
3.9 FUSING
ƒ
Make sure that the fusing unit is cool before you touch it. The fusing unit can be
very hot.
ƒ
Make sure to restore the insulators, shields, etc after you service the fusing unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
3.9.1 FUSING UNIT
1.
Front door
2.
Fusing unit [A]
3.9.2 THERMISTOR AND THERMOSTAT
1.
Front door
2.
Fusing unit (see above)
3.
Fusing unit guide plate [A] ( x 4)
SM
3-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
4.
Release the connector [B] from the fusing lower cover [C] (hook x 1).
5.
Fusing lower cover [C] ( x 2)
6.
Thermistor with bracket [D] ( x 2, x 1)
ƒ
Do not remove the thermistor from the bracket when removing it. The pressure
of the thermistor plate to the fusing belt is adjusted properly in the factory. If you
remove it, some image problem may occur.
G190
3-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Fusing
7.
Fusing upper cover [E] ( x 4)
8.
Thermostat [F] x 2 ( x 3)
ƒ
Do not recycle a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if
you do this.
SM
3-43
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
3.9.3 FUSING LAMP
1.
Fusing unit
2.
Fusing unit upper and lower cover ( Thermistor and thermostat)
3.
Fusing supporter right and left plate ( Thermistor and thermostat)
4.
Fusing lamp supporter right [A] ( x 1) and left plate [B] ( x 1)
5.
Fusing lamp [C] ( x 2)
3.9.4 FUSING EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR
1.
Front door
2.
Paper exit unit ( x 3)
3.
Sensor board [A] ( x 1, x 2)
4.
Fusing exit senor [B]
5.
Paper exit sensor [C]
G190
3-44
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
Replacement
Adjustment
3.9.5 FUSING REGISTRATION SENSOR
1.
Front door
2.
Paper guide [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3.
Fusing registration sensor [B]
3.9.6 FAN DIRECTION
ƒ
You must reinstall the cooling fans in the original orientations. Do not reinstall the
cooling fans opposite to the original orientations, or the air will be blown in the
wrong directions.
SM
3-45
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Adjustments
3.10 ADJUSTMENTS
3.10.1 GAMMA ADJUSTMENT
ƒ
Clean and/or replace related parts first to solve color quality problems. Do these
procedures if adjustments are necessary.
Summary
To adjust the printer gamma:
ƒ
Select the print mode you want to calibrate
ƒ
Print a color calibration test sheet
ƒ
Make the gradation scales on the printout smooth from the lowest to the highest density.
Adjust the CMY gradation scale at the top of the chart by balancing the density of the C,
M, and Y gradation scales - the CMY gray scale should change smoothly from minimum
to maximum. There should be no coloration.
Examine this color adjustment sheet:
G190
3-46
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Adjustments
You can adjust 15 points for each color: (example [A]) between 0 (lowest density) [B] and
255 (highest density) [C]. For each point, you can adjust the density within 0 and 255.
The gradation scales marked ‘Default’ are printed according to the default gamma settings in
the flash ROM in the controller. The gamma adjustment changes the densities at the
adjustable points in the gradation scale. The gradation scale marked “Current” shows the
current settings.
Compare the “Current” gradation scale with the ‘Default’ at the time you do the adjustment
procedure. Select the density for each of the 15 adjustable points, excluding points 0 and
255, from the ‘Default’ gradation scale.
The NVRAM holds three sets of controller gamma settings:
ƒ
SM
Those saved this time: Controller SP 1101 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Current)
3-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Adjustments
ƒ
Those saved in the previous adjustment: Controller SP 1101 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Prev)
ƒ
The factory settings: Controller SP 1101 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Factory).
Adjustment Procedure
1.
Enter the controller service mode.
2.
Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1102 “ToneCtlSet”. Then press the
Enter key.
3.
Use the up/down key to select the mode you want to calibrate, Then press the Escape
key until you get back to the controller service mode menu.
4.
Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1103 “PrnColorSheet”. Then press the
Enter key.
5.
Use the up/down key to select Controller SP 1103 001 “ToneCtlSheet” (normally this is
displayed by default). Then press the Enter key.
6.
When “Execute?” shows, press the Enter key to print out the “color calibration test
sheet”.
7.
Press the Escape key 2 times to exit from the menu when “Execute OK” shows. (You
return to Controller SP 1103 “PrnColorSheet” in the controller service menu.)
8.
Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1104 “ToneCtlValue”. Then press the
enter key.
9.
Use the up/down arrow key to select the setting you want to adjust. Then press the
enter key. The three digits in the display (example ‘016’) indicate a position on the color
calibration test sheet.
G190
3-48
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
Operation Panel Display
Color Calibration Test Sheet
Set Black 1
Default Value 16
Set Black 2
Default Value 32
Set Black 3
Default Value 48
:
:
:
:
Set Black 13
Default Value 208
Set Black 14
Default Value 224
Set Black 15
Default Value 240
Set Cyan 1 to 15
See Set Black 1 to 15
Set Magenta 1 to 15
See Set Black 1 to 15
Set Yellow 1 to 15
See Set Black 1 to 15
3-49
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Adjustments
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Adjustments
Adjust the color density at each of the 15 points for each of the four colors.
ƒ
Do these to decide what density value to input:
ƒ
Look at the color adjustment sheet.
ƒ
Look at the gradation scale entitled ‘Default’ for the color you want to adjust.
ƒ
Go along the scale until you reach the density you want to input.
ƒ
Read off the value on the scale and store it in the machine:
ƒ
Use the up/down key to move the cursor along the three-digit display. Then
press the Enter key.
ƒ
Use the up/down key to change the digit at the cursor. Then press the Enter
key.
ƒ
Press the Escape key to exit from the menu.
ƒ
Do the same for all 15 points.
10. When the density setting is complete for all colors, print out a color adjustment sheet
again and make sure that the gradation scale for each printed color is smooth and that
the CMY gradation scale is gray. Do the adjustment again if there is an anomaly
(normally, repeat this procedure 3 to 5 times).
11. Do these when the adjustment results are satisfactory:
ƒ
Use Controller SP 1105 “ToneCtlSave” in the controller service menu, to store the
new settings in the controller.
ƒ
Reset the controller (press the [Reset] key when the machine is off line”) to use the
new settings.
ƒ
G190
You must reset the controller to keep the new settings in the controller NVRAM.
3-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Replacement
Adjustment
Adjustments
TROUBLESHOOTING
SM
51
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control Results
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL RESULTS
The table below lists the process control results shown in SP 3821.
SM
Result
Notes
10
Success
No error
21
ID sensor correction error
SC 400
22
ID sensor: LED adjustment error
SC 418
31
Charge bias correction error
SC 300 to 307
51
High Vmin (Bk), High K2 (Color) error
52
Low K2 (Color) error
53
High K5 error
54
Low K5 error
55
High development gamma
56
Low development gamma
57
Development bias adjustment error
58
Development bias adjustment error
Troubleshooting
Number
SP 3145 (see the note
below the table)
SP 3146 (see the note
below the table)
SP 3147 (see the note
below the table)
SP 3147 (see the note
below the table)
Gamma > 5.0 (see the note
below the table)
Gamma < 0.5 (see the note
below the table)
4-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Vk >150V (see the note
below the table)
Vk < -150V (see the note
below the table)
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control Results
Number
90
Result
Notes
No process control
Interrupt during the
99
Not successful
process control (e.g. Door
open)
ƒ
This error code does not usually occur. If no problem is observed with image
density and/or development gamma, nothing needs to be done. If an image
problem such as low image density is observed, check the following points:
Transfer belt/PCU/ID sensor/Toner bottle
The 8 numbers on the LCD in SP 3821 indicate the process control result for each color.
There are two numbers for each color. The numbers are shown from left to right on the
display as follows: Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow. For example, if process control for each
color is successful: 10 (Black), 10 (Magenta), 10 (Cyan), 10 (Yellow)
G190
4-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.2.1 SUMMARY
1.
All SCs are logged.
2.
First disconnect then reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs if the
problem concerns electrical circuit boards.
3.
First check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors if the problem
concerns a motor lock.
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level
Definition
Reset Procedure
A
machine cannot be operated until a service
the main power switch off
representative has reset the SC.
and on.
Troubleshooting
To prevent damage to the machine, the main Do SP 5810, and then turn
SCs that disable only the features that use
the defective item. Although these SCs are
B
not shown to the user under normal
Turn the operation switch or
conditions, they are displayed on the
main switch off and on.
operation panel only when the defective
feature is selected.
C
The SC history is updated. The machine can
be operated as usual.
SCs displayed on the operation panel. These
are redisplayed if the error occurs again.
SM
Only the SC history is
updated.
Turning the main switch off then on resets
D
The SC will not be displayed.
4-3
Turn the operation switch off
and on.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
4.2.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
ƒ
Remove the NVRAM from the old board and install it on the new one when you
replace the EGB or the controller board.
ƒ
The SC level is indicated under SC number in the list below.
ƒ
The numbers (1, etc.) in the “Possible Cause/Requirement Action” column indicate the
required actions.
Engine SC
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Incorrect serial number
195
[D]
When checking the
registered product
ƒ
the printer’s product number.
number, it does not match
the printer’s product
Registered product number does not match
1.
Ask your service key man.
number.
Polygon motor error: Time out with the polygon motor activated
202
After the polygon motor
[D]
turns on or changes the
speed, SCRDY_N is not
active within 10 seconds.
ƒ
Disconnected cable from the polygon motor
drive board or defective connection
ƒ
Defective polygon motor or drive board
Polygon motor error: Time out with the polygon motor inactivated
203
[C]
After the polygon motor
turns off or changes the
ƒ
drive board or defective connection
speed, SCRDY_N is not
inactive within 10
Disconnected cable from the polygon motor
ƒ
Defective polygon motor or drive board
seconds.
G190
4-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Polygon motor error: XSCRDY signal error
204
[C]
PMRDY_N signal
consecutively detects that
the polygon motor is an
inactive state while LDB
unit scans.
ƒ
Disconnected cable from the polygon motor
drive board or defective connection
ƒ
Defective polygon motor or drive board
1.
Check the connectors.
2.
Replace the polygon motor.
3.
Replace the polygon motor drive board.
Polygon motor error: XSCRDY signal not stable
ƒ
Disconnected cable from the polygon motor
drive board or defective connection
205
consecutively detects that
[D]
the polygon motor is an
ƒ
Defective polygon motor or drive board.
inactive state while the
1.
Check the connectors.
polygon motor turns on or 2.
changes the speed.
Troubleshooting
PMRDY_N signal
3.
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the polygon motor drive board.
Trailing edge laser detection error: [K]
ƒ
SM
Disconnected cable from the laser
The laser synchronizing
synchronizing detection unit or defective
detection signal for LDB
connection
210
[K] of the trailing edge is
ƒ
Defective laser synchronizing detector
[C]
not detected for one
ƒ
Defective LDB
second after the LDB unit
ƒ
Defective EGB
turned on when detecting
1.
Check the connectors.
the main scan
2.
Replace the laser-synchronizing detector.
magnification.
3.
Replace the LDB.
4.
Replace the EGB.
4-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Trailing edge laser detection error: [Y]
The laser synchronizing
detection signal for LDB
211
[Y] of the trailing edge is
[C]
not detected for one
second after the LDB unit
Same as SC 210
turned on when detecting
the main scan
magnification.
Trailing edge laser detection error: [M]
The laser synchronizing
detection signal for LDB
212
[M] of the trailing edge is
[C]
not detected for one
second after the LDB unit
Same as SC 210
turned on when detecting
the main scan
magnification.
Trailing edge laser detection error: [C]
The laser synchronizing
detection signal for LDB
213
[C] of the trailing edge is
[C]
not detected for one
second after the LDB unit
Same as SC 210
turned on when detecting
the main scan
magnification.
G190
4-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Laser Synchronizing Detection Error: LDB of the leading edge [K]
ƒ
synchronizing detection unit or defective
The laser synchronizing
[D]
[K] of the leading edge is
not output for two
seconds after LDB unit
turns on while the polygon
motor is rotating normally.
connection
ƒ
Defective laser synchronizing detector
ƒ
Defective LDB
ƒ
Defective EGB
1.
Check the connectors.
2.
Replace the laser-synchronizing detector.
3.
Replace the LDB.
4.
Replace the EGB.
Troubleshooting
220
detection signal for LDB
Disconnected cable from the laser
Leading edge laser detection error: [Y]
The laser synchronizing
222
[D]
detection signal for LDB
[Y] of the leading edge is
not output for two
Same as SC 220
seconds after LDB unit
turns on while the polygon
motor is rotating normally.
Leading edge laser detection error: [M]
The laser synchronizing
224
[D]
detection signal for LDB
[M] of the leading edge is
not output for two
Same as SC 220
seconds after LDB unit
turns on while the polygon
motor is rotating normally.
SM
4-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Leading edge laser detection error: [C]
The laser synchronizing
226
[D]
detection signal for LDB
[C] of the leading edge is
not output for two
Same as SC 220
seconds after LDB unit
turns on while the polygon
motor is rotating normally.
FGATE: On error [K]
230
[C]
The PFGATE ON signal
does not assert within 5
seconds after processing
the image in normal job or
MUSIC for [K] starts.
ƒ
Defective connection between the controller
board and EGB
ƒ
Defective cable between the EGB and LDB
1.
Check the connectors.
2.
Replace the LDB.
3.
Replace the EGB.
FGATE: Off error [K]
ƒ
The PFGATE ON
signal still asserts
within 5 seconds after ƒ
Defective connection between the controller
231
processing the image
board and EGB
[C]
in normal job or
ƒ
Defective cable between the EGB and LDB
MUSIC for [K] ends.
1.
Check the connectors.
The PFGATE ON
2.
Replace the LDB.
signal still asserts
3.
Replace the EGB.
ƒ
when the next job
starts.
G190
4-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
FGATE: On error [Y]
The PFGATE register of
232
GAVD does not assert
[C]
within 5 seconds after
processing the image in
Same as SC 230
normal job or MUSIC for
[Y] started.
FGATE: Off error [Y]
The PFGATE ON
Troubleshooting
ƒ
signal still asserts
within 5 seconds after
233
processing the image
[C]
in normal job or
MUSIC for [K] ends.
ƒ
Same as SC 231
The PFGATE ON
signal still asserts
when the next job
starts.
FGATE: On error [M]
The PFGATE register of
234
GAVD does not assert
[C]
within 5 seconds after
processing the image in
Same as SC 230
normal job or MUSIC for
[M] started.
SM
4-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
FGATE: Off error [M]
ƒ
The PFGATE ON
signal still asserts
within 5 seconds after
235
processing the image
[C]
in normal job or
MUSIC for [M] ends.
ƒ
Same as SC 231
The PFGATE ON
signal still asserts
when the next job
starts.
FGATE: On error [C]
The PFGATE register of
236
GAVD does not assert
[C]
within 5 seconds after
processing the image in
Same as SC 230
normal job or MUSIC for
[C] started.
FGATE: Off error [C]
ƒ
The PFGATE ON
signal still asserts
within 5 seconds after
237
processing the image
[C]
in normal job or
MUSIC for [C] ends.
ƒ
Same as SC 231
The PFGATE ON
signal still asserts
when the next job
starts.
G190
4-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
LDB error [K]
240
[D]
The EGB detects LDB
error a few times
consecutively when LDB
unit turns on after LDB
ƒ
Defective LDB
1.
Replace the LDB.
initialization.
LDB error [Y]
[D]
The EGB detects LDB
error a few times
consecutively when LDB
Same as SC240
Troubleshooting
241
unit turns on after LDB
initialization.
LDB error [M]
242
[D]
The EGB detects LDB
error a few times
consecutively when LDB
Same as SC240
unit turns on after LDB
initialization.
LDB error [C]
243
[D]
The EGB detects LDB
error a few times
consecutively when LDB
Same as SC240
unit turns on after LDB
initialization.
SM
4-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
LDU shutter error
270
Sensor output does not
[D]
change even if 1 second
passes after the LDU
ƒ
Sensor defective or LDU shutter motor
defective
1.
Replace the LDU shutter sensor or shutter
motor.
shutter motor is on.
High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [K]
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
300
The measured voltage is
ƒ
Disconnected harness
[D]
not proper when EGB
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
measures the charge
1.
Check the connectors.
output for each color.
2.
Replace the PCU for black.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [M]
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
301
The measured voltage is
ƒ
Disconnected harness
[D]
not proper when EGB
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
measures the charge
1.
Check the connectors.
output for each color.
2.
Replace the PCU for magenta.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
G190
4-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [C]
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
302
The measured voltage is
ƒ
Disconnected harness
[D]
not proper when EGB
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
measures the charge
1.
Check the connectors.
output for each color.
2.
Replace the PCU for cyan.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
303
The measured voltage is
ƒ
Disconnected harness
[D]
not proper when EGB
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
measures the charge
1.
Check the connectors.
output for each color.
2.
Replace the PCU for yellow.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
ƒ
Disconnected harness
The charge current less
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
than 200 µA is detected.
1.
Check the connectors.
2.
Replace the PCU for black.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
Troubleshooting
High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [Y]
Charge AC bias error [K]
304
[D]
SM
4-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Charge AC bias error [M]
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
ƒ
Disconnected harness
The charge current less
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
than 200 µA is detected.
1.
Check the connectors.
2.
Replace the PCU for magenta.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
ƒ
Disconnected harness
The charge current less
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
than 200 µA is detected.
1.
Check the connectors.
2.
Replace the PCU for cyan.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
ƒ
Defective charge roller
ƒ
Defective connectors
ƒ
Disconnected harness
The charge current less
ƒ
Defective high voltage power 1
than 200 µA is detected.
1.
Check the connectors.
2.
Replace the PCU for yellow.
3.
Replace the drum positioning plate.
4.
Replace the high voltage power 1.
305
[D]
Charge AC bias error [C]
306
[D]
Charge AC bias error [Y]
307
[D]
G190
4-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Color development motor error
ƒ
LOCK signal is not
detected for more
than two seconds
325
while the motor
[D]
START signal is on.
ƒ
LOCK signal is not
cancelled within two
ƒ
Color development motor slip due to the
increase of the load torque
1.
Adjust the load torque properly by replacing
or cleaning the development unit.
2.
Replace or repair the development motor if
the load torque is normal.
seconds after the
Troubleshooting
motor is off.
TD sensor: Output maximum error [K]
360
[D]
Vt is more than the
ƒ
Defective connector connection
maximum value (4.5) for
ƒ
Increasing toner density
three times consecutively. 1.
361
[D]
362
[D]
363
[D]
Replace the PCU.
TD sensor: Output maximum error [M]
Same as SC 360
TD sensor: Output maximum error [C]
Same as SC 360
TD sensor: Output maximum error [Y]
Same as SC 360
TD sensor: Output minimum error [K]
364
[D]
Vt is less than the
ƒ
Defective connector connection
minimum value (0.5) for
ƒ
Decreasing toner density
three times consecutively. 1.
SM
Replace the PCU.
4-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
365
[D]
366
[D]
367
[D]
Possible Cause/Required Action
TD sensor Output minimum error [M]
Same as SC 364
TD sensor: Output minimum error [C]
Same as SC 364
TD sensor: Output minimum error [Y]
Same as SC 364
TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [K]
ƒ
Vt is less than 1 V
even though the
control power voltage
368
is adjusted to the
[D]
maximum.
ƒ
Vt is more than 1 V
even though the
control power voltage
ƒ
Defective connector connection
ƒ
Defective TD sensor
ƒ
The toner density in the developer is
different from the initial condition.
1.
Replace the PCU.
is adjusted to the
minimum.
369
[D]
370
[D]
371
[D]
G190
TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [M]
Same as SC 368
TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [C]
Same as SC 368
TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [Y]
Same as SC 368
4-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [K]
372
Vt is not (A ±0.2) when
[D]
initial setting for TD
sensor is executed.
A = SP3011-001 for [K]
ƒ
Defective connector connection
ƒ
Defective TD sensor
ƒ
The toner density in the developer is
different from the initial condition.
1.
Replace the PCU.
TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [M]
Vt is not (A ±0.2) when
[D]
initial setting for TD
sensor is executed.
Same as 372
Troubleshooting
373
A = SP 3011 2 for [M]
TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [C]: same as 372
374
Vt is not (A ±0.2) when
[D]
initial setting for TD
sensor is executed.
Same as 372
A = SP 3011 3 for [C]
TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [Y]: same as 372
375
Vt is not (A ±0.2) when
[D]
initial setting for TD
sensor is executed.
Same as 372
A = SP 3011 4 for [Y]
Drum gear position sensor error
380
[C]
When receiving the input
signal of drum gear
ƒ
Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor
position sensor is not
1.
Clean the drum gear position sensor.
correctly done, SC380 is
2.
Replace the drive unit.
logged.
SM
4-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Drum motor error [K]
396
[D]
ƒ
OPC motor slip due to the excessive load
The LOCK signal is not
1.
Clean the PCU.
detected for 2 seconds
2.
Check the cable from the Black OPC/
Development motor. Replace it if necessary.
more while the start signal
of the drum motor for
3.
Replace the EGB.
black PCU is output.
4.
Replace the Black OPC/Development
motor.
Drum motor error [CMY]
397
[D]
The LOCK signal is not
detected for 2 seconds
more while the start signal Same as SC 396
of the drum motor for
color PCU is output.
ID sensor correction error
400
[D]
Regular Vsp is not (4
±0.5V) when ID sensor
correction is executed.
ƒ
Defective ID sensors
ƒ
Dirty ID sensors or transfer belt
ƒ
ID sensor life is over.
1.
Replace the ID sensors.
ID sensor: LED adjustment error
418
LED PWM adjustment is
ƒ
Defective ID sensors
[D]
not [A] for three times
ƒ
Dirty ID sensors or transfer belt
consecutively.
ƒ
ID sensor life is over.
[A] = 50 < [A] < 400
1.
Replace the ID sensors.
G190
4-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Transfer belt contact error
442
[D]
ƒ
Dirty transfer belt contact sensor
The transfer belt contact
ƒ
Defective transfer belt contact motor
sensor does not detect
ƒ
Disconnected connector of transfer belt
contact sensor or motor
the movement of actuator
at the sensor while the
ƒ
Disconnected cable
motor rotates.
1.
Replace the transfer belt contact sensor.
2.
Replace the transfer belt contact motor.
ƒ
Defective transfer belt motor
ƒ
Disconnected harness
1.
Replace the transfer belt motor
2.
Replace the image transfer unit.
ƒ
Defective transfer roller contact sensor
ƒ
Defective transfer roller contact motor
ƒ
Defective IOB
1.
Replace the transfer roller contact sensor.
2.
Replace the transfer roller contact motor.
3.
Replace the IOB.
443
[C]
The detected speed is
different from the normal
speed by 1% or more
Troubleshooting
Transfer belt speed error
Transfer roller contact error
452
[D]
The transfer roller contact
sensor does not detect
the movement of actuator
at the sensor while the
motor rotates.
SM
4-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
High Voltage Power 1: High voltage output error
ƒ
One of the DC bias outputs for each PCU is
shorted or one of the transfer belt bias
outputs for [Y], [M] and [C].
490
[D]
Error signal is detected 10
times consecutively.
ƒ
Power leaking
ƒ
Defective connection
ƒ
Disconnected cable
ƒ
Defective PCU
ƒ
Defective High Voltage Power 1
1.
Replace the High Voltage Power 1.
2.
Reset the cables and components.
3.
Replace the PCU.
High Voltage Power 2: High voltage output error
ƒ
One of the separation bias output,
development bias output and transfer belt
cleaning bias output is shorted or one of the
transfer belt bias output for [K] and transfer
491
[D]
Error signal is detected
for 10 times
consecutively.
G190
roller bias output is shorted.
ƒ
Power leaking
ƒ
Defective connection
ƒ
Defective PCU
ƒ
Defective High Voltage Power 2
1.
Replace the High Voltage Power 2.
2.
Reset the cables and components.
3.
Replace the PCU.
4-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Paper feed / Fusing motor error
ƒ
LOCK signal is not
detected for more
than two seconds
531
while the motor
[D]
START signal is on.
ƒ
LOCK signal is not
ƒ
Defective paper feed/ fusing motor
1.
Replace the paper feed/ fusing motor.
cancelled within two
seconds after the
Troubleshooting
motor is off.
Fan motor error
The fan motor “On” signal
is not detected for the
components below after
532
the drum motor for black
ƒ
Defective fan motor
[D]
is set to “On”.
1.
If the error occurs again, one of the fans is
ƒ
PSU fan
defective. Remove the covers, find the
ƒ
Fusing unit fan
defective fan and replace it.
ƒ
Polygon motor fan
ƒ
Drive unit fan
ƒ
Exit paper fan
Thermistor error
541
[A]
The thermistor output is
less than 0 °C for six
seconds.
SM
ƒ
Disconnected thermistor
ƒ
Defective connector connection
4-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Print ready temperature error
ƒ
The heating roller
temperature increase
that is less than 67
degrees for 9
seconds is detected
542
five times
[A]
consecutively.
ƒ
The fusing
temperature does not
reach the print ready
ƒ
Defective thermistor
ƒ
Thermistor coming off
ƒ
Incorrect power supply input at the main
power socket
ƒ
Defective fusing lamp
temperature within 15
seconds after the
fusing lamp was
controlled.
High temperature detection: Software
543
[A]
The thermistor detects
230°C for 0.2 seconds.
ƒ
Defective thermistor
ƒ
Defective I/O board
ƒ
Defective EGB
High temperature detection: Hard
ƒ
Defective thermistor
ƒ
Defective I/O board
The thermistor detects
ƒ
Defective EGB
250°C.
ƒ
Defective fusing unit, PSU, or EGB
1.
Replace the fusing unit.
2.
Replace the PSU.
544
[A]
G190
4-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Heating lamp error
545
[A]
The fusing lamp is
full-powered for 8
ƒ
Deformed thermistor
seconds after the heating
ƒ
Thermistor coming off
roller reaches the print
ƒ
Defective fusing lamp
though the heater
ƒ
Defective fusing lamp relay
relay is on after
ƒ
Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
turning on the main
ƒ
Unstable power supply
power or closing the
1.
Check the power supply source.
front door.
2.
Replace the PSU.
ready temperature.
Zero cross error
ƒ
The zero cross signal
Troubleshooting
is detected three
times even though
the heater relay is off
when turning on the
main power.
ƒ
The zero cross signal
is not detected for
three seconds even
547
[D]
ƒ
The detection error
occurs twice or more
in the ten zero cross
signal detections.
This error is defined
when the detected
zero cross signal is
less than 17 for 200
ms.
SM
4-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Zero cross frequency error
The detection error
occurs ten times in a row
in ten zero cross signal
detections. This error is
557
defined when the
[C]
detected zero cross signal ƒ
is more than 28 for 200
1.
Noise (high frequency)
Check the power supply source.
ms.
This SC is only logged. In
this case, the power
frequency is defined as
60 Hz.
Continuous paper jam at Fusing unit
The paper jam occurs
three times consecutively
559
[A]
at the fusing unit only
when the SP 1159 1 is set
to "1 (ON)". If not, this SP
does not occur.
The jam counter is
ƒ
Defective fusing entrance sensor
ƒ
Defective EGB
1.
Replace the fusing entrance sensor.
2.
Replace the EGB.
cleared when a sheet of
paper is fed normally.
G190
4-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Controller board command error
[D]
Loose connection
ƒ
Defective controller board
A command from the
ƒ
Defective EGB
controller board is not
1.
Check the connection of the controller
board.
received.
2.
Replace the controller board.
3.
Replace the EGB.
Controller Error
The following table shows the controller error codes. These codes show at these times if an
error occurs:
ƒ
Power-on
ƒ
After the power-on self diagnostic test
ƒ
SM
Always try turning the main switch off and on and check if the problem persists.
4-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Troubleshooting
687
ƒ
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
636
Possible Cause/Required Action
SD Card Error
Expanded authentication module error
There is no expanded
authentication module in
-001
[B]
ƒ
No expanded authentication module
ƒ
Defective SD card
ƒ
No DESS module
1.
Install the expanded authentication module.
2.
Install the SD card.
3.
Install the DESS module.
The version of the
ƒ
Incorrect module version
expanded authentication
1.
Install the correct file of the expanded
the machine.
The SD card or the file of
the expanded
authentication module is
broken.
There is no DESS module
in the machine.
Version error
-002
[B]
authentication module.
module is not correct.
Engine start-up error
670
[D]
A command from the
controller board is not
received.
ƒ
Defective engine board.
1.
Replace the engine board.
ƒ
Defective system program
ƒ
Defective controller board
1.
Reinstall the system program.
2.
Replace the controller board.
Watchdog error
818
[B]
While the system program
is running, no other
programs can run (due to
a bus hold or endless
loop).
819
G190
Kernel stop
4-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Process error
[0696e]
[B]
System completely down
ƒ
Defective RAM DIMM
ƒ
Defective controller
ƒ
Software error
1.
Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
2.
Replace the controller.
ƒ
Defective RAM DIMM
ƒ
Defective controller
ƒ
Software error
1.
Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
2.
Replace the controller.
ƒ
Defective CPU
1.
Replace the controller board.
ƒ
Defective memory
ƒ
Defective flash memory
ƒ
Defective CPU
1.
Replace the controller board.
[0766d]
[B]
Unexpected system
memory size
[4361]
[B]
Troubleshooting
VM full error
Cache error
Cache error in the CPU
The others
[----]
[B]
SM
Error in OS
4-27
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
820
Possible Cause/Required Action
Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU
[0001-0015] [000A-000D]: Detailed error code
During the boot monitor
[B]
program and
ƒ
Defective CPU device
self-diagnostic, any
ƒ
Defective boot monitor program or
self-diagnostic program
exception or cut-in are not
supposed to happen. If
1.
Replace the controller board.
these happen, it is
2.
Reinstall the system firmware.
ƒ
Defective CPU
ƒ
Defective local bus
1.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
2.
Reinstall the system program.
3.
Replace the controller board.
defined as SC.
[00FF]: Detailed error code
[B]
Cache access error in the
CPU
[0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]: Detailed error code
[B]
Exceptional command
does not operate even
ƒ
Defective CPU devices
though it is executed on
1.
Replace the controller board.
purpose.
[B]
G190
[060A-060E]: Detailed error code
Cut-in command does not ƒ
Defective CPU devices
operate when it is
ƒ
Defective ASIC devices
executed.
1.
Replace the controller board.
4-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
[0610]: Detailed error code
[B]
Timer cut-in does not
operate even though it is
set.
ƒ
Defective CPU devices
1.
Replace the controller board.
ƒ
Defective ASIC
ƒ
Defective devices in which ASIC detects
[0612]: Detailed error code
Cut-in in ASIC occurs.
cut-in.
1.
Replace the controller board.
ƒ
Defective CPU devices
ƒ
Mode bit data error, which is used for
Troubleshooting
[B]
[06FF]: Detailed error code
[B]
The pipeline clock
frequency rate is different
from the prescribed value.
initializing CPU.
1.
Replace the controller board.
ƒ
Insufficient CPU cache
ƒ
Insufficient memory process speed
1.
Replace the controller board.
2.
Replace the RAM DIMM.
[0702]: Detailed error code
The result when the
[B]
program is executed in
the command cache is
different from desirable
value.
[0709, 070A]: Detailed error code
[B]
SM
Even you write the data in ƒ
Defective CPU devices
the only cache of memory, ƒ
Incorrect SPD
the data is actually written ƒ
Boot mode setting error
in another area (not
1.
Replace the controller board.
cache) of memory.
2.
Replace the RAM DIMM.
4-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A]: Detailed error code
[B]
An error occurs when
ƒ
Defective CPU devices
checking the TLB.
1.
Replace the controller board.
[4002-4005]: Detailed error code
[B]
821
The calculation error in
ƒ
Defective CPU
the CPU occurs.
1.
Replace the CPU.
ƒ
Defective controller board
1.
Replace the controller.
ƒ
ASIC (controller board defective)
ƒ
Poor connection between North Bridge and
Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC
ASIC error
[0B00]
[B]
The write-&-verify check
error has occurred in the
ASIC.
ASIC not detected
[0B06]
[B]
The ASIC of the I/O is not
PCI I/F.
detected.
1.
Replace controller board.
ƒ
Defective bus connection
ƒ
Defective SHM
1.
Replace controller board
SHM register check error
[0B10]
Failed to initialize or could
[B]
not read connection bus.
Data in SHM register
incorrect.
G190
4-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
Timer error between ASIC and CPU
The CPU checks if the
[B]
compared with the CPU
timer. If the ASIC timer
does not function in the
specified range, this SC
code is displayed.
822
ƒ
System firmware problem
ƒ
Defective RAM-DIMM
ƒ
Defective controller
ƒ
Reinstall the controller system firmware.
1.
Replace the RAM-DIMM.
2.
Replace the controller board.
Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD
Troubleshooting
[0D05]
ASIC timer works properly
Timeout error/ [3004]: Command error
[3003]
[B]
ƒ
Loose connection
When the main switch is
ƒ
Defective HDD
turned on or starting the
ƒ
Defective controller
self-diagnostic, the HDD
1.
Check that the HDD is correctly connected
to the controller.
stays busy for the
specified time or more.
823
2.
Replace the HDD.
3.
Replace the controller.
Self-diagnostic Error: NIB
MAC address check sum error
[6101]
[B]
The result of the MAC
address check sum does
ƒ
Defective controller
not match the check sum
1.
Replace the controller.
stored in ROM.
PHY IC error
[6104]
[B]
The PHY IC on the
controller cannot be
Same as SC823-[6101]
correctly recognized.
SM
4-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
PHY IC loop-back error
[6105]
[B]
An error occurred during
the loop-back test for the
Same as SC823-[6101]
PHY IC on the controller.
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM
824
[B]
The controller cannot
recognize the standard
NVRAM installed or
detects that the NVRAM
is defective.
826
ƒ
NVRAM damaged or abnormal
ƒ
Backup battery has discharged
ƒ
NVRAM socket damaged
1.
Replace the NVRAM.
Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM
Clock error
ƒ
An RTC device is
recognized, and the
[1501]
difference between
[B]
the RTC device and
the CPU exceeds the
defined limit.
ƒ
ƒ
RTC defective
ƒ
NVRAM without RTC installed
ƒ
Backup battery discharged
1.
Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM
with an RTC device.
No RTC device is
recognized.
RTC not detected
ƒ
NVRAM without RTC installed
The RTC device is not
ƒ
Backup battery discharged
detected.
1.
Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM
[15FF]
[B]
with an RTC device.
G190
4-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
827
Possible Cause/Required Action
Self-diagnostic Error: RAM
Verification error
[0201]
Error is detected during a
[B]
write/verify check for the
standard RAM (SDRAM
DIMM).
ƒ
Loose connection
ƒ
Defective SDRAM DIMM
ƒ
Defective controller
1.
Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
2.
Replace the controller.
ƒ
Defective RAM DIMM
ƒ
Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
ƒ
Defective 12C bus
1.
Replace the RAM DIMM.
ƒ
Defective ROM DIMM
[0202]
[B]
The SPD values in all
RAM DIMM are incorrect
or unreadable.
828
Troubleshooting
Resident memory error
Self-diagnostic Error: ROM
Boost lap code error
The boot monitor and OS
[0101]
[B]
program stored in the
ROM DIMM is checked. If ƒ
Defective controller
the check sum of the
1.
Replace the ROM DIMM.
program is incorrect, this
2.
Replace the controller.
check sum of all
ƒ
Defective ROM DIMM
programs stored in the
1.
Replace the ROM DIMM.
SC code is displayed.
ROMFS error
All areas of the ROM
[0104]
[B]
DIMM are checked. If the
ROM DIMM is incorrect,
this SC code is displayed.
SM
4-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
829
Possible Cause/Required Action
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM
Verification error (Slot 1)
[0401]
The data stored in the
ƒ
Not specified RAM DIMM installed
[B]
RAM in Slot 1 does not
ƒ
Defective RAM DIMM
match the data when
1.
Replace the RAM DIMM.
reading.
2.
Replace the controller board.
Composition error (Slot 1)
[0402]
The result of checking the ƒ
Not specified RAM DIMM installed
composition data of the
ƒ
Defective RAM DIMM
RAM in Slot 1 on the
1.
Replace the RAM DIMM.
controller is incorrect.
2.
Replace the controller board.
ƒ
Defective IEEE1394
The 1394 interface is
ƒ
Defective controller.
unusable.
1.
Replace the IEEE1394 interface board.
2.
Replace the controller.
IEEE1394 interface error
851
[B]
Wireless LAN or Bluetooth card not detected at starting communication
The wireless LAN or
853
[B]
Bluetooth card is not
detected before
communication is
established, though the
wireless LAN or Bluetooth
ƒ
Loose connection
1.
Check the connection.
2.
Insert the wireless LAN or Bluetooth card to
its board.
board is detected.
G190
4-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Wireless LAN or Bluetooth card not detected during operation
The wireless LAN or
854
[B]
Bluetooth card is not
detected after
communication is
established, though the
ƒ
Loose connection
1.
Check the connection.
2.
Insert the wireless LAN or Bluetooth card to
its board.
wireless LAN or Bluetooth
board is detected.
855
[B]
An error is detected in the
wireless LAN or Bluetooth
card.
Troubleshooting
Wireless LAN or Bluetooth card error
ƒ
Loose connection
ƒ
Defective wireless LAN or Bluetooth card
1.
Check the connection.
2.
Replace the wireless LAN or Bluetooth card.
Wireless LAN or Bluetooth board error
856
[B]
ƒ
Defective wireless LAN or Bluetooth board
An error is detected in the ƒ
Loose connection
wireless LAN or Bluetooth 1.
Check the connection.
2.
board.
Replace the wireless LAN or Bluetooth
board.
USB interface error
857
[B]
The USB interface cannot
be used due to a driver
error.
SM
ƒ
Defective USB driver
ƒ
Loose connection
1.
Check the connection.
2.
Replace the controller.
4-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
[Level]
Symptom
Possible Cause/Required Action
HDD: Initialization error
860
ƒ
[B]
The controller detects that ƒ
the hard disk fails.
HDD not initialized
Defective HDD
1.
Reformat the HDD (SP5832).
2.
Replace the HDD.
ƒ
Loose connection
ƒ
Defective cables
ƒ
Defective HDD
ƒ
Defective controller
1.
Check the connection between the HDD and
HDD: Reboot error
861
The HDD does not
[D]
become ready within 30
seconds after the power is
supplied to the HDD.
controller.
2.
Check and replace the cables.
3.
Replace the HDD.
4.
Replace the controller.
ƒ
Defective HDD
ƒ
Defective controller
1.
Replace the HDD.
2.
Replace the controller.
HDD: Read error
863
[D]
The data stored in the
HDD cannot be read
correctly.
HDD: CRC error
864
While reading data from
[D]
the HDD or storing data in ƒ
1.
the HDD, data
Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
transmission fails.
G190
4-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
HDD: Access error
865
An error other than
[D]
SC863 and SC864 is
ƒ
Defective HDD
detected while operating
1.
Replace the HDD.
the HDD.
866
[B]
SD card authentication error
A correct license is not
ƒ
SD-card data is corrupted.
found in the SD card.
1.
Store correct data in the SD card.
ƒ
The SD card for an application is ejected
867
[D]
The SD card for an
from the slot.
application is ejected from
1.
the slot.
Troubleshooting
SD card error
Install the SD card.
SD card access error [File system error, Device error]
868
[D]
SD card error occurs
when SD card is
activated.
SM
ƒ
Defective SD card
ƒ
Defective SD card controller
1.
For a file system error, format the SD card
on your PC.
2.
For a device error, turn the mains switch off
and on.
3.
Replace the SD card.
4.
Replace the controller.
4-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Address data error
ƒ
Defective software program
ƒ
Defective HDD
870
An error is detected in the ƒ
[B]
data copied to the
1.
Initialize the address book data
(SP5846-50).
address book over a
2.
network.
Incorrect path to the sever
Initialize the user information (format the
hard disk with SP5832).
3.
Replace the HDD.
HDD mail data error
872
An error is detected in the ƒ
Defective HDD
[B]
mail receiving data area
ƒ
Power failure during an access to the HDD
of the HDD at machine
1.
Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-001).
initialization.
2.
Replace the HDD.
HDD mail transfer error
873
An error is detected in the ƒ
Defective HDD
[B]
mail transmitting data
ƒ
Power failure during an access to the HDD
area of the HDD at
1.
Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-001).
machine initialization.
2.
Replace the HDD.
ƒ
Not installed Data Overwrite Security Unit
Delete All error 1: HDD
An error is detected while
(SD card)
874
the all data of the HDD or
[D]
NVRAM are formatted
ƒ
Defective HDD
physically by the Data
1.
Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit
(B735).
Overwrite Security Unit
(B735).
G190
2.
Replace the HDD.
4-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error is detected while
875
the all data of the HDD or
[D]
NVRAM are formatted
logically by the Data
ƒ
The logical format for HDD fails.
1.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the
operation again.
Overwrite Security Unit
(B735).
876
Log Data Error
001
ƒ
An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or
during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine
[D]
off while it is operating.
1.
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 2
002
[D]
ƒ
The DESS module is not installed when the DESS module is set to ON.
1.
Replace the DESS module.
2.
Turn off the DESS module function.
Log Data Error 3
003
[D]
004
[D]
SM
ƒ
Invalid encryption key log due to defective NVRAM data
1.
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
2.
Disable the log encryption setting.
Log Data Error 4
ƒ
Unusual encryption function log due to the defective NVRAM data
1.
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
4-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Troubleshooting
Log Data Error 1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Log Data Error 5
005
[D]
099
[D]
ƒ
NVRAM or HDD, which is used in other machine, is installed.
1.
Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2.
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 99
ƒ
Other than above causes
1.
Ask your supervisor.
HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error
877
[B]
The all delete cannot be
ƒ
executed even though the ƒ
Data Overwrite Security
1.
Not installed SD card (B735)
Replace the NVRAM and then install the
new SD card (B735).
Unit (B735) is installed
and activated.
Defective SD card (B735)
2.
Check and reinstall the SD card (B735).
ƒ
Defective NVRAM
ƒ
Defective controller
1.
Turn the main switch off and on.
2.
Check the connection between the NVRAM
Electric counter error
900
[D]
Abnormal data is stored in
the counters.
and controller.
3.
Replace the NVRAM.
4.
Replace the controller.
ƒ
Turn the main switch off/on, or install Printer
Printer function error
920
The error that causes the
[B]
malfunction in the
software application is
detected.
G190
Application firmware
ƒ
Unexpected hardware structure (insufficient
memory or hard disk space.)
4-40
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Printer font error
921
[B]
No font is detected in the
machines that have the
font in the SD card when
ƒ
Install the System, Printer Application, NIB,
and Web System firmware.
the printer application is
run.
ƒ
Defective software
ƒ
Defective controller
The software makes an
ƒ
Software error
unexpected operation.
1.
Reinstall the controller and/or engine main
990
[D]
firmware.
2.
See the Note at the end of the SC table.
Software performance error 2
991
Unexpected software
[C]
error detected, which
does not affect operation
of the machine
992
[D]
not displayed. The machine automatically
recovers.
However, the SC code is logged in the engine
summary sheet (SMC).
SC not defined
SC that is not controlled in
the system occurs.
SM
The machine does not stop and the SC code is
ƒ
Defective system software
4-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Troubleshooting
Software performance error 1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Call Conditions
SC
Symptom
[Level]
Possible Cause/Required Action
Application start error
ƒ
Loose connection of RAM, DIMM and SD
card in slot 1
998
No applications start
[D]
within 60 seconds after
the power is turned on.
ƒ
ƒ
Defective controller
ƒ
Software problem
1.
Check if the RAM, DIMM and SD card in slot
1 are properly connected.
2.
Reinstall the controller system firmware.
3.
Replace the controller.
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver
setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case,
the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product
specialist:
ƒ
Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
ƒ
Summary sheet (SP mode “1 Service/Printer SP”, SP 1004 [Print Summary])
ƒ
SMC - All (SP 5990 2)
ƒ
SMC - Logging (SP 5990 4)
ƒ
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
ƒ
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address
where the problem is logged.)
ƒ
G190
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
4-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
ƒ
Remove the NVRAM from the original engine control board and install it on the
new one when you replace the engine control board.
4.3.1 BLANK PRINT
Possible cause
Defective LDU
Replace the LDU.
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
Defective transfer belt unit
No image is printed.
SM
Necessary actions
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Incorrect action of transfer
Check the guide and the
roller
transfer roller.
Defective high voltage
Replace high voltage supply
supply board
board 1 or 2.
Defective engine board
Replace the engine board
(EGB)
(EGB).
4-43
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT
Symptom
All the paper is black.
G190
Possible cause
Necessary actions
Incorrectly installed PCU
Install the PCU correctly.
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
Defective high voltage
Replace high voltage supply
supply board
board 1 or 2.
Defective LDU
Replace the LDU.
Defective engine board
Replace the engine board
(EGB)
(EGB).
Defective main board
Replace the main board.
4-44
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR
Symptom
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the drum
Loose connection between
printer cartridge and engine
board (EGB)
‘Replacement and
Adjustment – Electrical
Components – Electrical
Board Unit’.)
Transfer belt not contacting
PCU
Check the belt tension unit.
Troubleshooting
C, M, or Y is missing.
SM
positioning cover. (See
Defective the color OPC
Replace the color OPC
motor
motor.
Defective engine board
Replace the engine board
(EGB)
(EGB).
4-45
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT
Symptom
Possible cause
Loose connection between
transfer roller and high
voltage supply unit
Dust in the laser beam path
Printed images are too
weak.
G190
Transfer belt not contacting
PCU
Necessary actions
Check the connection
between the transfer roller
and the high voltage supply
unit.
Clean the laser beam path.
Check the transfer unit.
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
Defective transfer roller
Repair the transfer roller.
Defective fusing unit
Replace the fusing unit.
Defective engine board
Replace the engine board
(EGB)
(EGB).
4-46
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS
The same spots or lines appear at regular intervals.
At intervals of 35.0 mm
(1.38 inches)
Possible cause
Defective charge roller
At intervals of 35.8 mm
Defective OPC cleaning brush
(1.41 inches)
roller
At intervals of 40.5 mm
(1.59 inches)
At intervals of 41.1 mm
(1.62 inches)
At intervals of 47.1 mm
(1.86 inches)
At intervals of 56.5 mm
(2.23 inches)
At intervals of 72.8 mm
(2.87 inches)
Defective belt entrance roller
Defective belt transfer roller
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the PCU.
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
Defective toner mixing auger
Replace the PCU.
Defective development roller
Replace the PCU
Defective belt tension roller
Troubleshooting
Interval
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
At intervals of 82.2 mm
Defective transfer belt drive
Replace the transfer belt
(3.24 inches)
roller
unit.
Defective transfer roller
Replace the transfer roller.
At intervals of 94.2 mm
Defective OPC drum or
Replace the PCU or the
(3.71 inches)
pressure roller
fusing unit
Defective fusing belt
Replace the fusing unit.
At intervals of 82.5 mm
(3.25 inches)
At intervals of 141.4 mm
(5.57 inches)
4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS
SM
4-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
Symptom
Possible cause
Necessary actions
A dark line appears. The line
is parallel to the paper feed
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
direction of one CMY color.
A dark line appears. The line
is parallel to the paper feed
direction of any color (not C,
Dust in the laser beam path Clean the laser beam path.
Defective transfer belt unit
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
M, or Y).
Defective fusing unit
Replace the fusing unit.
4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS
Symptom
Possible cause
Defective PCU
White lines or bands appear
in images of all toner colors.
Defective transfer belt unit
Defective transfer roller
G190
4-48
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
Replace the transfer roller.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES
Symptom
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Some parts of images are
Defective transfer belt unit
missing.
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
Defective transfer roller
Replace the transfer roller.
Defective fusing unit
Replace the fusing unit.
Symptom
Backgrounds of one CMYK
color are too dense.
Backgrounds of more than
one CMYK are too
dense.color
Possible cause
Troubleshooting
4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND
Necessary actions
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
Defective high voltage
Replace the high voltage
supply board
supply board (1 or 2).
4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS
Symptom
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Unexpected dots of the
same color appear at
Defective transfer belt unit
irregular intervals.
Defective fusing unit
SM
4-49
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS
Symptom
Unexpected streaks appear
at irregular intervals.
Possible cause
Defective transfer belt
Necessary actions
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS
Symptom
Unexpected streaks of the
Possible cause
Defective PCU
same color appear at
irregular intervals.
Defective transfer belt unit
Necessary actions
Replace the PCU.
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
4.3.13 GHOSTING
Symptom
The same or similar image
Possible cause
Necessary actions
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
Defective transfer unit
Replace the transfer unit.
appears two or more times.
They get weaker and
weaker.
G190
4-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS
Symptom
Possible cause
Non-standard paper in use
Some parts of images are
Incorrect media type mode
not fused very well.
Defective fusing unit
Necessary actions
Use recommended paper.
Select an appropriate media
mode.
Replace the fusing unit.
Symptom
Possible cause
Incorrect installation of
paper
Images are skewed
Install the paper correctly.
Incorrect paper guide
Adjust the paper guide
position
correctly.
Defective registration roller
Repair the paper feed unit.
Incorrect action of transfer
roller
Check the transfer roller.
Defective engine board
Replace the engine board
(EGB)
(EGB).
Unclean separation pad
Clean the separation pad.
Defective spring
SM
Necessary actions
4-51
Replace the spring for the
friction pad.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Troubleshooting
4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN
Symptom
The reverse side of the
paper is not clean.
Possible cause
Necessary actions
Unclean transfer roller
Clean the transfer roller.
Unclean paper path
Clean the paper path.
Unclean registration roller
Clean the registration roller.
Unclean fusing unit exit
Clean the fusing unit exit.
Defective fusing unit
Replace the fusing unit.
4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE
Symptom
Images are not printed in
the areas around the paper
edges.
Possible cause
Defective PCU
Replace the PCU.
Defective toner cartridge
Replace the toner cartridge.
Defective transfer belt unit
Transfer belt not contacting
PCU
G190
Necessary actions
4-52
Replace the transfer belt
unit.
Check the transfer unit.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Guide
4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE
Symptom
Possible cause
Incorrect installation of
paper
Images do not come to the
Install the paper correctly.
Incorrect paper guide
Adjust the paper guide
position
correctly.
Incorrect margin setting
Adjust the margin setting.
Defective engine control
Replace the engine control
board
board.
Troubleshooting
center.
Necessary actions
SM
4-53
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Component Defects
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.4.1 SENSORS
No.
1
2
3
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Color Drum Gear
Active
H
Position Sensor
CN No./
Pin No.
CN222/2
Condition
Open
Symptom
SC380
Shorted
Black Drum Gear
H
Position Sensor
CN222/5
Open
SC380
Shorted
Toner End Sensor (K)
CN222/8
Toner End Sensor (M)
CN230/13
Toner End Sensor (C)
L
Toner End Sensor (Y)
Open
detected.
Toner end is detected
CN230/26
CN230/29
Toner end cannot be
Shorted
even if there is
enough toner.
4
5
Transfer Belt Contact
Sensor
H
Open
SC442
Shorted
Transfer Roller
L
Contact Sensor
CN222/14
Open
SC452
Shorted
CN222/20
TD Sensor (K)
6
CN222/11
TD Sensor (M)
A
TD Sensor (C)
Open
SC369 (M)
CN225/4
CN230/4
Shorted
SC370 (C)
SC371 (Y)
CN230/20
TD Sensor (Y)
SC368 (K)
Open
Automatic line
position adjustment
8
Transfer Belt Rotation
L
CN222/27
error: Transfer belt
Shorted
unit speed cannot be
detected, causing
G190
4-54
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Component Defects
No.
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Active
CN No./
Pin No.
Condition
Symptom
image skew.
Open
Front Door Sensor
H
CN206/1
Shorted
Open
11
Waste Toner Overflow
Sensor
H
Cover” is displayed.
Front cover open
cannot be detected.
Waste Toner near full
is indicated.
Waste toner full
CN230/10
Shorted
cannot be detected
even if the waste
toner bottle is full.
Open
12
Left Cover Sensor
H
C230/15
Shorted
Open
13
Temperature/Humidity
A
CN231/1
Sensor
A
CN231/3
“Close Front/Left
Cover” is displayed.
Left cover open
cannot be detected.
Printed image is
wrong, such as rough
image, dirty
Shorted
background or weak
image.
CN214/17
14
Paper Size Sensor
L
Open
CN214/15
CN214/14
Paper size error
Shorted
CN214/13
SM
4-55
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Troubleshooting
10
“Close Front/Left
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Component Defects
No.
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Active
CN No./
Pin No.
Condition
Symptom
Paper jam is not
Open
15
Fusing Entrance
L
Sensor
detected even if there
is paper
CN213/6
Paper jam is detected
Shorted
even if there is no
paper.
Paper jam is not
Open
16
Duplex Jam Sensor 1
L
detected even if there
is paper
CN213/1
Paper jam is detected
Shorted
even if the there is no
paper.
Paper jam is not
Open
17
Duplex Jam Sensor 2
L
detected even if there
is paper
CN213/3
Paper jam is detected
Short
even if the there is no
paper.
Open
18
By-pass Paper
Detection Sensor
L
Paper is not detected
on the by-pass tray
Paper is detected
CN211/22
Shorted
even if there is no
paper on the by-pass
tray.
CN211/17
19
By-pass Paper Size
Sensor
L
Open
CN211/16
CN211/20
Paper size error
Shorted
CN211/19
G190
4-56
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Component Defects
No.
20
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Inverter Sensor
Active
L
CN No./
Pin No.
CN211/2
Condition
Open
Symptom
Paper jam Z
Shorted
21
Fusing Exit Sensor
L
CN210/13
Open
Paper jam A
Shorted
The paper overflow
message is not
Open
Sensor
L
a paper overflow
condition exists,
CN210/10
causing paper jam.
The paper overflow
Shorted
message is
displayed.
23
Paper Exit Sensor
L
CN210/7
Open
Paper Jam A
Shorted
24
ID Sensors
A
CN209
Open
SC400/418
Shorted
25
Fusing Thermistor
A
CN209/1
Open
SC541
Shorted
26
Fusing Set Sensor
L
CN209/3
L
CN209/4
Open
correctly” is
Shorted
Open
27
Top Cover Sensor
H
CN208/2
Shorted
SM
4-57
“Reset Fusing Unit
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
displayed.
“Close Top Cover” is
displayed.
Top cover open
cannot be detected.
G190
Troubleshooting
22
Paper Overflow
displayed even when
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Electrical Component Defects
No.
28
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
LDU Shutter Sensor
Active
H
CN No./
Pin No.
CN207/17
Condition
Open
Symptom
SC270
Shorted
29
Registration Sensor
L
CN207/14
Open
Paper Jam A
Shorted
Always, small paper
Open
30
Paper Width Sensor
H
slow printing.
CN207/11
Shorted
31
Paper Height Sensor
1/2
H
CN207/5
CN207/8
is detected, causing
Open
Small paper size is
not detected.
Remaining paper
volume is wrong on
Shorted
Web Image Monitor.
Paper end is detected
Open
even if paper is
placed in the paper
tray.
32
Paper End Sensor
H
CN2072
Paper end is not
detected even if there
Shorted
is no paper in the
paper tray, causing a
paper jam.
G190
4-58
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Blown Fuse Conditions
4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.5.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Rating
115V
Symptom when turning on the main switch
220V-240V
FU1
15A/125V
8A/250V
No response.
FU2
8A/125V
4A/250V
No response.
FU3
1A/250V
1A/250V
Tray Heater does not turn on.
FU4
4A/250V
4A/250V
No display.
FU5
6.3A/250V
6.3A/250V
SC270 is displayed.
FU6
6.3A/250V
6.3A/250V
SC270 is displayed.
Troubleshooting
Fuse
4.5.2 IOB
Fuse
Rating
Symptom when turning on the main switch
FU1
1A
SC270 is displayed.
FU2
3.15A
Toners are not supplied.
FU3
3.15A
Optional Paper Tray Unit does not work.
SM
4-59
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LEDs
4.6 LEDS
No LEDs are used for this model (except for the Network Interface).
G190
4-60
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
LEDs
Troubleshooting
SERVICE TABLES
SM
61
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Program Mode
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
ƒ
Before accessing the service menu, do the following:
ƒ
Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LED must not be
lit or blinking).
ƒ
If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed.
ƒ
This machine has SSP mode, which is restricted for supervisor use only. However,
most of them are also used for the factory adjustments. Do not change those SSP
settings until it is advised to do so by the technical information.
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION
ƒ
The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only so that they
service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be
changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
Entering the Service Mode
ƒ
If you switch the machine off, any jobs stored on the hard disk using the sample
print and protected print features will be deleted.
ƒ
Check first with the user tools to see if there are any jobs stored with these
features (Menu key - Sample Print, or Protected Print).
Method 1:
Turn the machine on while pressing the “On Line” key and “Escape” key together until
SM
5-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Program Mode
“SYSTEMver x.xx/ 1. Service” shows on the display.
NOTE:If you switch the machine off, any jobs stored on the hard disk using the sample print
and protected print features will be deleted.
Check first with the user tools to see if there are any jobs stored with these features (Menu
key - Sample Print, or Protected Print).
Method 2: Press the “Up/Down arrow” keys together for about 5 seconds, and then press
the “OK” key.
“SYSTEMver x.xx/ 1. Service” appears on the display.
ƒ
The machine automatically goes off line when you enter the service mode.
Accessing the Required Program
Use the “Up/Down arrow” keys to scroll through the menu listing.
1.
Service: Controller service modes
2.
Engine: Engine service modes
3.
End: Exit service mode
To select an item, press the “OK” key. Then the sub-menu shows.
Scroll through the sub menu items using the “
” keys.
To go back to a higher level, press the “Escape” key.
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program
Enter the required program mode as explained above. The setting appearing on the display
is the current setting.
Select the required setting using the “
” keys, then press the “OK” key. The previous
value remains if the “OK” key is not pressed.
Exiting Service Mode
Select “End” from the service mode main menu, then press the “OK” key.
ƒ
To make the settings effective, turn the main switch off and on after exiting service
mode.
G190
5-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Program Mode
5.1.2 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the control panel
screen is limited (12 or 17 characters), the description of SP modes displayed on the
screen needs to be abbreviated. The following are the major abbreviations used for the SP
modes for which the full description is over 12 or 17 characters.
1. Paper Type
N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2 (plain & recycled)
TC: Thick paper, Thick 1: Thick paper 1, Thick 2: Thick paper 2
TN: Thin paper
SP: Special paper
2. Color Mode [Color]
[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC], [Cl]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode
3. Process Speed
Service
Tables
LS: Low speed xx
RS: Regular speed xxx
HS: High speed xxx
As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the print mode
(B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode settings depend
on the process speed.
SM
5-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Program Mode
Mode
Resolution (dpi)
Line speed (mm/s)
Print speed (ppm)
182
30
91
15
182
30
91
15
91
15
600 x 600
B/W
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
Color
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
OHP/Thick
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
4. Count Unit
R: Rotation
S: Prints
5. Environment
LL: Low temperature and Low humidity
ML: Medium temperature and Low humidity
MM: Medium temperature and Medium humidity
MH: Medium temperature and High humidity
HH: High temperature and High humidity
7. Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only - Do not touch the SP mode in the field.
“P” in the right hand side of the mode number column means that this SP mode relates to
the Printer Controller. If “P” is not in the column, this SP mode relates to the Printer Engine.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch
must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is
stored in the NVRAM (Engine and Printer Controller). If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode
will be reset to the default value. “EGB”, “CTL” and “NV” indicate which NVRAM contains
the data.
G190
5-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Program Mode
ƒ
EGB: NVRAM on the EGB board
ƒ
CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
ƒ
NV: NVRAM on the NVRAM expansion board (user account enhancement kit)
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following manner.
[ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ]
ƒ
Alphanumeric
If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting
of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead
of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are
Service
Tables
explained by using only the numbers.
SM
5-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Program Mode
5.1.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING
Do not change the bit switches unless you are told to do this by the manufacturer.
1.
Start the SP mode. Select the “Service” menu with "V/W" keys.
2.
Press the "OK" key three times.
3.
To select a bit switch, press the "'/(" keys.
4.
Push the OK key.
5.
Set the value with these keys:
ƒ
[Left] [Right]: Moves the cursor to one of the adjacent bits.
ƒ
[Up] [Down]: Changes a bit between "0" and "1".
ƒ
[Escape]: Goes out of the program without saving changes.
ƒ
[OK]: Goes out of the program and saves changes.
ƒ
1.
The digit at the left [A] is bit 7 and the digit at the right [B] is bit 0.
Push the "Escape" key one or more times until the menu “SP mode (Service)” is
shown.
2.
Select “End” and push the OK key.
G190
5-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5.2 SERVICE MODE TABLE
5.2.1 CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE
1001
[Bit Switch]
1001 001
Bit Switch 1
*CTL
Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change the
settings.
Bit 3: Changing the print language (PCL <->
1001 002
Bit Switch 2
*CTL
PS)
ƒ
0: Enabled
ƒ
1: Disabled (No change)
Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change the
settings.
ƒ
0: Disabled
ƒ
1: Enabled (Even if there is no
Euro Glyph in the ROM, it is
possible to load the Euro
Glyph data.)
Bit 1: Not used. Do not change the setting.
Bit 2:PCL5e/5c (HP4000/HP8000)
The left space command is set to “0”, the
1001 003
Bit Switch 3
*CTL
machine is changed to “1”
ƒ
0: Disabled
ƒ
1: Enabled
Bit 3: PCL5e/GL2: pen # of PW
ƒ
0: Normal
ƒ
1: Patch
Bit 4: Tray selecting
ƒ
0: The tray is determined by
auto tray selection
ƒ
SM
5-7
1: Like HP/SV
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
Bit 0: PostScript3 Euro glyph
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Bit 5 to 7: Not used. Do not change the
settings.
1001 004
Bit Switch 4
*CTL
Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change the
settings.
Bit 3: Enables the “%%” command of the
PostScript detection condition for the auto print
1001 005
Bit Switch 5
*CTL
language selection function.
ƒ
0: Enabled
ƒ
1: Disabled
Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change the
settings.
1001 006
Bit Switch 6
*CTL
1001 007
Bit Switch 7
*CTL
1001 008
Bit Switch 8
*CTL
1003
[Clear Setting]
1003 001
Initialize System
1003 003
Delete Program
1004
[Print Summary]
1004 001
Service Summary
1005
[Display Version]
1005 001
Printer Version
G190
Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
Initializes settings in the System menu of the
user mode.
DFU
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary
of all the controller settings).
Displays the version of the controller
firmware.
5-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1007
[Supply Display]
1007 001
Development
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007 002
PCU
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007 003
Transfer
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007 004
Int. Transfer
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007 005
Transfer Roller
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007 006
Fuser
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007 007
Fuser Oil
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1101
[ToneCtlSet]
1101 001
Tone (Factory)
*CTL
1101 2 Tone (Prev.)
*CTL
1101 3 Tone (Current)
*CTL
Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be
either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
[ToneCtlSet]
Service
Tables
setting, or c) the current setting.
*CTL
Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The
asterisk (*) shows which mode is set.
1102
ƒ
00: *1200x1200Photo
ƒ
01: 600x600Text
ƒ
02: 1200x1200Text
ƒ
03: 1200x600Text
ƒ
04: 600x600Photo
ƒ
05: 1200x600Photo
1103
[PrnColorSheet]
1103 001
ToneCtlSheet
1103 002
ColorChart
SM
Prints the test page to check the color balance
before and after the gamma adjustment.
5-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[ToneCtlValue]
1104
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection
menu.
1104 001
Set Black 1
*CTL
1104 021
Set Cyan 1
*CTL
1104 041
Set Magenta 1
*CTL
1104 061
Set Yellow 1
*CTL
1104 002
Set Black 2
*CTL
1104 022
Set Cyan 2
*CTL
1104 042
Set Magenta 2
*CTL
1104 062
Set Yellow 2
*CTL
1104 003
Set Black 3
*CTL
1104 023
Set Cyan 3
*CTL
1104 043
Set Magenta 3
*CTL
1104 063
Set Yellow 3
*CTL
1104 004
Set Black 4
*CTL
1104 024
Set Cyan 4
*CTL
1104 044
Set Magenta 4
*CTL
1104 064
Set Yellow 4
*CTL
1104 005
Set Black 5
*CTL
1104 025
Set Cyan 5
*CTL
1104 045
Set Magenta 5
*CTL
1104 065
Set Yellow 5
*CTL
G190
[0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step]
5-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Set Black 6
*CTL
1104 026
Set Cyan 6
*CTL
1104 046
Set Magenta 6
*CTL
1104 066
Set Yellow 6
*CTL
1104 007
Set Black 7
*CTL
1104 027
Set Cyan 7
*CTL
1104 047
Set Magenta 7
*CTL
1104 067
Set Yellow 7
*CTL
1104 008
Set Black 8
*CTL
1104 028
Set Cyan 8
*CTL
1104 048
Set Magenta 8
*CTL
1104 068
Set Yellow 8
*CTL
1104 009
Set Black 9
*CTL
1104 029
Set Cyan 9
*CTL
1104 049
Set Magenta 9
*CTL
1104 069
Set Yellow 9
*CTL
1104 010
Set Black 10
*CTL
1104 030
Set Cyan 10
*CTL
1104 050
Set Magenta 10
*CTL
1104 070
Set Yellow 10
*CTL
1104 011
Set Black 11
*CTL
1104 031
Set Cyan 11
*CTL
1104 051
Set Magenta 11
*CTL
SM
[0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Service
Tables
1104 006
[0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]
5-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1104 071
Set Yellow 11
*CTL
1104 012
Set Black 12
*CTL
1104 032
Set Cyan 12
*CTL
1104 052
Set Magenta 12
*CTL
1104 072
Set Yellow 12
*CTL
1104 013
Set Black 13
*CTL
1104 033
Set Cyan 13
*CTL
1104 053
Set Magenta 13
*CTL
1104 073
Set Yellow 13
*CTL
1104 014
Set Black 14
*CTL
1104 034
Set Cyan 14
*CTL
1104 054
Set Magenta 14
*CTL
1104 074
Set Yellow 14
*CTL
1104 015
Set Black 15
*CTL
1104 035
Set Cyan 15
*CTL
1104 055
Set Magenta 15
*CTL
1104 075
Set Yellow 15
*CTL
[0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]
[ToneCtlSave]
1105
Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current
Setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting”, it moves the
data stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory-storage
location.
G190
5-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1106
[Toner Limit Value]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 001
TonerLimitValue
1108
[Ext. Toner Save]
1108 001
Mode 1: Text
1108 002
Mode 2: Text
1108 003
Mode 1: Image
1108 004
Mode 2: Image
1108 005
Mode 1: Line
1108 006
Mode 2: Line
1108 007
Mode 1: Paint
1108 008
Mode 2: Paint
SM
*CTL
[100 to 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
Service
Tables
DFU
5-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5.2.2 ENGINE SERVICE MODE
SP1-XXX (Feed)
[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration
(Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed)
Paper Type ->N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick
paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights)
Process Speed: LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed
1001
ƒ
Adjusts the leading edge registration. This SP changes the
registration clutch operation timing for each mode.
ƒ
A +ve value sets the registration start timing earlier.
ƒ
A –ve value sets the registration start timing later. The value of the
normal paper in RS is the standard value. The values of papers
other than normal are added to the value of the normal paper in RS.
1001 001
Tray 1: Normal: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 002
Tray 1: Normal: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 003
Tray 1: Thick
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 004
Tray 1: OHP
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 005
Tray 2: Normal: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 006
Tray 2: Normal: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 007
Tray 2: Thick
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 008
Tray 2: OHP
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 009
Tray 3: Normal: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 010
Tray 3: Normal: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 011
Tray 3: Thick
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 012
Tray 3: OHP
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
G190
5-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1001 013
By-pass: N: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 014
By-pass: N: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 015
By-pass: Thick
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 016
By-pass: OHP
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 017
Duplex: Normal: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 018
Duplex: Normal: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 019
Duplex: Thick
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 020
Duplex: N2: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 021
Duplex: N2: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 022
Tray 1: Normal 2: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 023
Tray 1: Normal 2: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 024
Tray 1: Thick 2
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 025
Tray 1: Thin: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 026
Tray 1: Thin: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 027
Tray 1: Special
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 028
Tray 2: Normal 2: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 029
Tray 2: Normal 2: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 030
Tray 2: Thick 2
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 031
Tray 2: Thin: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 032
Tray 2: Thin: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 033
Tray 2: Special
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 034
Tray 3: Normal 2: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 035
Tray 3: Normal 2: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
SM
5-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
Service Mode Table
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1001 036
Tray 3: Thick 2
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 037
Tray 3: Thin: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 038
Tray 3: Thin: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 039
Tray 3: Special
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 040
By-pass: N2: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 041
By-pass: N2: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 042
By-pass: Thick 2
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 043
By-pass: Thin: LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 044
By-pass: Thin: RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 045
By-pass: Special
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 046
Tray4:Normal:LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 047
Tray4:Normal:RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 048
Tray4:Thick
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 049
Tray4:OHP
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 050
Tray4:Normal2:LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 051
Tray4:Normal2:RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 052
Tray4:Thick2
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 053
Tray4:Thin:LS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 054
Tray4:Thin:RS
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 055
Tray4:Special
*EGB
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
G190
5-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1002
[S-to-S Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration
1002 001
By-pass
*EGB
1002 002
Tray 1
*EGB
1002 003
Tray 2
*EGB
1002 004
Tray 3
*EGB
1002 005
Duplex
*EGB
1002 006
Tray4
*EGB
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for
each mode. This SP changes the laser
main scan start position.
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle
(Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed)
1003
Paper Type ->N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick
paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights)
Process Speed-> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed
Tray 1: Normal: LS
*EGB
1003 002
Tray 1: Normal: RS
*EGB
1003 003
Tray 1: Thick
*EGB
1003 004
Tray 1: OHP
*EGB
1003 005
Tray 2: Normal: LS
*EGB
1003 006
Tray 2: Normal: RS
*EGB
1003 007
Tray 2: Thick
*EGB
1003 008
Tray 2: OHP
*EGB
1003 009
Tray 3: Normal: LS
*EGB
1003 010
Tray 3: Normal: RS
*EGB
1003 011
Tray 3: Thick
*EGB
SM
5-17
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at
the registration roller for each mode.
This SP changes the paper feed timing.
[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
1003 001
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1003 012
Tray 3: OHP
*EGB
1003 013
By-pass: N:LS
*EGB
1003 014
By-pass: N:RS
*EGB
1003 015
By-pass: Thick
*EGB
1003 016
By-pass: OHP
*EGB
1003 017
Duplex: Normal: LS
*EGB
1003 018
Duplex: Normal: RS
*EGB
1003 019
Duplex: Thick
*EGB
1003 020
Duplex: N2: LS
*EGB
1003 021
Duplex: N2: RS
*EGB
1003 022
Tray 1: Normal 2: LS
*EGB
1003 023
Tray 1: Normal 2: RS
*EGB
1003 024
Tray 1: Thick 2
*EGB
1003 025
Tray 1: Thin: LS
*EGB
1003 026
Tray 1: Thin: RS
*EGB
1003 027
Tray 1: Special
*EGB
1003 028
Tray 2: Normal 2: LS
*EGB
1003 029
Tray 2: Normal 2: RS
*EGB
1003 030
Tray 2: Thick 2
*EGB
1003 031
Tray 2: Thin: LS
*EGB
1003 032
Tray 2: Thin: RS
*EGB
1003 033
Tray 2: Special
*EGB
1003 034
Tray 3: Normal 2: LS
*EGB
G190
5-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
1003 035
Tray 3: Normal 2: RS
*EGB
1003 036
Tray 3: Thick 2
*EGB
1003 037
Tray 3: Thin: LS
*EGB
1003 038
Tray 3: Thin: RS
*EGB
1003 039
Tray 3: Special
*EGB
1003 040
By-pass: N2: LS
*EGB
1003 041
By-pass: N2: RS
*EGB
1003 042
By-pass: Thick 2
*EGB
1003 043
By-pass: Thin: LS
*EGB
1003 044
By-pass: Thin: RS
*EGB
1003 045
By-pass: Special
*EGB
1003 046
Tray4:Normal:LS
*EGB
1003 047
Tray4:Normal:RS
*EGB
1003 048
Tray4:Thick
*EGB
1003 049
Tray4:OHP
*EGB
1003 050
Tray4:Normal2:LS
*EGB
1003 051
Tray4:Normal2:RS
*EGB
1003 052
Tray4:Thick2
*EGB
1003 053
Tray4:Thin:LS
*EGB
1003 054
Tray4:Thin:RS
*EGB
1003 055
Tray4:Special
*EGB
Service
Tables
Service Mode Table
Sets the rear edge detection width for
1003 100
Detection Width
*EGB
duplex.
[0.0 to 255 / 148 / 1.0 mm/step]
SM
5-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Mt Speed] Drive Motor Speed DFU
(Unit, Process Speed, Paper Type)
N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2:
Paper Type
1004
Thick paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper
weights)
Process Speed
LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed
CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counterclockwise
PFU: Optional paper tray unit
Adjusts the black development and
1004 001
DEV / OPC [K]: LS
*EGB
1004 002
DEV / OPC [K]: RS
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
1004 003
DEV [CMY]: LS
*EGB
Adjusts the color development motor
1004 004
DEV [CMY]: RS
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
1004 005
OPC [CMY]: LS
*EGB
Adjusts the color OPC motor speed.
1004 006
OPC [CMY]: RS
*EGB
1004 007
Fusing: LS
*EGB
OPC motor speed.
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor
speed.
1004 008
Fusing: RS
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.95 / 0.01%/step]
1004 009
Transfer Belt: LS
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
1004 010
Transfer Belt: RS
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in
1004 011
PFU: LS
*EGB
the optional paper tray unit.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.06 / 0.01%/step]
1004 012
PFU: RS
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.27 / 0.01%/step]
1004 013
Duplex: LS: Add
*EGB
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
1004 014
Duplex: RS: Add
*EGB
1004 015
Duplex: LS
*EGB
G190
5-20
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.41 / 0.01%/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1004 016
Duplex: RS
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 1.21 / 0.01%/step]
1004 017
Reverse: LS: CW
*EGB
Adjusts the inverter motor speed.
1004 018
Reverse: RS: CW
*EGB
1004 019
Reverse: LS: CCW
*EGB
1004 020
Reverse: RS: CCW
*EGB
1004 021
DEV / OPC [K]: LS: N2
*EGB
1004 022
DEV / OPC [K]: RS: N2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
1004 023
DEV [CMY]: LS: N2
*EGB
Adjusts the color development motor
1004 024
DEV [CMY]: RS: N2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
1004 025
OPC [CMY]: LS: N2
*EGB
Adjusts the color OPC motor speed.
1004 026
OPC [CMY]: RS: N2
*EGB
1004 027
Fusing: LS: N2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 1.4 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the inverter motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the black development and
OPC motor speed.
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor
Service
Tables
speed.
1004 028
Fusing: RS: N2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step]
1004 029
Trans. Belt: LS: N2
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
1004 030
Trans. Belt: RS: N2
*EGB
1004 031
PFU: LS: Normal 2
*EGB
1004 032
PFU: RS: Normal 2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step]
1004 033
Duplex: LS: Add: N2
*EGB
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
1004 034
Duplex: RS: Add: N2
*EGB
1004 035
Duplex: LS: N2
*EGB
1004 036
Duplex: RS: N2
*EGB
1004 037
Reverse: LS: CW: N2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in
the optional paper tray unit.
SM
5-21
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the inverter motor speed.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1004 038
Reverse: RS: CW: N2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step]
1004 039
Rever.: LS: CCW: N2
*EGB
Adjusts the inverter motor speed.
1004 040
Rever.: RS: CCW: N2
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the black development and
1004 041
DEV / OPC [K]: LS: TC
*EGB
OPC motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the color development motor
1004 042
DEV [CMY]: LS: TC
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
1004 043
OPC [CMY]: LS: TC
*EGB
Adjusts the color OPC motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor
1004 044
Fusing: LS: Thick
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step]
1004 045
Trans. Belt: LS: TC
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in
1004 046
PFU: LS: Thick
*EGB
the optional paper tray unit.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step]
1004 047
Duplex: LS: Add: TC
*EGB
1004 048
Duplex: LS: Thick
*EGB
1004 049
Reverse: LS: CW: TC
*EGB
1004 050
Rever.: LS: CCW: TC
*EGB
G190
5-22
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the inverter motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the inverter motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Adjusts the black development and
1004 051
DEV / OPC [K] LS:TC2
*EGB
OPC motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the color development motor
1004 052
DEV [CMY]: LS: TC2
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
1004 053
OPC [CMY]: LS: TC2
*EGB
Adjusts the color OPC motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor
1004 054
Fusing: LS: TC 2
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step]
1004 055
T. Belt: LS: TC 2
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in
1004 056
PFU: LS: Thick 2
*EGB
the optional paper tray unit.
1004 057
Duplex: LS: Thick 2
*EGB
Service
Tables
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the black development and
1004 058
DEV / OPC [K]: LS: SP
*EGB
OPC motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the color development motor
1004 059
DEV [CMY]: LS: SP
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
1004 060
OPC [CMY]: LS: SP
*EGB
Adjusts the color OPC motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor
1004 061
Fusing: LS: SP
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step]
SM
5-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1004 062
Trans. Belt: LS: SP
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in
1004 063
PFU: LS: SP
*EGB
the optional paper tray unit.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
1004 064
Duplex: LS: SP
*EGB
1004 065
DEV / OPC [K]: LS: TN
*EGB
1004 066
DEV / OPC [K]: RS: TN
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01 %/step]
1004 067
DEV [CMY]: LS: Thin
*EGB
Adjusts the color development motor
1004 068
DEV [CMY]: RS: Thin
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
1004 069
OPC [CMY]: LS: Thin
*EGB
Adjusts the color OPC motor speed.
1004 070
OPC [CMY]: RS: Thin
*EGB
1004 071
Fusing: LS: Thin
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the black development and
OPC motor speed.
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor
speed.
1004 072
Fusing: RS: Thin
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 1.05 / 0.01%/step]
1004 073
Trans. Belt: LS: TN
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
1004 074
Trans. Belt: RS: TN
*EGB
1004 075
PFU: LS: Thin
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in
the optional paper tray unit.
1004 076
PFU: RS: Thin
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
1004 077
Duplex: LS: Thin
*EGB
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
1004 078
Duplex: RS: Thin
*EGB
1004 079
G190
DEV / OPC [K]: LS:
OHP
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the black development and
*EGB
OPC motor speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01 %/step]
5-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Adjusts the color development motor
1004 080
DEV [CMY]: LS: OHP
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
1004 081
OPC [CMY]: LS: OHP
Adjusts the color OPC motor speed.
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor
1004 082
Fusing: LS: OHP
*EGB
speed.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step]
1004 083
T.Belt: LS: OHP
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.
*EGB
[-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in
1004 084
PFU: LS: OHP
*EGB
the optional paper tray unit.
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the duplex motor speed.
1004 085
Duplex: LS: OHP
*EGB
1006
[Phase Adjust.] Phase Adjustment
Service
Tables
[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
Adjusts the phase angle between the K
1006 001
Angle
*EGB
drum and the CMY drums.
[-180 to 180 / 0 / 1deg/step] DFU
1104
[Fusing Cont.] Fusing Control
Control Method
1104 001
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Selects the fusing control method.
0: ON/OFF Control, 1: PID Control (Phase control)
Max. Wait Time
1104 022
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the maximum waiting time for the target printing temperature of
fusing unit. After this interval, printing will start if the temperature did not get
to the target.
SM
5-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Paper Feed. Temp.
1104 023
*EGB
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the increase in the temperature of the fusing unit between the ready
condition and the start of paper feed at the start of a new job.
1st Add Time: LS
1104 024
[0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 sec/step]
For print jobs at low speed. If the interval between jobs is less than this
setting, then the temperature change (1104 025) for the first page of a new
job is not applied.
1st Add Temp.
1104 025
*EGB
[0 to 20 / 8 / 1deg /step]
Adds this value to the basic fusing temperature, for the first page of a new
job. This extra temperature is necessary because when the printer starts the
first page, the fusing unit is not warm enough.
1st Temp. Maint.
1104 026
*EGB
[0 to 50 / 8 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time for maintaining the temperature change that is set with
1104 025.
1st Print Inter.
1104 027
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 sec/step]
For print jobs at regular speed. If the interval between jobs is less than this
setting, then the temperature change (1104 025) for the first page of a new
job is not applied.
Paper Feed. Temp.
1104 028
*EGB
[0 to 30 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Adjusts the increase in the temperature of the fusing unit between the ready
condition and the start of paper feed at the start of a new job (B/W mode).
1st PrtDecTmpTime
1104 029
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time for decreasing 1°C when the temperature decline to the
target printing temperature.
1104 030
PreRot.Thre.Temp.
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Adjusts the threshold temperature for the added idling rotation.
G190
5-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1st Pot Add Time
1104 031
*EGB
[0 to 10 / 2 / 0.1 sec/step]
Adjusts the added idling rotation time. This SP is activated when the fusing
temperature does not reach the specified temperature with SP1104-30.
[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature
(Paper Type, Mode, Color, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> N: Plain paper 1, N2: Plain paper 2, TC: Thick, TN: Thin, SP:
Special, OHP, ENV: Envelope, GL: Glossy paper, TK2: Thick paper 2
1105
Mode -> Simple [one-sided] or Duplex
Color -> K: Black only, FC: Full color
Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed
Reload: Print ready, between jobs
Adjusts the fusing unit temperature for each mode.
1105 022
Reload Temp.
*EGB
1105 025
TC1: Simple: [K]
*EGB
1105 026
TC1: Duplex: [K]
*EGB
1105 027
TC1: Simple: [FC]
*EGB
1105 028
TC1: Duplex: [FC]
*EGB
1105 029
TC2: Simple: [K]
*EGB
1105 031
TC2: Simple: [FC]
*EGB
1105 033
N: Simple: [K]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 145 / 1deg /step]
1105 034
N: Simple: [K]: RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 160 / 1deg /step]
1105 035
N: Duplex: [K]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 145 / 1deg /step]
1105 036
N: Duplex: [K]: RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg /step]
1105 037
N: Simple: [FC]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 145 / 1deg /step]
1105 039
N: Simple: [FC]: RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 160 / 1deg /step]
SM
5-27
Service
Tables
[100 to 180 / 160 / 1deg /step]
[120 to 180 / 160 / 1deg /step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1105 040
N: Duplex: [FC]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 145 / 1deg /step]
1105 042
N: Duplex: [FC]: RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 160 / 1deg /step]
Check Temp. Time
*EGB
[0 to 10 / 2.0 / 0.1 sec/step]
1105 043
Adjusts the rotation time before checking the fusing unit temperature. If the
main switch is turned on and off for a short time, it might be possible that the
checked temperature is high even though the whole of the fusing unit is not
high enough for printing condition.
1105 049
N2: Simple: [K]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 050
N2: Simple: [K]: RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
1105 051
N2: Duplex: [K]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 052
N2: Duplex: [K]: RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
1105 053
N2: Simple: [FC] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 054
N2: Simple: [FC] RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
1105 055
N2: Duplex: [FC] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 056
N2: Duplex: [FC] RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
1105 057
TN: Simple: [K]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 135 / 1deg /step]
1105 058
TN: Simple: [K]: RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 059
TN: Duplex: [K]: LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 135 / 1deg /step]
1105 060
TN: Duplex: [K] RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 061
TN: Simple: [FC] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 135 / 1deg /step]
1105 062
TN: Simple: [FC] RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 063
TN: Duplex: [FC] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 135 / 1deg /step]
1105 064
TN: Duplex: [FC] RS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
1105 065
SP1: Simple: [K] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
G190
5-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1105 067
SP1: Duplex: [K] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
1105 069
SP1: Simp.: [FC] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
1105 071
SP1: Dupl.: [FC] LS
*EGB
[120 to 180 / 165 / 1deg /step]
1105 073
ENV: Simple: [K] RS
*EGB
1105 074
ENV: Simple: [FC] RS
*EGB
1105 075
GL: Simple: [K] LS
*EGB
1105 076
GL: Duplex: [K] LS
*EGB
1105 077
GL: Simple: [FC] LS
*EGB
1105 078
GL: Duplex: [FC] LS
*EGB
1105 089
OHP: [K]: LS
*EGB
1105 090
OHP: [FC]: LS
*EGB
1105 091
TK2: Duplex: [K]
*EGB
1105 092
TK2: Duplex: [FC]
*EGB
1106
[120 to 180 / 170 / 1deg /step]
[120 to 180 / 155 / 1deg /step]
[120 to 180 / 155 / 1deg /step]
[120 to 180 / 160 / 1deg /step]
Service
Tables
[120 to 180 / 150 / 1deg /step]
[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature
H. Roller: Heat Roller
Displays the heating roller temperature at
1106 002
H. Roller Temp.
this time.
[0 to 230 / 0 / 1deg /step]
1159
[Fusing JAM SC] Fusing JAM SC Setting
Turns on or off the fusing jam SC to detect
the three consecutive paper jams at fusing
1159 001
Fusing JAM SC
*EGB
unit.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
SM
5-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Print Speed Ctl] Print Speed Control for small paper sizes (A5 or smaller)
(Sheets of paper, Interval time or Temperature, Process Speed)
1911
Simple [one-sided] or Duplex
Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed
See section 6 for more about these SPs.
1911 001
PPM Down: RS: S
*EGB
The print speed (PPM) is reduced after the
machine has printed this number of pages
1911 002
PPM Down: LS: S
*EGB
continuously.
[0 to 99 / 15 / 1 sheet/step]
The print speed goes back to the normal
1911 003
PPM Down Inter.
*EGB
speed after this interval.
[0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
The temperature is decreased by this
1911 004
S-size Temp. 1
*EGB
amount to prevent overheating the fusing
unit for small size paper.
[0 to 200 / 2 / 1deg /step]
1911 006
S-size Temp. 2
*EGB
1911 008
S-size Temp. 3
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 5 / 1deg /step]]
These SPs control when the above
1911 014
S-size Temp.: S1
*EGB
temperature reductions are done.
[0 to 255 / 25 / 1 sheet/step]
1911 016
S-size Temp.: S2
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
1911 018
S-size Temp.: S3
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sheet/step]
This SP controls when the temperature
1911 020
Simple Temp. 3
*EGB
reduction of SP1911-022 is done.
[0 to 500 / 15 / 1 sheet/step]
Adjusts the temperature reduction for
1911 021
Simple Temp. 1
*EGB
one-sided printing.
[0 to 200 / 2 / 1deg /step]]
G190
5-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Adjusts the temperature reduction 2 for
1911 022
Simple Temp. 2
*EGB
one-sided printing.
[0 to 200 / 5 / 1deg /step]]
This SP keeps the target print temperature
1911 023
Simple Temp.:S1
*EGB
for specified printouts with this SP.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1 sheet/step]
This SP controls when the temperature
1911 024
Simple Temp.:S2
*EGB
reduction of SP1911-021 is done.
[0 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
Adjusts the temperature reduction for
1911 025
Duplex Temp. 1
*EGB
duplex printing.
[0 to 200 / 2 / 1deg /step]]
1911 026
Duplex Temp. 2
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 5 / 1deg /step]]
This SP keeps the target print temperature
1911 027
Duplex Temp.: S1
*EGB
for specified printouts with this SP in
duplex printing.
Service
Tables
[0 to 500 / 80 / 1 sheet/step]
This SP controls when the temperature
1911 028
Duplex Temp.: S2
*EGB
reduction of SP1911-025 is done.
[0 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
This SP controls when the temperature
1911 029
Duplex Temp.: S3
*EGB
reduction of SP1911-026 is done.
[0 to 500 / 15 / 1 sheet/step]
Keeps the temperature reduction for the
time specified with this SP even the
1911 040
Dec.Tmp Keep Time
*EGB
process control interrupts the multiple
printing job.
[0 to 500 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
SM
5-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Fusing Rotat.] Fusing Unit Roller Rotation Control
1912
Paper Type -> TC1: Thick paper 1, TC2: Thick paper 2, OHP, SP: Special,
GL: Glossy paper
Rotation
1912 001
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Off 1: On.
When the printer is in the ready condition, the nip between the hot roller and
pressure roller is in the same position. This may cause deformation of the
rollers. Therefore, a temporary rotation prevents this problem. SP 1912 001
turns this feature on or off. SP1912-003 and 004 control this rotation.
Pre-rotation: Fusing idling
Prerotat. Speed
1912 002
*EGB
[0 to 2 / 2 / -]
Adjusts the speed of the fusing-unit rollers during fusing idling.
0: Regular speed, 1: Low speed, 2: 1/3 regular speed
Rotation Freque.
1912 003
*EGB
[1 to 24 / 4 / 1 hour/step]
Adjusts the frequency of the fusing-unit roller rotation if the machine is in the
ready condition for a very long interval.
1912 004
Rotation Inter.
*EGB
[0 to 25 / 0.1 / 0.1 sec/step]
Adjusts the duration of the fusing-unit roller rotation
1912 005
Prerotat. Temp.
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1deg /step]
Fusing idling is not done if the fusing unit temperature is above this value.
Prerotat. Inter.
1912 006
*EGB
[0 to 180 / 1 / 1 min/step]
Adjusts the duration of fusing idling immediately after the power is turned
on.
Ex. Rotation Time
1912 007
*EGB
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time for extra rotation of the fusing unit rollers at the end of a job.
If the fusing motor stops before the fusing lamp turns off, the temperature
can become very high.
G190
5-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
1912 008
Prerotat. Ext.
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the additional time for pre-rotation of the fusing rollers.
1912 010
TC1: Rotat. Ext.
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for thick paper 1.
1912 011
TC2 Rotat. Ext.
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for thick paper 2.
1912 012
OHP: Rotat. Ext.
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for OHP.
1912 013
SP: Rotat. Ext.
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for special paper.
1912 014
GL: Rotat. Ext.
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for glossy paper.
1912 015
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Service
Tables
LL: RotSpd. Sel
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns on or off the rotation speed switching of the pre-rotation in LL
condition.
When the "ON" is set, pre-rotation speed is the one-third of normal speed.
LM: RotSpd. Select
1912 016
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns on or off the rotation speed switching of the pre-rotation in LM
condition.
When the "ON" is set, pre-rotation speed is the one-third of normal speed.
SM
5-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
MM/HH: RotSpd. Sel
1912 017
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns on or off the rotation speed switching of the pre-rotation in MM/HH
condition.
When the "ON" is set, pre-rotation speed is the one-third of normal speed.
1913
[Heating Roller] Heating Roller Control
Stand-by Temp.
1913 002
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 150 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the heating roller temperature when the machine is in the ready
condition.
1916
1916 001
[Nip Measure] Fusing Nip Width Measurement DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 /-]
Nip Measure Exe.
0: Not execute, 1: Execute
Performs the nip width measurement.
Prerotation Time
1916 002
*EGB
[0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the rotation time of the fusing unit rollers before the nip
measurement.
G190
5-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Environ. Adapt.] Fusing Idling: Environment Correction
The machine automatically adjusts the duration of fusing idling, depending
on room temperature measured by the temperature/humidity sensor
(Paper Type, Temperature Environment, Value of Temperature/ Rotation
1917
Time)
Paper Type
N1: Plain paper 1, N2: Plain paper 2, T1: Thick paper 1, T2:
Thick paper 2, SP: Special (see the Specifications table for details on these
paper weights)
Temperature Environment -> H: High temperature, L: Low temperature
Value of Temperature/ Time: Dec.: Decrease, Inc.: Increase
Adjusts the threshold degree between LL
(Low temperature and Low humidity) and
1917 001
LL/MM Border
*EGB
MM (Middle temperature and middle
humidity).
[0 to 35 / 23 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the additional temperature for LM
LM Temp Adj.
*EGB
condition. This temperature is added to the
Service
Tables
1917 002
fusing temperature of MM condition.
[0 to 30 / 4 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the rotation time decrease at high
1917 003
H: Rotat. Time Dec.
*EGB
temperature.
[-120 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the temperature decrease for plain
1917 004
N1: H: Temp. Dec.
*EGB
paper 1 at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for plain
1917 005
N1: L: Temp. Inc.
*EGB
paper 1 at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the rotation time increase at low
1917 006
L: Rotat. Time Inc.
*EGB
temperature.
[0 to 120 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
SM
5-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Sets the threshold temperature detected
1917 007
H: Standard Temp.
*EGB
as high temperature.
[25 to 40 / 30 / 1deg /step]
Sets the threshold temperature detected
1917 008
L: Standard Temp.
*EGB
as low temperature.
[-15 to 30 / 18 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the rotation time decrease at low
1917 009
L: Rotation Dec.
*EGB
temperature.
[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the temperature decrease for plain
1917 010
N2: H: Temp. Dec.
*EGB
paper 2 at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for plain
1917 011
N2: L: Temp. Inc.
*EGB
paper 2 at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 13 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature decrease for thin
1917 012
TN: H: Temp. Dec.
*EGB
paper at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for thin
1917 013
TN: L: Temp. Inc.
*EGB
paper at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature decrease for thick
1917 014
TC1: H: Temp. Dec.
*EGB
paper 1 at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for thick
1917 015
TC1: L: Temp. Inc.
*EGB
paper 1 at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature decrease for thick
1917 016
TC2: H: Temp. Dec.
*EGB
paper 2 at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
G190
5-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Adjusts the temperature increase for thick
1917 017
TC2: L: Temp. Inc.
*EGB
paper 2 at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature decrease for OHP
1917 018
OHP: H: Temp. Dec.
*EGB
at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for OHP
1917 019
OHP: L: Temp. Inc.
*EGB
at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature decrease for
1917 020
SP: H: Temp. Dec.
*EGB
special paper at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for
1917 021
SP: L: Temp. Inc.
*EGB
special paper at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for
ENV:H:Temp. Inc.
*EGB
envelop at high temperature.
Service
Tables
1917 022
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for
1917 023
ENV:L:Temp. Inc.
*EGB
envelop at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 7 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for
1917 024
GL:H:Temp. Inc.
*EGB
glossary paper at high temperature.
[-50 to 0 / 0 / 1deg /step]
Adjusts the temperature increase for
1917 025
GL:L:Temp. Inc.
*EGB
glossary paper at low temperature.
[0 to 30 / 7 / 1deg /step]
SM
5-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP2-XXX (Drum)
[Color Regist.] Color Registration Correction
([Color], M: Main scan, S: Sub scan)
2101
You can adjust these SPs if the color registration is not good after the Line
Position Adjustment (also known as ‘MUSIC’) is done. The [K] value (-001)
is the standard value in the main scan adjustment. The values other than [k]
value are added to [K] value. So, [K] value normally does not need to be
adjusted in the main scan adjustment.
2101 001
[K]: M Regist. Dot
*EGB
2101 002
[M]: M Regist. Dot
*EGB
2101 003
[C]: M Regist. Dot
*EGB
2101 004
[Y]: M Regist. Dot
*EGB
2101 005
[K]: M Reg. SubD
*EGB
2101 006
[K-M]: M Reg. SubD
*EGB
2101 007
[K-C]: M Reg. SubD
*EGB
2101 008
[K-Y]: M Reg. SubD
*EGB
2101 013
[K-M]: S Reg. 600
*EGB
2101 014
[K-C]: S Reg. 600
*EGB
2101 015
[K-Y]: S Reg. 600
*EGB
2101 016
[K-M]: S Reg. 1200
*EGB
2101 017
[K-C]: S Reg. 1200
*EGB
2101 018
[K-Y]: S Reg. 1200
*EGB
G190
Adjusts the side edge registration by a dot
for each mode.
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
Adjusts the side edge registration by 1/16
dot.
[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step]
5-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Magnifi. Adj.] Magnification Adjustment
2102
Color, M Magnifi.: Main scan magnification
Adjusts the main scan magnification correction for each color.
2102 001
[K]:M Magnifi.
*EGB
2102 002
[M]:M Magnifi.
*EGB
2102 003
[C]:M Magnifi.
*EGB
2102 004
[Y]:M Magnifi.
*EGB
2102 005
PLL
*EGB
[-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.000 / 0.001 %/step]
Adjusts the PLL (phase lock loop).
[-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
[Trim Adjust.] Erase Margin Adjustment
2103
Lead Ed: Leading Edge, Trail. Ed: Trailing Edge, Left/Right Ed: Left/ Right
Edge
2103 001
Lead Ed. Width
*EGB
margin position in the sub scan direction.
[-127 to 127 / 71 / 1 line/step]
Adds this value to the trailing edge erase
2103 002
Trail. Ed. Width
*EGB
margin position in the sub scan direction.
[-127 to 127 / 71 / 1 line/step]
Adds this value to the left edge erase
2103 003
Left Ed. Width
*EGB
margin position in the main scan direction.
[-127 to 127 / 47 / 1 dot/step]
Adds this value to the right edge erase
2103 004
Right Ed. Width
*EGB
margin position in the main scan direction.
[-127 to 127 / 47 / 1 dot/step]
SM
5-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
Adds this value to the leading edge erase
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Adds this value to the leading edge erase
2103 005
Lead Ed.Width/SP1
*EGB
margin position in the sub scan direction
for special paper or thin paper.
[-127 to 127 / 95 / 1 line/step]
2104
[Magnifi. Adj.] Magnification Adjustment
([Color], Main Scan Magnification)
2104 001
[K]: M Magnifi.
*EGB
2104 002
[M]: M Magnifi.
*EGB
2104 003
[C]: M Magnifi.
*EGB
2104 004
[Y]: M Magnifi.
*EGB
Adjusts the main scan magnification.
[-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step]
[LD Power Cont.] LD Power Control
2105
([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular
speed
2105 001
[K] 0
*EGB
2105 002
[M] 0
*EGB
2105 003
[C] 0
*EGB
2105 004
[Y] 0
*EGB
2105 009
[K] 0: LS
*EGB
2105 010
[M] 0: LS
*EGB
2105 011
[C] 0: LS
*EGB
2105 012
[Y] 0: LS
*EGB
G190
5-40
Adjusts the LD power.
[10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] DFU
Adjusts the LD power at low speed.
[10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] DFU
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2106
Polygon Motor Stop Time
Adjusts the time to stop the polygon
2106 001
*EGB
motor after job end.
[0 to 180 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
2109
[LD BeamPattern] LD Beam Pattern
Adds the picture to the LD test pattern.
2109 001
Picture Addition
[0 or 1 / 0 /-]
0: Not execute, 1: Execute
Selects the LD test pattern.
2109 002
Pattern Select
2109 004
Color Select
2111
[Manual Execut.] Manual Line Position Adjustment Execution
2111 001
Position Adjust.
2111 002
Pro. Position Adj.
2111 003
Skew Adjust.
Performs the skew adjustment.
2111 004
ID S. Adjust.
Tests the ID sensor.
2111 005
Area.Magni.Clr.
Clears the area magnification setting.
2120
[LD Off Check]
SM
[0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step]
Selects the color for the LD test pattern.
Service
Tables
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
Performs the line position adjustment.
Performs an approximate line position
adjustment.
Displays the LD off check state.
5-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2143
[ID S. Display] ID Sensor Display
The ID sensor assembly has three sensors: Left, Center, Right
2143 001
PWM: Left
*EGB
2143 002
PWM: Center
*EGB
2143 003
PWM: Right
*EGB
2143 004
Avg: Left
*EGB
2143 005
Avg: Center
*EGB
2143 006
Avg: Right
*EGB
2143 007
Max: Left
*EGB
2143 008
Max: Center
*EGB
2143 009
Max: Right
*EGB
2143 010
Min: Left
*EGB
2143 011
Min: Center
*EGB
2143 012
Min: Right
*EGB
2143 013
Max2: Left
*EGB
2143 014
Max2: Center
*EGB
2143 015
Max2: Right
*EGB
2143 016
Min2: Left
*EGB
2143 017
Min2: Center
*EGB
2143 018
Min2: Right
*EGB
Displays the PWM value for each sensor.
[0 to 512 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the average output from each
sensor.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step]
Displays the maximum output from each
sensor.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step]
Displays the minimum output from each
sensor.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step]
Displays the maximum 2 output from each
sensor.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step]
Displays the maximum 2 output from each
sensor.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step]
G190
5-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Area Magni. Cor] Area Magnification Correction
([Color], Area)
2150 001
[K]: Area 1
*EGB
2150 002
[K]: Area 2
*EGB
2150 003
[K]: Area 3
*EGB
2150 004
[K]: Area 4
*EGB
2150 005
[K]: Area 5
*EGB
2150 006
[K]: Area 6
*EGB
2150 007
[K]: Area 7
*EGB
2150 008
[K]: Area 8
*EGB
2150 009
[K]: Area 9
*EGB
2150 010
[K]: Area 10
*EGB
2150 011
[K]: Area 11
*EGB
2150 012
[K]: Area 12
*EGB
2150 013
[M]: Area 1
*EGB
2150 014
[M]: Area 2
*EGB
2150 015
[M]: Area 3
*EGB
2150 016
[M]: Area 4
*EGB
2150 017
[M]: Area 5
*EGB
2150 018
[M]: Area 6
*EGB
2150 019
[M]: Area 7
*EGB
2150 020
[M]: Area 8
*EGB
2150 021
[M]: Area 9
*EGB
SM
5-43
Adjusts the magnification correction for
each area.
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
Service
Tables
2150
Adjusts the magnification correction for
each area.
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2150 022
[M]: Area 10
*EGB
2150 023
[M]: Area 11
*EGB
2150 024
[M]: Area 12
*EGB
2150 025
[C]: Area 1
*EGB
2150 026
[C]: Area 2
*EGB
2150 027
[C]: Area 3
*EGB
2150 028
[C]: Area 4
*EGB
2150 029
[C]: Area 5
*EGB
2150 030
[C]: Area 6
*EGB
2150 031
[C]: Area 7
*EGB
2150 032
[C]: Area 8
*EGB
2150 033
[C]: Area 9
*EGB
2150 034
[C]: Area 10
*EGB
2150 035
[C]: Area 11
*EGB
2150 036
[C]: Area 12
*EGB
2150 037
[Y]: Area 1
*EGB
2150 038
[Y]: Area 2
*EGB
2150 039
[Y]: Area 3
*EGB
2150 040
[Y]: Area 4
*EGB
2150 041
[Y]: Area 5
*EGB
2150 042
[Y]: Area 6
*EGB
2150 043
[Y]: Area 7
*EGB
2150 044
[Y]: Area 8
*EGB
G190
5-44
Adjusts the magnification correction for
each area.
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
Adjusts the magnification correction for
each area.
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2150 045
[Y]: Area 9
*EGB
2150 046
[Y]: Area 10
*EGB
2150 047
[Y]: Area 11
*EGB
2150 048
[Y]: Area 12
*EGB
[Area Width] Area Width Correction
([Color], Area)
2151 001
[K]: Area 1
*EGB
2151 002
[K]: Area 2
*EGB
2151 003
[K]: Area 3
*EGB
2151 004
[K]: Area 4
*EGB
2151 005
[K]: Area 5
*EGB
2151 006
[K]: Area 6
*EGB
2151 007
[K]: Area 7
*EGB
2151 008
[K]: Area 8
*EGB
2151 009
[K]: Area 9
*EGB
2151 010
[K]: Area 10
*EGB
2151 011
[K]: Area 11
*EGB
2151 012
[K]: Area 12
*EGB
2151 013
[M]: Area 1
*EGB
2151 014
[M]: Area 2
*EGB
2151 015
[M]: Area 3
*EGB
2151 016
[M]: Area 4
*EGB
2151 017
[M]: Area 5
*EGB
SM
5-45
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]
Service
Tables
2151
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2151 018
[M]: Area 6
*EGB
2151 019
[M]: Area 7
*EGB
2151 020
[M]: Area 8
*EGB
2151 021
[M]: Area 9
*EGB
2151 022
[M]: Area 10
*EGB
2151 023
[M]: Area 11
*EGB
2151 024
[M]: Area 12
*EGB
2151 025
[C]: Area 1
*EGB
2151 026
[C]: Area 2
*EGB
2151 027
[C]: Area 3
*EGB
2151 028
[C]: Area 4
*EGB
2151 029
[C]: Area 5
*EGB
2151 030
[C]: Area 6
*EGB
2151 031
[C]: Area 7
*EGB
2151 032
[C]: Area 8
*EGB
2151 033
[C]: Area 9
*EGB
2151 034
[C]: Area 10
*EGB
2151 035
[C]: Area 11
*EGB
2151 036
[C]: Area 12
*EGB
2151 037
[Y]: Area 1
*EGB
2151 038
[Y]: Area 2
*EGB
2151 039
[Y]: Area 3
*EGB
2151 040
[Y]: Area 4
*EGB
G190
5-46
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2151 041
[Y]: Area 5
*EGB
2151 042
[Y]: Area 6
*EGB
2151 043
[Y]: Area 7
*EGB
2151 044
[Y]: Area 8
*EGB
2151 045
[Y]: Area 9
*EGB
2151 046
[Y]: Area 10
*EGB
2151 047
[Y]: Area 11
*EGB
2151 048
[Y]: Area 12
*EGB
[Area Shading] Area Shading Correction Setting
([Color], Area)
2152 006
[K]: Area 0
*EGB
2152 007
[K]: Area 1
*EGB
2152 008
[K]: Area 2
*EGB
2152 009
[K]: Area 3
*EGB
2152 010
[K]: Area 4
*EGB
2152 011
[K]: Area 5
*EGB
2152 012
[K]: Area 6
*EGB
2152 013
[K]: Area 7
*EGB
2152 014
[K]: Area 8
*EGB
2152 015
[K]: Area 9
*EGB
2152 016
[K]: Area 10
*EGB
2152 017
[M]: Area 0
*EGB
2152 018
[M]: Area 1
*EGB
SM
Service
Tables
2152
[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]
[0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]
[0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]
5-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2152 019
[M]: Area 2
*EGB
2152 020
[M]: Area 3
*EGB
2152 021
[M]: Area 4
*EGB
2152 022
[M]: Area 5
*EGB
2152 023
[M]: Area 6
*EGB
2152 024
[M]: Area 7
*EGB
2152 025
[M]: Area 8
*EGB
2152 026
[M]: Area 9
*EGB
2152 027
[M]: Area 10
*EGB
2152 028
[C]: Area 0
*EGB
2152 029
[C]: Area 1
*EGB
2152 030
[C]: Area 2
*EGB
2152 031
[C]: Area 3
*EGB
2152 032
[C]: Area 4
*EGB
2152 033
[C]: Area 5
*EGB
2152 034
[C]: Area 6
*EGB
2152 035
[C]: Area 7
*EGB
2152 036
[C]: Area 8
*EGB
2152 037
[C]: Area 9
*EGB
2152 038
[C]: Area 10
*EGB
2152 039
[Y]: Area 0
*EGB
2152 040
[Y]: Area 1
*EGB
2152 041
[Y]: Area 2
*EGB
G190
[0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]
[0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]
5-48
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Y]: Area 3
*EGB
2152 043
[Y]: Area 4
*EGB
2152 044
[Y]: Area 5
*EGB
2152 045
[Y]: Area 6
*EGB
2152 046
[Y]: Area 7
*EGB
2152 047
[Y]: Area 8
*EGB
2152 048
[Y]: Area 9
*EGB
2152 049
[Y]: Area 10
*EGB
Service
Tables
2152 042
SM
5-49
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2153
[MUSIC Setting] Timing for Automatic Line Position Adjustment (MUSIC)
Enables or disables the automatic line
position adjustment. If this SP is 0, the
2153 001
Auto Execution
*EGB
adjustment is never done.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the adjustment after
2153 002
Process Control
*EGB
process control is done.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the adjustment
immediately after the power is turned on
2153 003
Initialization
*EGB
or when recovering from energy save
mode.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the adjustment
immediately after the machine starts to
receive print job data. The adjustment is
2153 004
Data In
*EGB
done if one of the conditions set with
SP2153-012, -013 and –015 is satisfied.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the adjustment
during printing. The adjustment is done
2153 005
Cut In
*EGB
if one of the conditions set with
SP2153-012, -013 and –015 is satisfied.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: No, 1: Yes
G190
5-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Enables or disables the adjustment after
2153 006
Job End
*EGB
printing.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the transfer belt
speed correction during the adjustment.
The transfer belt speed is affected by
changes in temperature. A change of
2153 008
Trans. Belt Speed 2
*EGB
the transfer belt speed during the
adjustment causes color registration
errors. This SP keeps the transfer belt at
a constant speed.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the line position
adjustment between sheets of paper.
P-P Synch.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF, 1: ON
If this number of pages was printed after
the previous adjustment was done, then
2153 010
Manual Cut In
*EGB
the adjustment is done again. The
number of sheets is counted in
SP7806-003 and –004.
[10 to 999 / 190 / 1 page/step]
If the room temperature changes by this
amount or more after the previous
2153 012
MUSIC Temp.
*EGB
adjustment was done, then the
adjustment is done again.
[2 to 30 / 5 / 1deg /step]
SM
5-51
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
2153 009
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
If this amount of time has passed after
2153 013
Passage Time
the previous adjustment was done, then
*EGB
the adjustment is done again.
[0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 min/step]
Sets the threshold (magnification error)
2153 015
Maginificat. Error
from previous MUSIC for executing
*EGB
MUSIC.
[0 to 10 / 1 / 0.1%/step]
[MUSIC Result] Result of Automatic Line Position Adjustment
([Color],Value, Unit)
2181
Value-> Skew, Bent, M. Scan Erro.: Main Scan Error, S. Scan Erro.: Sub
Scan Error, M. Cor: Main Scan Correction, S. Cor: Sub Scan Correction
Unit-> Dot, SubD.: Sub Dot, 600/ 1200 dpi
The following SPs display the result of MUSIC for each mode.
2181 001
[K]: Skew
*EGB
2181 002
[K]: Bent
*EGB
2181 003
[K]: M. Scan Erro.
*EGB
2181 004
[K]: S. Scan Erro.
*EGB
2181 005
[K]: M Cor.: Dot
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
2181 006
[K]: M Cor.: SubD.
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2181 007
[K]: S Cor.: 600
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step]
2181 008
[K]: S Cor.: 1200
*EGB
[-256 to 256 / 0 / 1 line/step]
2181 011
[M]: Skew
*EGB
[-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1µm /step]
2181 012
[M]: Bent
*EGB
2181 013
[M]: M. Scan Erro.
*EGB
G190
[-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1 µm/step]
5-52
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2181 014
[M]: S. Scan Erro.
*EGB
2181 015
[M]: M Cor.: Dot
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
2181 016
[M]: M Cor.: SubD.
*EGB
[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2181 017
[M]: S Cor.: 600
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step]
2181 018
[M]: S Cor.: 1200
*EGB
[-256 to 256 / 0 / 1 line/step]
2181 021
[C]: Skew
*EGB
2181 022
[C]: Bent
*EGB
2181 023
[C]: M. Scan Erro.
*EGB
2181 024
[C]: S. Scan Erro.
*EGB
2181 025
[C]: M Cor.: Dot
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
2181 026
[C]: M Cor.: SubD.
*EGB
[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2181 027
[C]: S Cor.: 600
*EGB
2181 028
[C]: S Cor.: 1200
*EGB
2181 031
[Y]: Skew
*EGB
2181 032
[Y]: Bent
*EGB
2181 033
[Y]: M. Scan Erro.
*EGB
2181 034
[Y]: S. Scan Erro.
*EGB
2181 035
[Y]: M Cor.: Dot
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
2181 036
[Y]: M Cor.: SubD.
*EGB
[-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2181 037
[Y]: S Cor.: 600
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step]
2181 038
[Y]: S Cor.: 1200
*EGB
[-256 to 256 / 0 / 1 line/step]
SM
[-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1µm /step]
Service
Tables
[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step]
[-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1µm /step]
5-53
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2186
[MUSIC Record] Automatic Line Position Adjustment Record
The following SPs display the MUSIC record.
2186 001
Year
*EGB
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 y/step]
2186 002
Month
*EGB
[1 to 12 / 1 / 1 m/step]
2186 003
Date
*EGB
[1 to 31 / 1 / 1 d/step]
2186 004
Time
*EGB
[0 to 23 / 0 / 1 h/step]
2186 005
Minute
*EGB
[0 to 59 / 0 / 1 m/step]
2186 006
Temperature
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1deg/step]
2186 007
Result
*EGB
[0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
2186 008
Execution
*EGB
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
2186 009
Failure
*EGB
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
[MUSIC Result] Automatic Line Position Adjustment Result
2187
The following SPs display the skew adjustment values after the line position
adjustment have been done.
2187 001
[K]:Skew Adj.
*EGB
2187 002
[M]:Skew Adj.
*EGB
2187 003
[C]:Skew Adj.
*EGB
2187 004
[Y]:Skew Adj.
*EGB
G190
5-54
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 click/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Charge Bias: DC] Charge Roller Voltage: DC
(Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed
2201
LS: Low speed, RS: Regular
speed
These SPs adjust the DC voltage of the drum charge roller. These are used
only when SP3-501-001 is set to "1".
RS: [K]
*EGB
2201 002
RS: [M]
*EGB
2201 003
RS: [C]
*EGB
2201 004
RS: [Y]
*EGB
2201 006
LS: [K]
*EGB
2201 007
LS: [M]
*EGB
2201 008
LS: [C]
*EGB
2201 009
LS: [Y]
*EGB
[200 to 999 / 585 / 1 V/step]
Service
Tables
2201 001
[Charge Bias: AC] Charge Roller Voltage: AC
(Process Speed, [Color])
2202
Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular
speed
These SPs adjust the AC voltage of the drum charge roller. These are used
only when SP2-202-011 is set to "1".
2202 001
RS: [K]
*EGB
2202 002
RS: [M]
*EGB
2202 003
RS: [C]
*EGB
2202 004
RS: [Y]
*EGB
2202 006
LS: [K]
*EGB
2202 007
LS: [M]
*EGB
SM
5-55
[0 to 3000 / 2000 / 1 V/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2202 008
LS: [C]
*EGB
2202 009
LS: [Y]
*EGB
Selects the method for the charge roller
2202 011
Output Control
AC bias adjustment.
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Process Control, 1: Setting
Adjusts the interval for charge roller AC
2202 012
Interval
*EGB
bias adjustment.
[0 to 2000 / 210 / 1 sheet/step]
[Charge Bias: AC] Charge Roller Voltage: AC/I
(Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular
2203
speed
These SPs adjust the AC/I bias of the drum charge roller. These are used
only when SP3-501-001 is set to “1”.
2203 001
RS: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1.5 / 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step]
2203 002
RS: [M]
*EGB
[0 to 1.5 / 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step]
2203 003
RS: [C]
*EGB
[0 to 1.5 / 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step]
2203 004
RS: [Y]
*EGB
[0 to 1.5 / 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step]
[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Voltage: Corrections for humidity
2204
(Environmental correction, [Color])
For more about the humidity conditions, see SP 2304.
Adds these environment correction coefficients to the charge bias.
2204 001
Environ. : HH: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 204 / 1/step]
2204 002
Environ. : HH: [M]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 196 / 1/step]
2204 003
Environ. : HH: [C]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 197 / 1/step]
G190
5-56
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2204 004
Environ. : HH: [Y]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 191 / 1/step]
2204 006
Environ. : H: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 197 / 1/step]
2204 007
Environ. : H: [M]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 188/ 1/step]
2204 008
Environ. : H: [C]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 190 / 1/step]
2204 009
Environ. : H: [Y]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 183 / 1/step]
2204 011
Environ. : MM: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 187 / 1/step]
2204 012
Environ. : MM: [M]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 179 / 1/step]
2204 013
Environ. : MM: [C]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 179 / 1/step]
2204 014
Environ. : MM: [Y]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]
2204 016
Environ. : L: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 195 / 1/step]
2204 017
Environ. : L: [M]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 184 / 1/step]
2204 018
Environ. : L: [C]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 184 / 1/step]
2204 019
Environ. : L: [Y]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 185 / 1/step]
2204 021
Environ. : LL: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 202 / 1/step]
2204 022
Environ. : LL: [M]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 194 / 1/step]
2204 023
Environ. : LL: [C]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 195 / 1/step]
2204 024
Environ. : LL: [Y]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 190 / 1/step]
SM
5-57
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
Service Mode Table
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Dev. Bias: DC] Development Bias: DC
(Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, LS: Low
2212
speed
These SPs adjust the development bias. These are used only when
SP3-501-001 is set to “1”.
2212 001
RS: [K]
*EGB
2212 002
RS: [M]
*EGB
2212 003
RS: [C]
*EGB
2212 004
RS: [Y]
*EGB
2212 005
LS: [K]
*EGB
2212 006
LS: [M]
*EGB
2212 007
LS: [C]
*EGB
2212 008
LS: [Y]
*EGB
2251
[Manual Toner] Forced Toner Supply Execution
2251 001
[K]
2251 002
[M]
2251 003
[C]
2251 004
[Y]
G190
[50 to 800 / 350 / 1 V/step]
Manually executes toner supply for each
color.
The toner supply procedure is done
specified times with SP2252 (supplied for
one second on and one second off).
5-58
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2252
[Forced Toner] Forced Toner Supply Execution
2252 001
Repeat: [K]
2252 002
Repeat: [M]
2252 003
Repeat: [C]
2252 004
Repeat: [Y]
2302
[Temp./Humidity] Temperature / Humidity Display
2302 001
Temperature
2302 002
Relative Humidity
2302 003
Absolute Humidity
Adjusts the toner supply times for SP2251.
[0 to 30 / 8 / 1 time/step]
Displays the temperature.
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Display the relative humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1%RH/step]
Display the absolute humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
2302 004
Current Environ.
Service
Tables
Display the current environment.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
0: LL, 1: ML, 2: MM, 3: MH, 4: HH
2303
[Envir. Correct.] Environment Correction
Manually sets the environment.
2303 001
Manual Correct.
*EGB
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
SM
5-59
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[EC Threshold] Environment Correction Threshold
2304
(Humidity, Environment) A. Humidity: Absolute Humidity
These SPs adjust the thresholds (absolute humidity) for each environment.
2304 001
A. Humidity: LL-MM
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 5.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
2304 002
A. Humidity: ML-MM
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 8.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
2304 003
A. Humidity: MM-MH
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 16.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
2304 004
A. Humidity: MH-HH
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 26.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
2306
[Vd Link Corre.] Vd Link Correction
Sets the Vd link correction.
2306 001
Setting
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Execute, 1: Not execute
*EGB
Adjusts the Vd link correction coefficient.
2306 002
Correction Coef.
2314
[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current at Process Control
[1.00 to 2.50 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]
Adjusts the transfer belt current at process
2314 011
Process Cont. [K]
*EGB
control for [K].
[0 to 60 / 13.0 / 0.1 µA /step]
2314 012
Process Cont. [M]
*EGB
2314 013
Process Cont. [C]
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer belt current at process
control for [M, C].
[0 to 60 / 10.0 / 0.1 µA /step]
Adjusts the transfer belt current at process
2314 014
Process Cont. [Y]
*EGB
control for [Y].
[0 to 60 / 13.0 / 0.1 µA /step]
G190
5-60
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[T.Roll2 Clean.] Transfer Roller Cleaning
2326
(Positive or Negative Bias, Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular
speed, LS: Low speed
Adjusts the positive voltage for transfer
2326 002
Posi. Bias: RS
*EGB
2326 003
Posi. Bias: LS
*EGB
[0 to 2 / 2.0 / 0.1 KV/step]
2326 005
Nega. Bias: RS
*EGB
Adjusts the negative voltage for transfer
2326 006
Nega. Bias: LS
*EGB
roller cleaning.
roller cleaning.
2352
[0 to 60 / 60.0 / 0.1V/step]
[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current
([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed
Adjusts the current that is applied to the
2352 001
[K]: RS
transfer belt.
2353
Service
Tables
[0 to 60 / 17.0 / 0.1 µA /step]
[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current
([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed
Adjusts the current that is applied to the
2353 001
[K]: LS
*EGB
transfer belt.
[0 to 60 / 7.5 / 0.1 µA /step]
2357
[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current
([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed
Adjusts the current that is applied to the
2357 001
[FC/ K]: RS
*EGB
transfer belt.
[0 to 60 / 17.0 / 0.1 µA /step]
2357 002
[FC/ M]: RS
*EGB
2357 003
[FC/ C]: RS
*EGB
SM
[0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 µA /step]
5-61
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2357 004
[FC/ Y]: RS
*EGB
[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current
2358
([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed
Adjusts the current that is applied to the transfer belt.
2358 001
[FC/ K]: LS
*EGB
2358 002
[FC/ M]: LS
*EGB
2358 003
[FC/ C]: LS
*EGB
2358 004
[FC/ Y]: LS
*EGB
[0 to 60 / 7.5 / 0.1 µA /step]
[0 to 60 / 6.0 / 0.1 µA /step]
[Normal: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
image area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode
2402
(Process Speed, Paper Side, Unit) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed,
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation)
2402 007
RS: 1st: T. Roll2
*EGB
2402 008
RS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2402 012
RS: 2nd: T. Roll2
*EGB
2402 013
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
G190
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[0 to 100 / 18.3/15.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA/step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 18.3/15.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
5-62
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Normal: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2403
image area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode
(Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed,
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2403 007
LS: 1st: T. Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 15.3/12.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
2403 008
LS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2403 012
LS: 2nd: T. Roll2
*EGB
2403 013
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 15.3/12.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Normal: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
image area of plain paper 1 in color mode
(Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed,
Service
Tables
2407
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2407 013
RS: 1st: T. Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 30.2/27.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
2407 014
RS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2407 021
RS: 2nd: T. Roll2
*EGB
2407 022
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
SM
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 25.5/30.2 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
5-63
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Normal: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2408
image area of plain paper 1 in color mode
(Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed,
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2408 013
LS: 1st: T. Roll2
*EGB
2408 014
LS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2408 021
LS: 2nd: T. Roll2
*EGB
2408 022
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[0 to 100 / 21.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 18.3/19.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Normal:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
leading edge area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode
2421
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper
separation)
2421 003
Separation
*EGB
2421 007
T.Roll2: 1st
*EGB
2421 012
T.Roll2: 2nd
*EGB
2422
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, plain paper 1
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal LE: Leading Edge
2422 002
T. Roll 2: N: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2422 003
Separation: N: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]
G190
5-64
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Normal: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
trailing edge area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode
2423
Paper side: 1st or 2nd
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper
separation)
2423 003
Separation
*EGB
2423 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2423 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, plain paper 1
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, Edge ->TE: Trailing Edge
2424 002
T. Roll 2: N: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2424 003
Separation: N: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
[Normal: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for
2426
the leading edge area of plain paper 1 in color mode
Paper side: 1st or 2nd
2426 003
Separation
*EGB
2426 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2426 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
2428
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Normal: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for
the trailing edge area of plain paper 1 in color mode
2428 003
Separation
*EGB
2428 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
SM
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
5-65
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
2424
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
different from these SP's values. For
2428 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Normal2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
image area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode
2432
(Process Speed, Paper Side, Unit) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed,
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation)
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2432 007
RS: 1st: T. Roll 2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 15.5/15.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
2432 008
RS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2432 012
RS: 2nd: T. Roll 2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 15.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2432 013
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Normal2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2433
image area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode
(Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed,
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2433 007
LS: 1st: T. Roll 2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 10.0/12.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
2433 008
LS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2433 012
LS: 2nd: T. Roll 2
*EGB
2433 013
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
G190
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 12.5/12.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
5-66
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Normal2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2437
image area of plain paper 2 in color mode
(Process Speed, Paper Side) RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2437 013
RS: 1st: T. Roll 2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 24.3/18.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
2437 014
RS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2437 021
RS: 2nd: T. Roll 2
*EGB
2437 022
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 19.5/21.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Normal2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2438
image area of plain paper 2 in color mode
(Process Speed, Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
LS: 1st: T. Roll 2
*EGB
2438 014
LS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
2438 021
LS: 2nd: T. Roll 2
*EGB
2438 022
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
Service
Tables
2438 013
[0 to 100 / 12.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 13.5/15.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Normal2:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
leading edge area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode
2451
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper
separation)
2451 003
SM
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
5-67
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2451 007
Trans.Roll2: 1st
*EGB
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2451 012
Trans.Roll2: 2nd
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2452
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, plain paper 2
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, LE: Leading Edge
2452 002
T. Roll 2: N2: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2452 003
Separation: N2: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]
[Normal2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for
the trailing edge area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode
2453
Paper side: 1st or 2nd
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper
separation)
2453 003
Separation
*EGB
2453 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2453 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
2454
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, plain paper 2
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, TE: Trailing Edge
2454 002
T. Roll 2: N2: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2454 003
Separation: N2: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
[Normal2:[FC]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for
2456
the leading edge area of plain paper 2 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2456 003
G190
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
5-68
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2456 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2456 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Normal2:[FC]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for
2458
the trailing edge area of plain paper 2 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2458 003
Separation
*EGB
2458 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2458 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Spec1:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2462
leading edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode
2462 007
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 15.5 / 0.1 – A /step]
2462 008
RS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2462 012
RS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 25.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2462 013
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
Service
Tables
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
[Spec1:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2463
trailing edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2463 007
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 12.5 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2463 008
LS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2463 012
LS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 20.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2463 013
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
SM
5-69
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Spec1:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2467
leading edge area of special paper 1 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2467 013
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 18.5 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2467 014
RS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2467 021
RS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 30.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2467 022
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
[Spec1:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2468
trailing edge area of special paper 1 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2468 013
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 17.5 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2468 014
LS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2468 021
LS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 25.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2468 022
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
[Glossy2:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2472
leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2472 007
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 12.5 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2472 008
RS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2472 012
RS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 13.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2472 013
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
G190
5-70
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Glossy2:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2473
trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2473 007
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2473 008
LS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2473 012
LS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -µA/step]
2473 013
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
[Glossy2:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2477
leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode
2477 013
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.1 -µA/step]
2477 014
RS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2477 021
RS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.1 -µA/step]
2477 022
RS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
Service
Tables
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
[Glossy2:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2478
trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2478 013
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2478 014
LS: 1st: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2478 021
LS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -µA/step]
2478 022
LS: 2nd: Separa.
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
2481
SM
[Spec1:[K]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode
5-71
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2481 007
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2481 012
RS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Spec1:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2483
correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2483 007
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2483 012
LS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Spec1:[FC]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2486
correction for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2486 007
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2486 012
RS: 2nd:Separa.
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
G190
5-72
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Spec1:[FC]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2488
correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2488 007
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2488 012
LS: 1st:Separa.
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Glossy2:[K]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2491
correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2491 007
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2491 012
RS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
Service
Tables
means 100%.
[Glossy2:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2493
correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2493 007
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2493 012
LS: 2nd: T.Roll2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
SM
5-73
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Glossy2:[FC]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2496
correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2496 007
RS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2496 012
RS: 2nd:Separa.
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Glossy2:[FC]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2498
correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2498 007
LS: 1st: T.Roll2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2498 012
LS: 2nd:Separa.
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Thick: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2501
image area of thick paper 1 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation)
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2501 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2501 008
Separation: 1st
*EGB
2501 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 12.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2501 013
Separation: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
G190
[0 to 100 / 9.2 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
5-74
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Thick: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2506
image area of thick paper 1 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2506 013
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2506 014
Separation: 1st
*EGB
2506 021
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 18.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
2506 022
Separation: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[0 to 100 / 12.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Thick: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2521
correction for the leading edge area of thick paper 1 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Separation
*EGB
2521 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2521 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
2522
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
Service
Tables
2521 003
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thick paper 1
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC: Thick, LE: Leading Edge
2522 002
T. Roll 2: Thick: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2522 003
Separation: TC: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]
[Thick: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2523
correction for the trailing edge area of thick paper 1 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2523 003
SM
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
5-75
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2523 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2523 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2524
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thick paper 1
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC: Thick, TE: Trailing Edge
2524 002
T. Roll 2: Thick: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2524 003
Separation: TC: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
[Thick: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2526
correction for the leading edge area of thick paper 1 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2526 003
Separation
*EGB
2526 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2526 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Thick: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2528
correction for the trailing edge area of thick paper 1 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2528 003
Separation
*EGB
2528 007
T. Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2528 012
T. Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
G190
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
5-76
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Thick2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2531
image area of thick paper 2 in B/W mode
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation)
2531 007
Transfer Roller 2
*EGB
2531 008
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
image area of thick paper 2 in color mode
Transfer Roller 2
*EGB
2536 014
Separation
*EGB
2551 003
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[Thick2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2536 013
2551
[0 to 100 / 9.2 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[0 to 100 / 12.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
Service
Tables
2536
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[Thick2: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of thick paper 2 in B/W mode
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2551 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2552
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thick paper 2
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC2: Thick 2, LE: Leading Edge
2552 002
T. Roll 2: TC2: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2552 003
Separa.: TC2: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]
SM
5-77
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2553
2553 003
[Thick2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of thick paper 2 in B/W mode
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2553 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2554
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thick paper 2
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC2: Thick 2, TE: Trailing Edge
2554 002
T. Roll 2: TC2: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2554 003
Separa.: TC2: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
2556
2556 003
[Thick2: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of thick paper 2 in color mode
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2556 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2558
2558 003
[Thick2: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of thick paper 2 in color mode
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2558 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
G190
5-78
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2561
[Special1: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2561 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2563
[Special1: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2563 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
2566
Service
Tables
means 100%.
[Special1: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in color mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2566 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2568
[Special1: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in color mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2568 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
SM
5-79
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2571
[Glossy2: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2571 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2573
[Glossy2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2573 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2576
[Glossy2: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2576 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2578
[Glossy2: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2578 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
G190
5-80
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[OHP: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image
2601
area of OHP in B/W mode
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation)
2601 002
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
2601 003
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
image area of OHP in color mode
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
2606 006
Separation
*EGB
2621 002
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[OHP: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2606 005
2621
[0 to 100 / 7.5 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[0 to 100 / 21.3 / 0.1 -µA /step
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -KV/step]
Service
Tables
2606
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[OHP: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of OHP in B/W mode
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2621 003
Separation
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2622
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, OHP
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> OHP, LE: Leading Edge
2622 002
T. Roll 2: OHP: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2622 003
Separa.: OHP: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]
SM
5-81
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2623
2623 002
[OHP: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of OHP in B/W mode
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2623 003
Separation
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2624
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, OHP
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> OHP, TE: Trailing Edge
2624 002
T. Roll 2: OHP: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2624 003
Separa.: OHP: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
2626
2626 002
[OHP: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of OHP in color mode
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2626 003
Separation
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2628
2628 002
[OHP: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of OHP in B/W mode
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2628 003
Separation
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
G190
5-82
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Thin: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image
2631
area of thin paper in B/W mode
Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation)
2631 007
Transfer Roller 2
*EGB
2631 008
Separation
*EGB
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[0 to 100 / 18.3 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Thin: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image
2633
area of thin paper in B/W mode
Process Speed -> LS: Low Speed
T.Roll 2: LS
*EGB
2633 008
Separation: LS
*EGB
2636
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
[0 to 60 / 12.3/ 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
Service
Tables
2633 007
[Thin: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
image area of thin paper in color mode
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2636 013
Transfer Roller 2
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 30.2/24.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
2636 014
SM
Separation
*EGB
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
5-83
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Thin: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2638
image area, of thin paper in color mode
Process Speed -> LS: Low Speed
Adjusts the transfer roller current.
2638 013
T.Roll 2: LS
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 21.3/18.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -µA
/step]
2638 014
2651
Separation: LS
*EGB
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Thin: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction
for the leading edge area of thin paper in B/W mode
[0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2651 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "40%" on the LCD actually
means 200 %.
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2651 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
2652
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thin paper
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, LE: Leading Edge
2652 002
T. Roll 2: Thin: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2652 003
Separation: TN: LE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]
G190
5-84
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2653
2653 003
[Thin: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction
for the trailing edge area of thin paper in B/W mode
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2653 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thin paper
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, TE: Trailing Edge
2654 002
T. Roll 2: Thin: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2654 003
Separation: TN: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
2656
[Thin: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the leading edge area of thin paper in color mode
Service
Tables
2654
[0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2656 003
Separation
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "40%" on the LCD actually
means 200 %.
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2656 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
SM
5-85
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2658
2658 003
[Thin: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
correction for the trailing edge area of thin paper in color mode
Separation
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
2658 007
Transfer Roller2
*EGB
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Special3:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2751
image area of special paper 3 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Adjusts the transfer roller current for 1st
2751 007
T.Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
side.
[0 to 100 / 7.5 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 1st
2751 008
Separation: 1st
*EGB
side.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
Adjusts the transfer roller current for 2nd
2751 021
T.Roll2:nd
*EGB
side.
[0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 2nd
2751 022
Separation: 2nd
*EGB
side.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
G190
5-86
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Special3:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the
2756
image area of special paper 3 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
Adjusts the transfer roller current for 1st
2756 013
T.Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
side.
[0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 1st
2756 014
Separation: 1st
*EGB
side.
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
Adjusts the transfer roller current for 2nd
2756 021
T.Roll2:nd
*EGB
side.
[0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.1 -µA /step]
Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 2nd
2756 022
Separation: 2nd
*EGB
side.
Service
Tables
[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
[Special: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2771
correction for the leading edge area of special paper 3 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2771 003
Separation
*EGB
2771 007
T.Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2771 012
T.Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
2772
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to leading edge, special paper 3
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, TE: Trailing Edge
2772 002
T. Roll 2: Sp3: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2772 003
Separation: TN: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]
SM
5-87
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Special: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage
2773
correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 3 in B/W mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2773 003
Separation
*EGB
2773 007
T.Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2773 012
T.Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
2774
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, special paper 3
(Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, TE: Trailing Edge
2774 002
T. Roll 2: Sp3: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step]
2774 003
Separation: TN: TE
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]
[SP: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction
2776
for the leading edge area of special paper 3 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2776 003
Separation
*EGB
2776 007
T.Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2776 012
T.Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[SP: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction
2778
for the trailing edge area of special paper 3 in color mode
Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
2778 003
Separation
*EGB
2778 007
T.Roll 2: 1st
*EGB
2778 012
T.Roll 2: 2nd
*EGB
G190
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
5-88
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[T2: N: Size 4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper
1, Paper width between A5 and A6
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side)
2901
LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
2901 001
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2901 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step]
2901 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2901 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2901 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step]
2901 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 175 / 5%/step]
2901 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2901 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2901 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2901 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step]
2901 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
2901 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2901 013
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2901 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 300 / 5%/step]
2901 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 145 / 5%/step]
2901 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2901 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 450 / 5%/step]
2901 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
SM
5-89
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2901 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2901 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2901 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2901 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 540/570 (NA/EU) / 5%/step]
2901 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
2901 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
[T2: N: Size 5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper
1, Paper width A6 or less
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side)
2902
LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2902 001
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2902 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290/275 (NA/EU) / 5%/step]
2902 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2902 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2902 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2902 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 240 / 5%/step]
2902 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2902 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2902 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 230 / 5%/step]
2902 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310/325 (NA/EU) / 5%/step]
2902 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2902 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
G190
5-90
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2902 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2902 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 295 / 5%/step]
2902 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2902 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 455 / 5%/step]
2902 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2902 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2902 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2902 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2902 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 540/650 (NA/EU) / 5%/step]
2902 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
2902 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
Service
Tables
2902 013
[T2: N2: Size 4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain
paper 2 Paper width between A5 and A6
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side)
2903
LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2903 001
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2903 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step]
2903 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2903 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2903 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step]
2903 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 175 / 5%/step]
SM
5-91
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2903 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2903 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2903 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2903 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step]
2903 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
2903 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2903 013
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2903 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
2903 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 145 / 5%/step]
2903 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2903 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 450 / 5%/step]
2903 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2903 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2903 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2903 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2903 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 540/535 (NA/EU) / 5%/step]
2903 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
2903 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
G190
5-92
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[T2: N2: Size 5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain
paper 2, Paper width A6 or less
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side)
2904
LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2904 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265/225 (NA/EU) / 5%/step]
2904 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2904 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2904 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2904 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 240 / 5%/step]
2904 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2904 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2904 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 230 / 5%/step]
2904 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 345 / 5%/step]
2904 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2904 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2904 013
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2904 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 375 / 5%/step]
2904 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 295 / 5%/step]
2904 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2904 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 455 / 5%/step]
2904 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
SM
5-93
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
2904 001
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2904 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2904 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2904 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2904 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 540/535 (NA/EU) / 5%/step]
2904 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
2904 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
[T2: Thin: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thin
Paper, Paper width between A5 and A6
2905
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2905 001
LL: RS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2905 002
LL: RS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2905 003
LL: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step]
2905 004
LL: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2905 005
MM: RS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2905 006
MM: RS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
2905 007
MM: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2905 008
MM: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 145 / 5%/step]
2905 009
HH: RS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 450 / 5%/step]
2905 010
HH: RS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2905 011
HH: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2905 012
HH: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
G190
5-94
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[T2: Thin: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thin
paper, Paper width A6 or less
2906
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
2906 001
LL: RS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2906 002
LL: RS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2906 003
LL: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2906 004
LL: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2906 005
MM: RS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 230 / 5%/step]
2906 006
MM: RS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2906 007
MM: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2906 008
MM: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 295 / 5%/step]
2906 009
HH: RS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 455 / 5%/step]
2906 010
HH: RS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2906 011
HH: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2906 012
HH: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
Service
Tables
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
[T2: TC: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick
Paper 1, Paper width between A5 and A6
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side)
2907
LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2907 001
SM
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
5-95
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2907 002
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 255 / 5%/step]
2907 003
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2907 004
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 250 / 5%/step]
2907 005
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step]
2907 006
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
2907 007
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2907 008
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step]
2907 009
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step]
2907 010
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 320 / 5%/step]
2907 011
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2907 012
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step]
[T2: TC: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick
paper 1, Paper width A6 or less
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side)
2908
LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2908 001
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 205 / 5%/step]
2908 002
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 410 / 5%/step]
2908 003
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2908 004
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2908 005
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step]
2908 006
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 500 / 5%/step]
2908 007
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]
G190
5-96
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2908 008
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 435 / 5%/step]
2908 009
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2908 010
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 535 / 5%/step]
2908 011
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]
2908 012
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 445 / 5%/step]
[T2: TC2: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick
Paper 2, Paper width between A5 and A6
2909
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
ƒ
2909 001
LL: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2909 002
LL: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2909 003
MM: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step]
2909 004
MM: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2909 005
HH: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step]
2909 006
HH: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
Service
Tables
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
[T2: TC2: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick
paper 2, Paper width A6 or less
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular
2910
Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2910 001
LL: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 205 / 5%/step]
2910 002
LL: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
SM
5-97
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2910 003
MM: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step]
2910 004
MM: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]
2910 005
HH: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2910 006
HH: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]
[T2: SP Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special
paper, Paper width between A5 and A6
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular
2911
Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2911 001
LL: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2911 002
LL: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2911 003
MM: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step]
2911 004
MM: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2911 005
HH: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step]
2911 006
HH: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
101-106 These are used for 2nd side of the paper.
2911 101
LL: LS: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 320 / 5%/step]
2911 102
LL: LS: [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 250 / 5%/step]
2911 103
MM: LS: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 355 (NA/EU)150 / 5%/step]
2911 104
MM: LS: [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step]
2911 105
HH: LS: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 320 / 5%/step]
2911 106
HH: LS: [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step]
G190
5-98
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[T2: SP: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special
paper, Paper width A6 or less
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular
2912
Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2912 001
LL: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 205 / 5%/step]
2912 002
LL: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2912 003
MM: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step]
2912 004
MM: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]
2912 005
HH: LS [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2912 006
HH: LS [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]
2912 101
LL: LS: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 535 / 5%/step]
2912 102
LL: LS: [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2912 103
MM: LS: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 510 / 5%/step]
2912 104
MM: LS: [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 435 / 5%/step]
2912 105
HH: LS: [K]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 535 / 5%/step]
2912 106
HH: LS: [FC]
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 445 / 5%/step]
Service
Tables
101-106 These are used for 2nd side of the paper.
[T2: SP1: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special
paper1, Paper width between A5 and A6
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular
2913
Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
SM
5-99
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2913 001
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2913 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step]
2913 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2913 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2913 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step]
2913 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 175 / 5%/step]
2913 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2913 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2913 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2913 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step]
2913 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
2913 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2913 013
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2913 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 300 / 5%/step]
2913 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 145 / 5%/step]
2913 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2913 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 450 / 5%/step]
2913 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2913 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2913 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2913 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2913 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 455 / 5%/step]
2913 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
G190
5-100
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2913 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
[T2: SP1: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special
paper1, Paper width A6 or less
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular
2914
Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
2914 001
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2914 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 260 / 5%/step]
2914 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2914 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2914 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2914 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 240 / 5%/step]
2914 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2914 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2914 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 230 / 5%/step]
2914 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 325 / 5%/step]
2914 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2914 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2914 013
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2914 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2914 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 295 / 5%/step]
2914 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2914 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 455 / 5%/step]
SM
5-101
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2914 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2914 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2914 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2914 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2914 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 455 / 5%/step]
2914 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
2914 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
[T2:GL2:Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Glossary
paper2, Paper width between A5 and A6
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular
2915
Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2915 001
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2915 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step]
2915 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2915 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2915 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step]
2915 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 175 / 5%/step]
2915 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2915 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2915 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2915 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step]
2915 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
G190
5-102
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
2915 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2915 013
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2915 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 300 / 5%/step]
2915 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 145 / 5%/step]
2915 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2915 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 450 / 5%/step]
2915 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2915 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2915 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2915 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2915 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 465 / 5%/step]
2915 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
2915 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
[T2:GL2:Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Glossary
paper2, Paper width A6 or less
(Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular
2916
Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2916 001
LL: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2916 002
LL: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2916 003
LL: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2916 004
LL: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2916 005
LL: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
SM
5-103
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
Service Mode Table
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2916 006
LL: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 240 / 5%/step]
2916 007
LL: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2916 008
LL: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 235 / 5%/step]
2916 009
MM: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 230 / 5%/step]
2916 010
MM: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 345 / 5%/step]
2916 011
MM: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2916 012
MM: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2916 013
MM: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step]
2916 014
MM: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2916 015
MM: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 295 / 5%/step]
2916 016
MM: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step]
2916 017
HH: RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 455 / 5%/step]
2916 018
HH: RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2916 019
HH: RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2916 020
HH: RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 310 / 5%/step]
2916 021
HH: LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step]
2916 022
HH: LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 465 / 5%/step]
2916 023
HH: LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 290 / 5%/step]
2916 024
HH: LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]
2920
[S: HH SP: 1st] Smaller than A5 HH Special paper, 1st side
2920 001
T2 Switch Timing
*EGB
2920 002
T2 Correction
*EGB
G190
5-104
[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 mm/step]
[0 to 1275 / 20 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
different from these SP's values. For
example, "4%" on the LCD actually
means 20 %.
2921
[S: HH SP: 2nd] Smaller than A5 HH Special paper, 2nd side
2921 001
T2 Switch Timing
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 15 / 1 mm/step]
[0 to 1275 / 0 / 5%/step]
The value displayed on the LCD is
2921 002
T2 Correction
*EGB
different from these SP's values. For
example, "20%" on the LCD actually
means 100%.
[Separa. : LE: HH] Separation Voltage: Correction for HH Humidity at the
Leading Edge
(Paper Type, Process Speed, [Color]) Paper Type -> Normal, Thin
Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values.
For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2930 001
Normal: RS: [K]
*EGB
2930 002
Normal: RS: [FC]
*EGB
2930 003
Normal: LS: [K]
*EGB
2930 004
Normal: LS: [FC]
*EGB
2930 005
Normal 2: RS: [K]
*EGB
2930 006
Normal 2: RS: [FC]
*EGB
2930 007
Normal 2: LS: [K]
*EGB
2930 008
Normal 2: LS: [FC]
*EGB
2930 009
Thin: RS: [K]
*EGB
SM
[0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step]
5-105
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
2930
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2930 010
Thin: RS: [FC]
*EGB
2930 011
Thin: LS: [K]
*EGB
2930 012
Thin: LS: [FC]
*EGB
[T2:LL:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, LL
Environment, Special paper1,
2938
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2938 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step]
2938 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step]
2938 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
2938 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step]
2938 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2938 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 65 / 5%/step]
2938 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 75 / 5%/step]
2938 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step]
[T2:LL:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, LL
Environment, Glossary paper2,
2939
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2939 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step]
2939 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
G190
5-106
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2939 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 85 / 5%/step]
2939 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2939 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 50 / 5%/step]
2939 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
2939 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 75 / 5%/step]
2939 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
[T2:ML:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, ML
Environment, Special paper1,
2948
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
2948 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
2948 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
2948 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step]
2948 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2948 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2948 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 85 / 5%/step]
2948 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
2948 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
Service
Tables
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
[T2:ML:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, ML
Environment, Glossary paper2,
2949
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
SM
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
5-107
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2949 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
2949 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step]
2949 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step]
2949 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2949 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 75 / 5%/step]
2949 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step]
2949 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step]
2949 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
[T2:MH:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, MH
Environment, Special paper1,
2958
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2958 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2958 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2958 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 175 / 5%/step]
2958 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 115 / 5%/step]
2958 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step]
2958 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step]
2958 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step]
2958 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step]
2959
[T2:MH:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, MH
G190
5-108
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Environment, Glossary paper2,
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2959 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step]
2959 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 115 / 5%/step]
2959 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2959 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step]
2959 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 115 / 5%/step]
2959 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
2959 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step]
2959 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 175 / 5%/step]
Service
Tables
[T2:HH:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, HH
Environment, Special paper1,
2968
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2968 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 115 / 5%/step]
2968 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 115 / 5%/step]
2968 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 205 / 5%/step]
2968 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
2968 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step]
2968 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step]
2968 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 140 / 5%/step]
SM
5-109
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
2968 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step]
[T2:HH:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, HH
Environment, Glossary paper2,
2969
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
ƒ
The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's
values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
2969 001
RS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step]
2969 002
RS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step]
2969 003
RS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2969 004
RS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step]
2969 005
LS [K]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step]
2969 006
LS [K]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
2969 007
LS [FC]: 1st
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 185 / 5%/step]
2969 008
LS [FC]: 2nd
*EGB
[0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]
2971
[T2:Size3] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Size3
(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed
2971 001
LL/1st
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
2971 002
LL/2nd
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 70 / 1%/step]
2971 003
MM/1st
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
2971 004
MM/2nd
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1%/step]
2971 005
HH/1st
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
2971 006
HH/2nd
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 65 / 1%/step]
G190
5-110
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP3-XXX (Process)
3001
[Vt Display] Vt Display ([Color])
3001 001
[K]
*EGB
3001 002
[M]
*EGB
3001 003
[C]
*EGB
3001 004
[Y]
*EGB
Displays the output voltage of TD
sensor for each color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]
3002
[Vcnt Current] Current Vcnt Display ([Color])
3002 001
[K]
*EGB
3002 002
[M]
*EGB
3002 003
[C]
*EGB
3002 004
[Y]
*EGB
Displays the current Vcnt for each color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]
3002 005
[K]
*EGB
3002 006
[M]
*EGB
3002 007
[C]
*EGB
3002 008
[Y]
*EGB
3003
[Vtref Current] Current Vtref Display ([Color])
3003 001
[K]
*EGB
3003 002
[M]
*EGB
3003 003
[C]
*EGB
3003 004
[Y]
*EGB
Service
Tables
[Vcnt Initial] Initial Vcnt Display ([Color])
Displays the initial Vcnt for each color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]
Displays the current Vtref for each color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]
[Vtref Initial] Initial Vtref Display ([Color])
SM
5-111
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3003 005
[K]
*EGB
3003 006
[M]
*EGB
3003 007
[C]
*EGB
3003 008
[Y]
*EGB
3011
Displays the initial Vtref for each color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]
[T. Sensor Init.] Toner Density Sensor Initial Setting
(Agitation Time, TS Target: Toner Sensor Target Value, [Color])
3011 001
Agitation: [K]
*EGB
3011 002
Agitation: [M]
*EGB
3011 003
Agitation: [C]
*EGB
3011 004
Agitation: [Y]
*EGB
3011 005
TD Target: [K]
*EGB
3011 006
TD Target: [M]
*EGB
3011 007
TD Target: [C]
*EGB
3011 008
TD Target: [Y]
*EGB
3021
[Vt Shift] Vt Shift Setting ([Color])
3021 001
[K]
*EGB
3021 002
[M]
*EGB
3021 003
[C]
*EGB
3021 004
[Y]
*EGB
3032
[Vcnt Response] DFU
3032 001
[K]
*EGB
3032 002
[M]
*EGB
G190
Adjusts the agitation time for the developer
for each color.
[0 to 300 / 65 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the TS initial target voltage for each
color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 2.80 / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the Vt shift rate for each color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.90 / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the Vcnt correction coefficient for
each color.
5-112
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3032 003
[C]
*EGB
3032 004
[Y]
*EGB
[1.00 to 5.00 / 3.71 / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the maximum Vcnt correction
3032 005
Max
*EGB
coefficient.
[1.00 to 5.00 / 4.30 / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the minimum Vcnt correction
3032 006
Min
*EGB
coefficient.
[1.00 to 5.00 / 3.50 / 0.01 V/step]
3041
[Vtref] Vtref Setting ([Color])
3041 001
Lower Limit: [K]
*EGB
3041 002
Lower Limit: [M]
*EGB
3041 003
Lower Limit: [C]
*EGB
3041 004
Lower Limit: [Y]
*EGB
3041 005
Upper Limit: [K]
*EGB
3041 006
Upper Limit: [M]
*EGB
3041 007
Upper Limit: [C]
*EGB
3041 008
Upper Limit: [Y]
*EGB
3042
[Vtref] Vtref Correction Setting ([Color]) DFU
Sets the lower limit Vtref voltage for each
color.
[0.10 to 5.00 / 1.60 / 0.01 V/step]
Service
Tables
DFU
Sets the maximum limit Vtref voltage for
each color.
[0.10 to 5.00 / 3.50 / 0.01 V/step]
Sets the Vtref correction.
3042 001
Mode
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: On, 1: Off
3042 002
Step [K]
*EGB
3042 003
Step [M]
*EGB
3042 004
Step [C]
*EGB
SM
Adjusts the Vtref correction step for each
color.
[0.00 to 1.00 / 0.10 / 0.01 V/step]
5-113
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3042 005
Step [Y]
*EGB
3042 006
Adj. Remain: [K]
3042 007
Adj. Remain: [M]
3042 008
Adj. Remain: [C]
3042 009
Adj. Remain: [Y]
3042 014
Change Step: [K]
*EGB
3042 015
Change Step: [M]
*EGB
3042 016
Change Step: [C]
*EGB
3042 017
Change Step: [Y]
*EGB
3051
[Vt Thr.Setting] Vt Threshold Setting ([Color])
3051 001
Low Vt Thr.:[K]
*EGB
3051 002
Low Vt Thr.:[M]
*EGB
3051 003
Low Vt Thr.:[C]
*EGB
3051 004
Low Vt Thr.:[Y]
*EGB
3051 005
High Vt Thr.:[K]
*EGB
3051 006
High Vt Thr.:[M]
*EGB
3051 007
High Vt Thr.:[C]
*EGB
3051 008
High Vt Thr.:[Y]
*EGB
Displays the remaining Vtref value for each
color.
[-5.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the density change rate of the ID
sensor pattern for each color.
[0 to 100 / 15 / 1%/step]
Sets the threshold of the lower limit Vt
voltage for each color.
[0.10 to 5.00 / 2.00 / 0.01 V/step]
DFU
Sets the threshold of the upper limit Vt
voltage for each color.
[0.10 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]
G190
5-114
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3101
[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color])
3101 001
Change Value: [K]
*EGB
3101 002
Change Value: [M]
*EGB
3101 003
Change Value: [C]
*EGB
3101 004
Change Value: [Y]
*EGB
3102
[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color])
3102 001
Change Value: [K]
*EGB
3102 002
Change Value: [M]
*EGB
3102 003
Change Value: [C]
*EGB
3102 004
Change Value: [Y]
*EGB
3103
[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU
3103 001
Pot.Corr.Val: [K]
*EGB
3103 002
Pot.Corr.Val: [M]
*EGB
3103 003
Pot.Corr.Val: [C]
*EGB
3103 004
Pot.Corr.Val: [Y]
*EGB
3104
[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU
3104 001
m/a Corr.Step:[K]
*EGB
3104 002
m/a Corr.Step:[M]
*EGB
3104 003
m/a Corr.Step:[C]
*EGB
3104 004
m/a Corr.Step:[Y]
*EGB
SM
Displays the density change rate of the ID
sensor pattern for each color.
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]
Displays the toner amount change of the ID
sensor pattern for each color.
Service
Tables
[-1.000 to 1.000 / 0 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
Stores the delta Vcnt (current Vcnt - initial
Vcnt) value for each color.
[-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 V/step]
Adjusts the change amount of toner at the
density change rate of the ID sensor
pattern.
[0 to 0.250 / 0.015 / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]
5-115
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3111
[Voff Display] Vsp-offset Display
3111 001
Regular
*EGB
3111 002
Diffusion
*EGB
3121
[Vsg Display] Vsg Display
3121 001
Regular
3121 002
Diffusion
3131
[Lps Display] Lps Display
3131 001
Lps
3141
[Vmin Display]
3141 001
[K]
*EGB
3141 005
[Cl]
*EGB
3142
[Kx Display]
3142 001
Min
G190
*EGB
Displays the Vsp-offset regular voltage.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]
Displays the Vsp-offset diffusion voltage.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]
Displays the Vsp regular voltage.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]
Displays the Vsp diffusion voltage.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]
*EGB
*EGB
Displays the value of Ips.
[0 to 511 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the Vmin voltage for each color.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]
Displays the minimum Kx.
[0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0000 / 0.0001/step]
5-116
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3143
[K5 Display] ([Color])
3143 002
[M]
*EGB
3143 003
[C]
*EGB
3143 004
[Y]
*EGB
3145
[Vmin]
Displays the P.sensor K5 for each color.
[0.0000 to 5.0000 / 1.2500 / 0.0001/step]
DFU
3145 001
Upper Limit
*EGB
Adjusts the maximum Vmin.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.05 / 0.01 V/step]
3146
[K2]
DFU
3146 001
Upper Limit
*EGB
Adjusts the upper limit.
Service
Tables
[0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.1500 / 0.0001/step]
DFU
3146 002
Lower Limit
*EGB
Adjusts the lower limit.
[0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0500 / 0.0001/step]
3147
[K5]
DFU
3147 001
Upper Limit
*EGB
Adjusts the upper limit.
[0.0000 to 5.0000 / 2.5000 / 0.0001/step]
DFU
3147 002
Lower Limit
*EGB
Adjusts the lower limit.
[0.0000 to 5.0000 / 0.7500 / 0.0001/step]
SM
5-117
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3148
[P sensor Prm.] ID sensor Parameter
3148 001
setting
3151
[Vsg Display] ([Color])
3151 001
Regular: [K]
*EGB
3151 002
Regular: [M]
*EGB
3151 003
Regular: [C]
*EGB
3151 004
Regular: [Y]
*EGB
3151 005
Diffusion: [K]
*EGB
3151 006
Diffusion: [M]
*EGB
3151 007
Diffusion: [C]
*EGB
3151 008
Diffusion: [Y]
*EGB
3161
[P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU
3161 001
Target Value: [K]
*EGB
3161 002
Target Value: [M]
*EGB
3161 003
Target Value: [C]
*EGB
3161 004
Target Value: [Y]
*EGB
3161 005
Target Switch
*EGB
G190
*EGB
DFU
[0 to 8.0000 / 4.600 / 0.001/step]
Displays the Vsg output from ID sensor for
each mode.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]
Displays the Vsg output from ID sensor for
each mode.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]
Adjusts the target density of ID sensor
pattern for each mode.
[0 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Not used
5-118
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3162
[P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color])
3162 001
M/A: [K]
*EGB
3162 002
M/A: [M]
*EGB
3162 003
M/A: [C]
*EGB
3162 004
M/A: [Y]
*EGB
3171
[P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU
Displays the toner amount of the ID sensor
pattern for each mode.
[0 to 1.000 / 0 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
Adjusts the interval of making the ID sensor
3171 001
Interval: [K]
*EGB
pattern.
[0 to 200 / 150 / 1 sheet/step]
3171 002
Interval: [MCY]
3202
[Toner Near End] Toner Near End ([Color])
3202 001
Counter: [K]
*EGB
3202 002
Counter: [M]
*EGB
3202 003
Counter: [C]
*EGB
3202 004
Counter: [Y]
*EGB
3301
[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color])
3301 001
[K]
*EGB
3301 002
[M]
*EGB
3301 003
[C]
*EGB
[0 to 200 / 200 / 1 sheet/step]
Displays the counter of the toner near end
for each mode.
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1/step]
Selects the method of the toner suppy for
each mode.
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
0: Fixed, 1: Coefficient (Pixel),
2: Coefficient (TD sensor), 3: Hybrid
See ‘Detailed Section Descriptions –
3301 004
[Y]
*EGB
Process Control – Toner Near-end/Toner
End Detection’
SM
5-119
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
*EGB
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3302
[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color])
3302 001
Fixed Rate: [K]
*EGB
3302 002
Fixed Rate: [M]
*EGB
3302 003
Fixed Rate: [C]
*EGB
3302 004
Fixed Rate: [Y]
*EGB
3303
[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color])
3303 001
T. Supply Rate: [K]
*EGB
3303 002
T. Supply Rate: [M]
*EGB
3303 003
T. Supply Rate: [C]
*EGB
3303 004
T. Supply Rate: [Y]
*EGB
3304
[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color])
3304 001
Upper Limit: [K]
*EGB
3304 002
Upper Limit: [M]
*EGB
3304 003
Upper Limit: [C]
*EGB
3304 004
Upper Limit: [Y]
*EGB
3304 005
Lower Limit: [K]
*EGB
3304 006
Lower Limit: [M]
*EGB
3304 007
Lower Limit: [C]
*EGB
3304 008
Lower Limit: [Y]
*EGB
G190
Adjusts the toner supply rate for each
mode. These SPs are enabled only when
SP3301 for each color is set to “0”.
[0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step]
Displays the toner supply rate for each
mode.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]
Adjusts the upper limit of toner supply rate
for each mode.
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
Adjusts the lower limit of toner supply rate
for each mode.
[0 to 800/ 100 / 10 msec/step]
5-120
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3305
[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color])
3305 001
Convert Time: [K]
*EGB
3305 002
Convert Time: [M]
*EGB
3305 003
Convert Time: [C]
*EGB
3305 004
Convert Time: [Y]
*EGB
3306
[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color])
3306 001
Coefficient 1: [K]
*EGB
3306 002
Coefficient 1: [M]
*EGB
3306 003
Coefficient 1: [C]
*EGB
3306 004
Coefficient 1: [Y]
*EGB
3306 005
Coefficient 2: [K]
*EGB
3306 006
Coefficient 2: [M]
*EGB
3306 007
Coefficient 2: [C]
*EGB
3306 008
Coefficient 2: [Y]
*EGB
3306 009
Coefficient 3: [K]
*EGB
3306 010
Coefficient 3: [M]
*EGB
3306 011
Coefficient 3: [C]
*EGB
3306 012
Coefficient 3: [Y]
*EGB
3306 013
Coefficient 4: [K]
*EGB
3306 014
Coefficient 4: [M]
*EGB
3306 015
Coefficient 4: [C]
*EGB
3306 016
Coefficient 4: [Y]
*EGB
SM
Adjusts the coefficient for calculating the
toner supply time.
[1.0 to 20.0 / 3.45 / 0.01 msec/mg /step]
Adjusts the time of the toner supply in
proportional control mode (Pixel).
[0.10 to 5.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]
Service
Tables
Adjusts the time of the toner supply in
proportional control mode (TD sensor).
[0.10 to 5.00 / 0.3 / 0.01/step]
Adjusts the time of the toner supply in
hybrid control mode.
[0.10 to 5.00 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
Adjusts the time of the toner supply in
hybrid control mode.
[0.10 to 5.00 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
5-121
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3306 017
Coefficient 5: [K]
*EGB
3306 018
Coefficient 5: [M]
*EGB
3306 019
Coefficient 5: [C]
*EGB
3306 020
Coefficient 5: [Y]
*EGB
3401
[Toner End Detec] Toner End Detection
3401 001
*EGB
Adjusts the time of the toner supply in
hybrid control mode.
[0.10 to 5.00 / 1.21 / 0.01/step]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Detected, 1: Not detected
3411
[Toner Near End] ([Color]) DFU
3411 001
Min. Print: [K]
*EGB
3411 002
Min. Print: [Cl]
*EGB
3411 003
Max. Print: [K]
*EGB
Minimum: This is the minimum number of
prints after the toner end sensor detects
toner end.
Maximum: For low image coverage, more
sheets can be printed. This sets the
maximum that can be printed after toner
3411 004
Max. Print: [Cl]
*EGB
end is detected.
[0 to 750 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
3411 005
Pixel: [K]
*EGB
Adjusts the number of sheets (A4), which
the pixel area is converted into for the toner
3411 006
Pixel: [Cl]
end after detecting the toner near end.
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
3501
[Process Cont.] Process Control
Sets the method of the process control.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
3501 001
ON/ OFF
*EGB
0: Auto, 1: Fixed
2: Auto + LS, 3: Auto (Table fixed)
Do not use settings 2 and 3.
G190
5-122
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3511
[Pntr. Display] Process Control Table Display ([Color])
3511 001
[K]
*EGB
3511 002
[M]
*EGB
3511 003
[C]
*EGB
3511 004
[Y]
*EGB
3521
[DEV.Potential] Development Potential Setting ([Color])
3521 001
[K]
*EGB
3521 002
[M]
*EGB
3521 003
[C]
*EGB
3521 004
[Y]
*EGB
3522
[DEV.Potential] Development Potential Setting ([Color])
3522 001
MAX [K]
*EGB
3522 002
MAX [M]
*EGB
3522 003
MAX [C]
*EGB
3522 004
MAX [Y]
*EGB
3523
[DEV.Potential] Development Potential Setting ([Color])
3523 001
MIN [K]
*EGB
3523 002
MIN [M]
*EGB
3523 003
MIN [C]
*EGB
3523 004
MIN [Y]
*EGB
SM
Displays the current process control table
for each mode.
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
Displays the development bias for each
color.
Adjusts the maximum development bias for
each color.
[1 to 800 / 450 / 1 V/step]
Adjusts the minimum development bias for
each color.
[1 to 800 / 150 / 1 V/step]
5-123
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
[1 to 800 / 0 / 1 V/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3531
[M/A Target] ([Color])
Adjusts the maximum toner target M/A for
3531 001
[K]
*EGB
each mode.
[0.000 to 1.000 / 0.53 / 0.001 mg/step]
3531 002
[M]
*EGB
3531 003
[C]
*EGB
3531 004
[Y]
*EGB
3541
[TD Setting] Toner Density Adjustment Setting
3541 001
*EGB
[0.000 to 1.000 / 0.500 / 0.001 mg/step]
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: On, 1: Off
3551
[PC SelfChk] Process Control Self-check
3551 001
Job End 1: [K]
*EGB
At the end of a job, process control is done
after the interval of time that is set with SP
3555 001, if this number of pages was
3551 002
Job End 1: [Cl]
*EGB
printed after the previous process control.
[0 to 2000 / 450 / 1 page/step]
3551 003
Job End 2: [K]
*EGB
At the end of a job, process control is done
immediately, if this number of pages was
3551 004
Job End 2: [Cl]
printed after the previous process control.
*EGB
[0 to 2000 / 450 / 1 page/step]
3551 005
Job End 3: [K]
*EGB
In the middle of a job, printing stops and
process control is done if the number of
3551 006
Job End 3: [Cl]
*EGB
pages in the job gets to this number.
[0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
G190
5-124
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3553
[PC SelfChk]
Adjusts the threshold time for the self check
3553 001
Idle Time
*EGB
without the machine operation.
[0 to 24 / 6 / 0.1 Hour/step]
3554
[Pow. ON SelfChk] Power On Self-check
Adjusts the threshold (Time) of the process
3554 001
Time
*EGB
control from turning the power on.
[0 to 24 / 6.0 / 0.1 H/step]
Adjusts the threshold (Temperature/
3554 002
Temp./ Humidity
*EGB
Humidity) of the process control.
[0 to 100 / 6 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
Adjusts the threshold (Time) for developer
3554 003
Time 2
*EGB
mixing after turning the power on.
Adjusts the threshold (Temperature/
3554 004
Temp./ Humidity 2
*EGB
Humidity) for developer mixing after turning
the power on.
[0 to 100 / 6.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
3555
[S.Chk Stand-by] Process Control Self-check Stand-by Time
Waiting time for the next job command after
job end. If the next job command comes
3555 001
*EGB
before this interval expires, the "JOB END
1" process control is not done. (SP3551
001 and 002)
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /sec]
SM
5-125
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
[0 to 200.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 H/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3556
[Image Process.] Display the Time of Last Image Processing
3556 001
Time (Year)
*EGB
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step]
3556 002
Time (Month)
*EGB
[1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step]
3556 003
Time (Date)
*EGB
[1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step]
3556 004
Time (Hour)
*EGB
[0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step]
3556 005
Time (Minute)
*EGB
[0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step]
3557
[Image Process.] Image Processing
3557 001
Temperature
*EGB
[-127 to 127 / 0.0 / 0. 1°C/step]
3557 002
Humidity
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1% RH/step]
3557 003
A. Humidity
*EGB
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]/step]
3558
[No Use SelfChk] No Use Self-check
Adjusts the maximum repeat times of the
3558 001
Maximum Repeat
*EGB
process control.
[0 to 100 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3561
[Dev g Display] Development gamma Display ([Color])
3561 001
[K]
*EGB
3561 002
[M]
*EGB
3561 003
[C]
*EGB
3561 004
[Y]
*EGB
G190
Displays the development gamma
measured during the process control
self-check.
[0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01/step]
5-126
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Vk Display] ([Color])
3562 001
[K]
*EGB
3562 002
[M]
*EGB
3562 003
[C]
*EGB
3562 004
[Y]
*EGB
3573
[Vd Display] ([Color])
3573 001
[K]
*EGB
3573 002
[M]
*EGB
3573 003
[C]
*EGB
3573 004
[Y]
*EGB
3574
[Vl Display] ([Color])
3574 001
[K]
*EGB
3574 002
[M]
*EGB
3574 003
[C]
*EGB
3574 004
[Y]
*EGB
3575
[-300 to 300 / 0 / 1 V/step]
Displays the current Vd value.
[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 V/step]
Displays the current Vl value.
[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 V/step]
[Vb Display]
(Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed
3575 001
RS: [K]
*EGB
3575 002
RS: [M]
*EGB
3575 003
RS: [C]
*EGB
3575 004
RS: [Y]
*EGB
SM
Displays the current Vk value.
Service
Tables
3562
Displays the current Vb value for each
mode.
[0 to 800 / 350 / 1 V/step]
5-127
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3575 005
LS: [K]
*EGB
3575 006
LS: [M]
*EGB
3575 007
LS: [C]
*EGB
3575 008
LS: [Y]
*EGB
3576
[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias
(DC, Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed
3576 001
DC: RS: [K]
*EGB
3576 002
DC: RS: [M]
*EGB
3576 003
DC: RS: [C]
*EGB
3576 004
DC: RS: [Y]
*EGB
3576 005
DC: LS: [K]
*EGB
3576 006
DC: LS: [M]
*EGB
3576 007
DC: LS: [C]
*EGB
3576 008
DC: LS: [Y]
*EGB
G190
Displays the current charge roller DC bias
of the development unit for each mode.
[0 to 999 / 585 / 1 V/step]
5-128
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3577
[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias
(AC, Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed
3577 001
AC: RS: [K]
*EGB
3577 002
AC: RS: [M]
*EGB
3577 003
AC: RS: [C]
*EGB
3577 004
AC: RS: [Y]
*EGB
3577 005
AC: LS: [K]
*EGB
3577 006
AC: LS: [M]
*EGB
3577 007
AC: LS: [C]
*EGB
3577 008
AC: LS: [Y]
*EGB
3581
Displays the current charge roller AC bias
of the development unit for each mode.
[0.0 to 3.0 / 1.9 / 0.001 kV/step]
[LD Control] LD Power Control
3581 001
LD: RS: [K]
*EGB
3581 002
LD: RS: [M]
*EGB
3581 003
LD: RS: [C]
*EGB
3581 004
LD: RS: [Y]
*EGB
3581 005
LD: LS: [K]
*EGB
3581 006
LD: LS: [M]
*EGB
3581 007
LD: LS: [C]
*EGB
3581 008
LD: LS: [Y]
*EGB
SM
Service
Tables
Displays the current LD power rate for each mode.
[10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]
5-129
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Dev. Setup] Developer Initialization Setting
3601
Adjusts the number of the sheet for the developer free run at the developer
initializing for each color.
3601 001
SheetSet: [K]
*EGB
3601 002
SheetSet: [M]
*EGB
3601 003
SheetSet: [C]
*EGB
3601 004
SheetSet: [Y]
*EGB
3602
[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
[Dev. Setup] Developer Initialization Setting
Adjusts the toner supply times for the developer initializing for each color.
3602 001
SupplySet: [K]
*EGB
3602 002
SupplySet: [M]
*EGB
3602 003
SupplySet: [C]
*EGB
3602 004
SupplySet: [Y]
*EGB
[0 to 30 / 20 / 1 /step]
[Dev. Setup] Developer Initialization Setting DFU
3606
Specifies the maximum times of developer initialization to adjust the proper
toner density.
3606 001
G190
Repeat
*EGB
[1 to 20 / 5 / 1 /step]
5-130
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3611
[Supply Thresh]
Adjusts the toner supply threshold for the toner density adjustment.
Normal: [K]
*EGB
3611 002
Normal: [M]
*EGB
3611 003
Normal: [C]
*EGB
3611 004
Normal: [Y]
*EGB
3611 005
High Vt:[K]
*EGB
3611 006
High Vt [M]
*EGB
3611 007
High Vt [C]
*EGB
3611 008
High Vt [Y]
*EGB
3611 009
DEV.SetUp: [K]
*EGB
3611 010
DEV.SetUp [M]
*EGB
3611 011
DEV.SetUp [C]
*EGB
3611 012
DEV.SetUp [Y]
*EGB
3612
[1 to 800 / 420 / 1 V/step]
[1 to 800 / 380 / 1 V/step]
Service
Tables
3611 001
[Consume Thresh]
Adjusts the toner consume threshold for the toner density adjustment.
3612 001
Normal: [M]
*EGB
3612 002
Normal: [C]
*EGB
3612 003
Normal: [Y]
*EGB
3612 004
Normal:[K]
*EGB
3612 005
Low Vt: [K]
*EGB
3612 006
Low Vt: [M]
*EGB
SM
[1 to 800 / 220 / 1 V/step]
[1 to 800 / 250 / 1 V/step]
5-131
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3612 007
Low Vt: [C]
*EGB
3612 008
Low Vt: [Y]
*EGB
3612 009
DEV.SetUp: [K]
*EGB
3612 010
DEV.SetUp [M]
*EGB
3612 011
DEV.SetUp [C]
*EGB
3612 012
DEV.SetUp [Y]
*EGB
[Low Resolution] (Threshold, [Color])
SP 3701-001 controls if the pixel count is used in hybrid toner supply mode
or not. If this SP is ‘on’, it is used if the image coverage ratio for the page is
3701
below a threshold value (if the coverage is above this ratio, then the TD
sensor is used). If this SP is ‘off’, then the TD sensor is always used.
SP3701-002 to 005 control the threshold values for the image coverage
ratio.
3701 001
Low Resolution
*EGB
3701 002
Threshold: [K]
*EGB
3701 003
Threshold: [M]
*EGB
3701 004
Threshold: [C]
*EGB
3701 005
Threshold: [Y]
*EGB
G190
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
[0 to 100 / 1 / 1%/step]
5-132
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3721
[Low Resolution] Toner Refresh Mode Setting in Low Image Coverage
Ratio
Enables or disables the toner refresh mode.
3721 001
Toner Refresh Mode
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: On. 1: Off
Toner refresh mode is done if the
3721 002
S: Toner Refresh
*EGB
percentage of pages that have low image
coverage is larger than this threshold value.
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1%/step]
3721 003
Toner refresh coef.
*EGB
3721 004
Interval Bk
*EGB
3721 005
Interval Col
*EGB
3731
[SUM.ImageArea]
3731 001
[Bk]
*EGB
3731 002
[M]
*EGB
3731 003
[C]
*EGB
3731 004
[Y]
*EGB
3741
[Thr.SplyMthod]
3741 001
[Bk]
*EGB
3741 002
[M]
*EGB
3741 003
[C]
*EGB
3741 004
[Y]
*EGB
Toner refreshing coefficient: DFU
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
Specifies the interval of the process control
at low coverage printing.
SM
Displays the total coverage for each color
after the process control execution. This SP
is cleared when the process control is done.
Value: pixel
Adjusts the threshold for low coverage
printing.
[0 to 255 / 1 / 1%/step]
5-133
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3801
[TD Initial] TD sensor Initialization ([Color]) DFU
3801 001
[All]
3801 002
[Cl]
3801 003
[K]
3801 004
[M]
3801 005
[C]
3801 006
[Y]
3811
[Developer] Developer Initialization
3811 001
All
3820
[Process Cont.] Process Control
Initializes the developer for each mode.
Press the Enter key to execute the
initialization after the machine asks
"Execute?"
Initializes all the developers.
Executes the process control.
3820 001
Press the Enter key to execute the
initialization after the machine asks
"Execute?"
G190
5-134
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3821
[P Ctl Result] Process Control Result
3821 001
1
*EGB
3821 002
2
*EGB
3821 003
3
*EGB
3821 004
4
*EGB
3821 005
5
*EGB
3821 006
6
*EGB
3821 007
7
*EGB
3821 008
8
*EGB
3821 009
9
*EGB
3821 010
10
*EGB
Displays each logged process control
result.
The ten most recent ones are shown. 3821
001 is the most recent.
See ‘Troubleshooting – Process Control
Service
Tables
Results’.
SM
5-135
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5001
[All Indicators On]
5001 001
5024
*CTL
Checks the LED on the operation panel.
0: Normal, 1: All lit
[mm/ inchDisplay]
Sets units (mm or inch) for custom paper
5024 001
*CTL
sizes.
[0 or 1 / 1 /-]
0: mm (EU/AS), 1: inch (NA)
5045
[Accounting count]
Selects the counting method if the meter
charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.
5045 001
Counter Method
*CTL
[0 to 2 / 1 / -]
0: Developments, 1: Pages, 2:Coverage
range
5051
[Refill Toner Disp] Toner Refill Display
Enable or disable the warning display when
you install a toner bottle that was refilled by
5051 001
Refill Toner Disp
*CTL
third party venders.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
G190
5-136
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5055
[Display IP address]
Display or does not display the IP address
5055 001
Display IP address
on the LCD.
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not display, 1: Display
5056
[Coverage Counter]
Display or does not display the coverage
5056 001
Coverage Counter
counter.
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not display, 1: Display
5150
[Bypass Long Paper] By-pass Long Paper
Lets or does not let the by-pass tray feed
0: OFF, 1: ON
extra long paper (up to 1260 mm).
-
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Service
Tables
5150 001
0: Off, 1: On
5169
[CE Login]
Enables or disables the CE login.
5169 001
CE Login
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
5302
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time
setting for the local time zone.
5302 002
Time difference
*CTL#
[-1440 to 1440 / NA, EU, CH / 1
minute/step]
NA: -300, EU: 60, CH: 480
SM
5-137
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5307
[Summer Time]
Enables or disables the summer time
5307 001
ON/OFF
-
mode.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
5307 003
Rule Set(Start)
-
NA: 04100010, EU: 035(4)00010,
ASIA: 105(4)00010
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour
/step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
5307 004
ƒ
The digits are counted from the left.
ƒ
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set(End)
-
NA: 105(4)60000, EU: 105(4)00000,
ASIA: 03100000
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
G190
ƒ
The digits are counted from the left.
ƒ
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
5-138
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Access Control]
5401 200 SDK1 Unique ID
*CTL
"SDK" is the "Software Development Kit".
These data can be converted from SAS
5401 201 SDK1 Certification
*CTL
Method
5401 210 SDK2 Unique ID
(VAS) when installed or uninstalled. DFU
*CTL
5401 211 SDK2 Certification
*CTL
Method
5401 220 SDK3 Unique ID
*CTL
5401 221 SDK3 Certification
*CTL
Method
5404
[User Code Clear] User Code Counter Clear
5404 001
User Code Clear]
5501
[PM Alarm Interval] PM Alarm Interval
-
Clears all counters for users.
Service
Tables
5401
Sets the PM alarm Interval. [0 to 9999 / 0 /
1k prints/step]
The alert is sent to the e-mail address that
is specified for the system administrator
5501 001
Printout
*CTL
using a browser and the built-in web server
(Web Image Monitor).
0: Disables the PM alarm
When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is
enabled.
SM
5-139
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5504
[Jam Alarm]
Sets the jam alarm level. If a paper jam
occurs, the jam alarm counter increases by
+1. If no paper jam occurs while the set
number of paper is output, the jam alarm
counter decreases by -1. The jam alarm
occurs when the jam alarm counter gets to
+10.
5504 001
Jam Alarm
*CTL
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
0: Disables the jam alarm
1: 1.5K, 2: 3K, 3: 6K
The alert is sent to the e-mail address that
is specified for the system administrator
using a browser and the built-in web server
(Web Image Monitor).
When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is
enabled.
G190
5-140
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5505
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level. If an SC code
occurs, the error alarm counter increases
by +1. If no SC code occurs while the set
number of paper is output, the jam alarm
counter decreases by -1. The error alarm
occurs when the error alarm counter
reaches +5.
5505 001
Error Alarm
*CTL
[0 to 255 / 30 / 1/step]
0: Disables the PM alarm
The alert is sent to the e-mail address that
is specified for the system administrator
using a browser and the built-in web server
(Web Image Monitor).
When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is
Service
Tables
enabled.
SM
5-141
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5507
[Supply Alarm]
5507 001
Paper Size
*CTL
5507 003
Toner
-
0: Off, 1: On
5507 004
Maintenance Kit S
5507 005
Drum Life Remain S
5507 006
Waste Toner Bottle
5507 007
Tensya Supply Al
5507 128
Interval: Others
*CTL
Sets the paper supply alarm level. A paper
5507 133
Interval: A4
*CTL
5507 134
Interval: A5
*CTL
5507 142
Interval: B5
*CTL
5507 164
Interval: LG
*CTL
5507 166
Interval: LT
*CTL
Enables or disables the supply alarm.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
supply alarm counter increases by +1 when
a sheet of the related size is used. The
paper supply alarm occurs when one of the
paper supply alarm counters gets to the set
value.
[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1/step]
The alert is sent to the e-mail address that
is specified for the system administrator
using a browser and the built-in web server
5507 172
Interval: HLT
*CTL
(Web Image Monitor).
When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is
enabled.
G190
5-142
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[SC/Alarm Setting]
5515
Turns on or off the following SC alarm settings. These SP's are active when
the CSS or NRS is enabled.
5515 001
SC Call
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
This SP activates the service parts near
5515 002
Service Parts Ne
*CTL
end call.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
5515 003
Service Parts En
*CTL
5515 004
User Call
*CTL
This SP activates the service parts end call.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
This SP activates the communication test
5515 006
Communication Te
*CTL
call.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
This SP activates the machine information
Machine Infomat
*CTL
call.
Service
Tables
5515 007
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
5515 008
Alarm Notice
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
This SP activates the non genuine toner
5515 009
Non Genuine Tonn
*CTL
bottle call.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
This SP activates the automatic supply
5515 010
Supply Automatic
*CTL
order call.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
This SP activates the supply management
5515 011
Supply Managemen
*CTL
call.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
SM
5-143
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5801
[Memory Clear]
Resets the SP5801-002 through 016
5801 001
All
-
except the security related data in 003, 010,
011and 015. These cannot be reset with SP
mode.
5801 002
Engine
-
Resets or deletes the engine-related data.
5801 003
SCS
-
Clears the system settings.
5801 004
IMH
-
Clears IMH data. DFU
5801 005
MCS
-
Clears MCS data. DFU
5801 008
Printer
-
Clears the printer application settings.
5801 010
GWWS/NFA
-
Clears the web service data and the
network application data.
Initializes the system default and interface
5801 011
NCS
-
settings (IP address also), SmartNetMonitor
for Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and
the TELNET settings.
5801 014
DCS Setting
-
Resets or deletes the DCS-related data.
5801 015
Clear UCS Setting
-
Resets or deletes the UCS-related data.
5801 016
MIRS Setting
-
Resets or deletes the MIRS-related data.
5801 017
CCS
-
Resets or deletes the CSS-related data. FA
5801 018
SRM Memory Clr
-
Resets or deletes the SRM-related data.
5801 019
LCS
-
Resets or deletes the LCS-related data.
G190
5-144
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5802
[Engine Free Run]
Performs a free run on the printer engine.
ƒ
The machine starts free run in the
same condition as the sequence of
A4/LT printing from the 1st tray.
5802 001
Therefore, paper should be loaded
in the 1st tray, but paper is not fed.
ƒ
The main switch has to be turned
off and on after using the free run
mode for a test.
5803
[Input Check]
See ‘Input Check
5804
Service
Tables
Table’
[Output Check]
See ‘Output Check
Table’
5808
[Destination] Destination Code Display
Displays the destination code.
5808 001
Destin. Code Disp
*EGB
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: DOM (Japan), 1: OTHER, 2: ASIA
3: ERP (Europe). 4: USA
SM
5-145
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5810
[Fusing SC Reset]
Resets a type A service call condition. Turn
5810 001
Fusing SC Reset
the main power switch off and on after
resetting the SC code.
5811
[Serial No.] Machine Serial No. Setting
5811 001
Setting
*EGB
5811 002
Display
*EGB
5812
[Service TEL]
[SSP]
Sets the machine serial number.
Displays the machine serial number.
Sets the telephone number for a service
representative. This number is printed on
5812 001
Telephone
*CTL
the Counter List, which can be printed with
the user’s “Counter” menu. This can be up
to 19 characters (both numbers and
alphabetic characters can be input).
Sets the fax or telephone number for a
service representative. This number is
printed on the Counter List, which can be
5812 002
Facsimile
*CTL
printed with the user’s "Counter" menu if
the Meter Charge mode is selected with
SP5-930-1. This can be up to 19 characters
(both numbers and alphabetic characters
can be input).
G190
5-146
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5813
[Power Freqency]
5813 001
-
Displays the power frequency.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 Hz/step] Not used
5814
[Power Voltage]
5814 001
Detected Voltage
5816
[NRS Function] These settings are used for NRS.
-
Displays the detected power voltage.
[0 to 400 / 0 / 1 V/step] Not used
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
5816 001
I/F Setting
*CTL
0: Off, 1: CSS (Not used)
2: Network (The remote service function is
on.)
CE Call
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Start, 1: End
Service
Tables
5816 002
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Off (The remote service function is
5816 003
Function Flag
*CTL
disabled.)
1: On (The remote service function is
enabled.)
5816 007
SSL Disable
*CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: On, 1: Off
Sets the timeout counter for the remote
5816 008
RCG Connect T/O
*CTL
connection.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second/step]
Sets the timeout counter for writing
5816 009
RCG Write Timeout
*CTL
processing.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
5816 010
SM
RCG Read Timeout
*CTL
Sets the timeout counter for reading
5-147
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
processing.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Enables or disables access to the SOAP
5816 011
Port 80
*CTL
method via port 80.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disables, 1: Enables
5816 021
Function Flag
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not registered, 1: Registered
This SP displays the Cumin installation
status.
5816 022
Install Status
*CTL
0: Basil not registered
1: Basil registered
2: Device registered
Connect Mode (N/M)
5816 023
*CTL
This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
5816 061
NotiTime ExpTime
*CTL
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
HTTP Proxy use
5816 062
*CTL
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
G190
5-148
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
HTTP Proxy Host
*CTL
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between Cumin-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the
customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up
5816 063
Cumin-N.
ƒ
The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters
beyond the 127th character are ignored.
ƒ
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
HTTP Proxy Port
*CTL
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
5816 064
between Cumin-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up
Cumin-N.
ƒ
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the
HTTP Proxy AutUsr
Service
Tables
SMC report.
*CTL
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
5816 065
ƒ
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character
beyond the 31st character is ignored.
ƒ
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
HTTP Proxy AutPass
*CTL
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
5816 066
ƒ
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character
beyond the 31st character is ignored.
ƒ
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
SM
5-149
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5816 067
Cer Updt Cond
*CTL
Displays the status of the certification update.
0
1
2
3
4
11
12
The certification used by Cumin is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being
notified of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of
the failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is
being notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed
13
successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL
14
15
16
The notification of the certification request has been received from
the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified
of the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW
17
URL, the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it
was completed, but an certification error has been received, and the
rescue certification is being recorded.
G190
5-150
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
18
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW
URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
Cer Abnml Cause
*CTL
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
1
5816 068
2
3
5816 069
Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification
has expired.
An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the
certification has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual
certification.
4
Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5
Notification that no certification was issued.
6
Notification that GW URL does not exist.
Cer Updt ReqID
Service
Tables
0
*CTL
The ID of the request for certification.
5816 083
Firm Updating
*CTL
Displays the status of the firmware update.
Firm UpFlg NoHDD
5816 084
*CTL
This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the
HDD installed.
SM
5-151
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Firm UpUsr Conf
*CTL
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version
5816 085
of the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to
confirm the previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the
URL.
Firmware Size
5816 086
*CTL
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files
during the firmware update execution.
5816 087
CERT: MacroVsn
*CTL
Displays the macro version of the NRS certification.
5816 088
CERT: PAC Vsn
*CTL
Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.
CERT: ID2 Code
5816 089
*CTL
Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores
(_). Asteriskes () indicate that no NRS certification exists.
CERT: Subject
5816 090
*CTL
Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the
following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks ()
indicate that no DESS exists.
CERT: SeriNum
5816 091
*CTL
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks () indicate that no
DESS exists.
CERT: Issuer
5816 092
*CTL
Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the
following 30 bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no DESS exists.
G190
5-152
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
CERT: St ExpTime
5816 093
*CTL
Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
CERT: End ExpTime
5816 094
*CTL
Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
5816 200
Poling Man Exc
*CTL
No information is available at this time.
Instl: Condition
*CTL
Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device.
0: Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set.
1: The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
5816 201
status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.
2: The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a
3: The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be
set.
4: The NRS module has not started.
5816 202
Instl: ID #
*CTL
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device.
5816 203
Instl: Reference
*CTL
Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.
Instl: Ref Rslt
*CTL
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with
5816 204
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
SM
5-153
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
polling request.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
Instl: Ref Section
5816 205
*CTL
Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered
at the GW URL.
5816 206
Instl: Rgstltn
*CTL
Executes Cumin Registration.
Instl: Rgstltn Rst
*CTL
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
5816 207
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
G190
5-154
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5816 208
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when
either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Illegal Modem
Parameter
Code
Meaning
-11001
Chat parameter error
-11002
Chat execution error
-11003
Unexpected error
-12002
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting
-12003
-12004
-2385
Attempted registration without execution of
an inquiry and no previous registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for
certification and ID2.
correct international prefix for the telephone
number.
GW URL
SM
acquiring device status.
Attempted dial up overseas without the
Error Caused by
Response from
Inquiry, registration attempted without
-2387
Not supported at the Service Center
-2389
Database out of service
-2390
Program out of service
-2391
Two registrations for same device
-2392
Parameter error
-2393
Basil not managed
-2394
Device not managed
-2395
Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396
Device ID for Basil is illegal
5-155
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
Cause
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5816 209
Instl Clear
-2397
Incorrect ID2 format
-2398
Incorrect request number format
*CTL
Releases a machine from its Cumin setup.
5816 250
Print Com Log
*CTL
Prints the communication log.
5821
[NRS Address]
5821 001
CSS-PI Device
*CTL
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
5821 002
RCG IP Address
(used for NRS)
*CTL
Communication Gate).
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h /
1/step]
5824
[NVRAM Upload]
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except
5824 001
NVRAM Upload
#
for counters and the serial number) from
the NVRAM to an SD card.
5825
[NVRAM Download]
5825 001
NVRAM Download
G190
#
Downloads the UP and SP mode data from
an SD card to the NVRAM.
5-156
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5828
[Network Setting] Job spool settings/ Interface selection for Ethernet and
wireless LAN
Switches Centronics IEEE1284
compatibility on/off for the network.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
5828 050
1284 Compatible
*CTL
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
ƒ
Selecting “0” disables bi-directional
data transmission.
Switches the ECP setting for Centronics
off/on.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
5828 052
ECP
*CTL
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
ƒ
With “1” selected, SP5-828-050
must be enabled for 1284 mode
Service
Tables
compatibility.
Switches the job spool on/off.
5828 065
Job Spool
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Selects the treatment of the job when a
5828 066
HD job Clear
*CTL
spooled job exists at power on.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Data is cleared, 1: Automatically printed
Switches job spooling off or on and enables
settings for job spooling protocols.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
5828 069
SM
Job Spool (Protocol)
*CTL
0: Off, 1: On
Bit switches:
ƒ
Bit 0: LPR
ƒ
Bit 1: FPT
ƒ
Bit 2: IPP
5-157
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5828 090
TELNET (0: OFF, 1:
ON)
ƒ
Bit 3: SMB
ƒ
Bit 4: Not used.
ƒ
Bit 5: DIPRINT
ƒ
Bits 6 and 7: Reserved
Enables or disables Telnet.
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Web monitor.
5828 091
Web (0: OFF, 1: ON)
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Displays the IPv6 link local address for the
5828 145
Active IPv6 Link
5828 147
Active IPv6 Stat (1)
5828 149
Active IPv6 Stat (2)
5828 151
Active IPv6 Stat (3)
5828 153
Active IPv6 Stat (4)
5828 155
Active IPv6 Stat (5)
5828 156
IPv6 Manual Addr
5828 158
IPv6 Gateway Add
5832
[HDD] HDD Initialization
5832 001
G190
wireless LAN or Ethernet.
Displays the IPv6 stateless address 1 to 5
for the wireless LAN or Ethernet.
Displays the IPv6 manual setting address
for the wireless LAN or Ethernet.
Displays the IPv6 gateway address for the
wireless LAN or Ethernet.
#
Prepares the hard disk. Use this SP mode
only when there is a hard disk error.
5-158
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5839
[IEEE 1394]
5839 007
Cycle Master
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 1 /-]
0: Off, 1: On
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
5839 008
BCR mode
*CTL
0: Standard, 1: IRM Color Copy
2: Reserved, 3: Always Effective
IRM 1394a Check
*CTL
5839 010
Unique ID
*CTL
5839 011
Logout
*CTL
5839 012
Login
*CTL
5839 013
Login MAX
*CTL
SM
[0 or 1 / 0 /-]
0: Off, 1: On
[0 or 1 / 1 /-]
0: Off, 1: On
[0 or 1 / 1 /-]
0: Off, 1: On
[0 or 1 / 0 /-]
0: Off, 1: On
[0 to 63 / 8 / 1/step]
5-159
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
5839 009
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5840
[IEEE 802.11]
Sets the maximum number of channels
available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels
available varies according to location. The
5840 006
Channel MAX
*CTL
default settings are set for the maximum
end of the range for each area. Adjust the
upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of
channels.
EU: [1 to 13 / 13 / 1/step]
NA/ AS: [1 to 11 / 11 / 1/step]
Sets the minimum number of channels
available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels
available varies according to location. The
5840 007
Channel MIN
*CTL
default settings are set for the minimum end
of the range for each area. Adjust the lower
4 bits to set the minimum number of
channels.
EU: [1 to 13 / 1 / 1/step]
NA/ AS: [1 to 11 / 1 / 1/step]
[0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
0 x 0F - 36M Fix
5840 008
Transmission Speed
*CTL
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
G190
5-160
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 09 - 22M (reserved)
Selects the WEP key.
[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
5840 011
WEP Key Select
*CTL
00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
10: Key #3 (Reserved)
11: Key #4 (Reserved)
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the
IEEE802.11 card.
5804 042
Fragment Thresh
*CTL
[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
This SP is displayed only when the
IEEE802.11 card is installed.
Determines whether the CTS self function
is turned on or off.
5804 043
11g CTS to Self
*CTL
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
Service
Tables
This SP is displayed only when the
IEEE802.11 card is installed.
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.
5804 044
11g Slot Time
*CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 μm, 1: 9 μm
This SP is displayed only when the
IEEE802.11 card is installed.
Selects the debug level for WPA
authentication application.
5804 045
WPA Debug Lvl
*CTL
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
This SP is displayed only when the
IEEE802.11 card is installed.
SM
5-161
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5842
[GWWS Analysis] Net File Application Analysis
Prints or does not print the module log for
each bit.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Prints, 1: Not print
Bit switches:
ƒ
Bit 0: System or other related
application.
5842 001
Setting 1
*CTL
ƒ
Bit 1: Captured related application
ƒ
Bit 2: Certification related application
ƒ
Bit 3: Address related application
ƒ
Bit 4: Control devices or transmission
logs related application
ƒ
Bit 5: Output (print, fax or transmission)
related application
ƒ
Bit 6: Documents related application in
bit 7, 0: Not printed, 1: Printed
ƒ
Bit 7: MSB related application
Selects the stamp type for the log of Net
File Application Analysis.
Bit switches:
5842 002
Setting 2
*CTL
ƒ
Bit 0 to 6: Not used.
ƒ
Bit 7
0: Minute/second/micro second
1: Date/hour/minute/second
G190
5-162
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5844
[USB]
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
5844 001
Transfer Rate
*CTL
[0001 or 0004 / 0004 / -]
0001: Full speed, 0004: Auto Change
5844 002
Vendor ID
*CTL
Displays the vendor ID.
5844 003
Product ID
*CTL
Displays the product ID.
5844 004
Dev Release Num
*CTL
5845
[Delivery Srv] Delivery Server Setting
5845 003
DeliErr DisplTime
*CTL
5845 004
Delivery Options
*CTL
Displays the device release version
number.
Specifies the retry interval.
[60 to 900 / 300 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the maximum number of retries.
Service
Tables
[0 to 99 / 3 / 1/step]
Switches instant transmission off/on.
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: Off. Instant transmission not possible
with network setting errors.
0: On. Instant transmission possible with
network setting errors.
5845 022
Instant Trans Off
ƒ
*CTL
The machine will continue to
transmit over the network, even if
the network settings are incorrect.
(This causes multiple errors, of
course.)
ƒ
With this SP off, the machine will
stop communicating with the
network if the settings are wrong.
This reduces the amount of
SM
5-163
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
spurious network traffic caused by
errors due to incorrect settings.
5846
5846 010
[UCS Setting]
LDAP Search TOut
*CTL
[1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
AddtB Acl Info
*CTL
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a
basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
5846 041
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However,
the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Displays the slot number where an address
book data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
5846 043
AddrB Media
*CTL
1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
IniSet/All AddrB
5846 046
*CTL
This SP clears all the setting information managed in UCS and address
book information (local, delivery, LDAP) and restores these settings to their
default values. Use this SP to initial the account information (user codes and
passwords) for system managers and users as well.
5846 047
Ini Local AddrB
*CTL
Clears the local address book information, including the user code.
G190
5-164
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5846 049
Ini LDAP AddrB
*CTL
Clears the LDAP address book information, except the user code.
Init All AddrB
*CTL
5846 050
Initializes all address information data
except the administration account.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS, including all user codes.
Turn off and on the main power switch after executing this SP.
5846 051
Bkup All AddrB
*CTL
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
5846 052
Restr All AddrB
*CTL
Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Clear Backup Info
*CTL
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
ƒ
After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then turn the
power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops
flashing.
Search option
*CTL
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS
5846 060
local address book.
Bit: Meaning
Bit0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
Bit1: Japan Only
Bit2 to 7
Compl Opt1
5846 062
*CTL
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
SM
5-165
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
5846 053
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
ƒ
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
ƒ
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
Compl Opt2
*CTL
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case
5846 063
and defines the length of the password.
ƒ
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
ƒ
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
Compl Opt3
*CTL
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers
5846 064
and defines the length of the password.
ƒ
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
ƒ
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
Compl Opt4
*CTL
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and
5846 065
defines the length of the password.
ƒ
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
ƒ
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
Encryption Stat
5846 094
*CTL
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] No default
Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the
LDAP server.
G190
5-166
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5848
[Web Service]
Enables or disables the undirectory access
5848 004
ac: UD
*CTL
limitation.
0000: Disabled, 0001: Enabled
ac: Job Ctrl
5848 011
ac: Dev Mng
*CTL
5848 022
ac:Uadmin
*CTL
5848 210
LogType: Job 1
*CTL
5848 211
LogType: Job 2
*CTL
5848 212
LogType: Access
*CTL
5848 213
PrimarySrv
*CTL
5848 214
SecondarySrv
*CTL
5848 215
Start Time
*CTL
Interval Time
*CTL
5848 216
Switches access control on and off.
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
Displays the log server settings.
These can be adjusted with the Web Image
Monitor.
Service
Tables
5848 009
[1 to 1000 / 1 / 1 hour/step]
Specifies the interval of transmitting log information. This SP is activated
only when the SP5848-217 is set to "2".
5848 217
Timing
*CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Selects the method for transmitting log information.
0: Transmitting OFF, 1: Always Transmitting, 2: Interval Transmitting
SM
5-167
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5849
[Installation Date]
Enables or disables the udirectory access
5849 001
Display
*CTL
limitation.
0000: Disabled, 0001: Enabled
Determines whether the installation date is
printed on the printout for the total counter.
5849 002
Print
*CTL
[0 to 1/1]
0: No Print
1: Print
5849 003
Total Counter
5851
[Bluetooth]
*CTL
Adjusts the Bluetooth setting.
5851 001
Mode
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Public, 1: Private
5856
[Remote ROM Update]
Allows the technician to update the
5856 002
Local Port
firmware using a parallel cable.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
G190
5-168
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5857
[Debug Log Save]
Enables Or Disables The Debug Log
5857 001
ON/ OFF
*CTL
Saving Function.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/Step] Alphanumeric
0: OFF, 1: ON
Sets the storage location for the debug log.
5857 002
Target
*CTL
[2 or 3 / 2 / 1/step]
2: HDD, 3: SD
5857 005
Save to HDD
*CTL
Sets the key number of the debug log.
5857 006
Save to SD Card
*CTL
Sets the key number of the debug log.
5857 009
HDD to SD Latest
*CTL
5857 010
HDD to SD Any
*CTL
5857 011
Erase HDD Debug
*CTL
Deletes the debug log from the hard disk.
5857 012
Erase SD Debug
*CTL
Deletes the debug log from the SD card.
5857 013
Dsply-SD Space
*CTL
Shows the free space on the SD card.
5857 014
SD to SD Latest
*CTL
Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug
log from the hard disk to the SD card.
Sets the key number of the debug log
Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug
log from an SD card to a different SD card.
Sets the key number of the debug log
5857 015
SD to SD Any
*CTL
copied from an SD card to a different SD
card.
5857 016
Make HDD Debug
File
*CTL
Makes a log file on the HDD to save debug
logs. To save debug logs, the controller
makes a log file first, then writes data in the
file. This procedure can use much time. The
5857 017
Make SD Debug File
*CTL
user can switch off the main power switch
before the log is written in the file. To
SM
5-169
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
copied from the hard disk to the SD card.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
prevent this possible problem, you can
prepare a log file in advance. If you do this,
the controller uses less time to save logs
because the log file is prepared.
5858
[Debug Log Save: SC]
Collects debug logs when an
5858 001
Engine SC
*CTL
engine-related SC code occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Collects debug logs when a
5858 002
Controller SC
*CTL
controller-related SC code occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5858 003
Any SC
*CTL
Sets the SC code whose logs are collected.
[00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Collects debug logs when a paper jam
5858 004
Jam
*CTL
occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
G190
5-170
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5859
[Debug Log Save Key]
5859 001
Key 1
*CTL
5859 002
Key 2
*CTL
Sets the key number of a specific event
Key 3
*CTL
5859 004
Key 4
*CTL
5859 005
Key 5
*CTL
5859 006
Key 6
*CTL
5859 007
Key 7
*CTL
5859 008
Key 8
*CTL
5859 009
Key 9
*CTL
5859 010
Key 10
*CTL
5860
[SMTP/ POP3/ IMAP4]
(see the note below) whose logs are saved
in the specified storage place (see the note
below). When multiple key numbers are
assigned, the logs are collected in this
order: Key 1, Key 2, ..., Key 9, Key 10.
ƒ
The event is set with SP5-857-2.
The storage is set with SP5-858.
[0000000 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Service
Tables
5859 003
Adjusts the number of the SMTP server
5860 002
SMTP Srv Port No.
*CTL
ports.
[1 to 65535 / 25 / 1/step]
Enables or disables the SMTP
5860 003
SMTP Auth.
*CTL
authentication for mail transfers.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for
5860 006
SMTP Auth Encryp
*CTL
POP3/IMAP4 authentications.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt
5860 007
SM
POP before SMTP
*CTL
Enables or disables the authentication that
is executed on the POP server before the
5-171
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
communication is established with the
SMTP server to transfer mails.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Adjusts the waiting time to access the
5860 008
POP to SMTP Wait
*CTL
SMTP server after the authentication on the
POP server.
[0 to 10000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
Sets the protocol of receiving e-mail.
5860 009
Mail Receive Pro
*CTL
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
1: POP3, 2: IMAP4, 3: SMTP
Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for
5860 013
POP3/IMAP4 Auth.
*CTL
POP3/IMAP4 authentications.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt
5860 014
POP3 Srvr Port No.
*CTL
Adjusts the port number of the POP server.
[1 to 65535 / 110 / 1/step]
Adjusts the port number of the IMAP4
5860 015
IMAP4 Srv Port
*CTL
server.
[1 to 65535 / 143 / 1/step]
Adjusts the port number of the SMTP
5860 016
SMTP Rx Port No
*CTL
server.
[1 to 65535 / 25 / 1/step]
5860 017
Mail Rx Interval
*CTL
Adjusts the interval of receiving an e-mail.
[2 to 1440 / 3 / 1 minute/step]
Sets the way of keeping the e-mail in the
server.
5860 019
Mail Keep Setting
*CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not keeping
1: Keeping All
2: Keeping the only error e-mail
G190
5-172
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Adjusts the time for keeping the partial
e-mails. If the partial e-mails are not
5860 020
ParMail Rec TOut
*CTL
received during the set time, these are
deleted.
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 h/step]
Determines whether RFC2298compliance
5860 021
MDN Res RFC2298
*CTL
is switched on for MDN reply mail.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: No, 1: Yes
Determines whether the FROM item of the
mail header is switched to the validated
5860 022
SMTP Aut FileldRep
*CTL
account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: No. “From” item not switched,
1: Yes. “From” item switched.
Selects directly the way of SMTP
fail due to the error in the SP5860-006.
This SP is activated only when SP5860-003
5860 025
SMTP Auth DirectSet *CTL
is set to “Enable”.
Bit switch 0: LOGIN
Bit switch 1: PLAIN
Bit switch 2: CRAM MD5
Bit switch 3: DIGEST MD
Bit switch 4 - 7: Not used
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail
sent by S/MIME.
5860 026
S/MIVE: MIME
Header Setting
*CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
SM
5-173
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
authentication if all SMTP authentications
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5866
[E-Mail Report]
Disables and re-enables the email
5866 001
Report Validity
notification feature.
*CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
Enables or disables to add the date field on
5866 005
Add DataFiled
the alert notice e-mail.
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Off, 1: On
5869
[RAM Disk Setting]
Enables or disables the e-mail transfer
function. This SP sets the RAM disk size for
5869 001
Mail Function
*CTL#
the e-mail transfer function.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: On, 1: Off
5870
[Common Key Info Writi] Common Key Information Writing
5870 001
Writing
*CTL
5870 003
Initialize
*CTL
5873
[SD Card Appli Move]
5873 001
Move Exec
See ‘SD Card Appli Move’.
5873 002
Undo Exec
See ‘SD Card Appli Move’.
G190
Writes the authentication data (used for
NRS) in the memory.
Initializes the authentication data in the
memory.
5-174
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5878
5878 001
[Option Setup]
Data Overwrite
Executes the setup for the Data Overwrite
Security
Security Unit.
5878 002
HDD Encryption
5886
[Permit ROM update]
5886 001
Permit ROM update
5887
[SD Get Counter]
Executes the setup for the HDD Encryption
Unit.
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 . The
operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of
the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt)
1.
Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2.
Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
3.
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
Service
Tables
prefixed with the number of the machine.
[Personal Information Protect]
5888*
Selects the protection level for logs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
SM
5-175
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
⇒
5907
Rev. 04/23/2008
[Plug/ Play] Plug/Play Name Selection
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Ricoh, Aficio SP C420DN
1: SAVIN, CLP131DN
2: Gestetner, SP C420DN
5907 001
*CTL
3: NRG, SP C420DN
4: LANIER, LP331cn/SP C420
5: IKON, BPRO3131CP
6: InfoPrint, IP SP C420DN
5924
[SDK Apli Display] SDK Application Display
Enables or disables the LCD display of the
5924 001
SDK Appli Display
*CTL
SDK application.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not display, 1: Display
G190
5-176
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5930
[Meter Click Ch.] Meter Click Charge
Enables or disables the Meter Charge
mode. When enabling the Meter Charge
5930 001
Meter Click Ch.
*EGB
mode, the “Counter” menu is added to the
user menu.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Displays or does not display the end display
for the PCU. This SP is activated only when
5930 010
PCU
*EGB
the SP5930-001 is set to "1".
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Displays or does not display the end display
for the transfer belt unit. This SP is
5930 014
Mid Trans Unit
*EGB
activated only when the SP5930-001 is set
to "1".
Service
Tables
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Displays or does not display the end display
for the fusing unit. This SP is activated only
5930 016
Fusing Unit.
*EGB
when the SP5930-001 is set to "1".
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF, 1: ON
SM
5-177
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5990
[SP Print Mode]
5990 001
All (Data List)
5990 002
SP (Mode Data List)
5990 004
Logging Data
5990 005
Diagnosic Report
Does SP5-990-002, 004, 005, 006, and
007.
Prints an SMC report on all SP modes.
Prints an SMC report on the SPs that save
logs.
Prints the Self-Diagnostic Report.
Prints an SMC report on the SPs that have
5990 006
Non-Default
settings, which are different from the
defaults.
5990 007
G190
NIB Summary
Prints the network configuration report.
5-178
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP7-XXX (Data Log)
[Total SC Counter]
7401 001
Total SC Counter
7403
[SC History]
7403 001
Latest
*CTL
7403 002
Latest 1
*CTL
7403 003
Latest 2
*CTL
7403 004
Latest 3
*CTL
7403 005
Latest 4
*CTL
7403 006
Latest 5
*CTL
7403 007
Latest 6
*CTL
7403 008
Latest 7
*CTL
7403 009
Latest 8
*CTL
7403 010
Latest 9
*CTL
7502
[Counter Paper Jam]
7502 001
Counter Paper Jam
SM
*CTL
*CTL
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the SC codes detected.
The 10 most recently detected SC Codes
are displayed on the screen, and also can
be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
Service
Tables
7401
Displays the total number of jams detected.
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
5-179
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Paper Jam/Loc] Paper Jam Location
7504
Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were
detected.
7504 001
At Power On
*CTL
Not used
7504 003
Tray 1: Non-feed
*CTL
Tray 1: Paper is not fed.
7504 004
Tray 2: Non-feed
*CTL
Tray 2: Paper is not fed.
7504 005
Tray 3: Non-feed
*CTL
Tray 3/LCT: Paper is not fed.
7504 006
By-pass: Non-feed
*CTL
By-pass: Paper is not fed.
7504 007
Duplex: Non-feed
*CTL
Duplex: Paper is not fed.
7504 008
Registration
*CTL
Registration Senor does not get "ON".
7504 009
Fusing Exit
*CTL
Fusing Exit Sensor does not get "ON".
7504 010
Exit
*CTL
Paper Exit Sensor does not get "ON".
7504 011
Inverter (F)
*CTL
Duplex: ON
7504 012
Inverter (R)
*CTL
Duplex Jam Sensor 1 does not get "ON".
7504 013
Duplex Exit
*CTL
Duplex Jam Sensor 2 does not get "ON".
7504 015
Bank Paper Feed
*CTL
7504 016
Fusing Entrance
*CTL
7504 017
Tray4: Non-feed
*CTL
7504 018
Bank Paper feed2
*CTL
7504 061
Regist: Stay
*CTL
Registration Sensor does not get "OFF"
7504 063
Exit: Stay
*CTL
Paper Exit Sensor does not get "OFF".
7504 065
Inverter (F): Stay
*CTL
Duplex: OFF
G190
Optional Paper Feed Sensor does not get
"ON".
Fusing Entrance Sensor does not get "ON".
5-180
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7504 066
Inverter (R): Stay
*CTL
Duplex Exit 1: OFF
7504 070
Bank Paper 1: Stay
*CTL
Not used
7504 071
Bank Paper 2: Stay
*CTL
Not used
7504 072
Bank Paper 3: Stay
*CTL
7506
[Paper Jam/Size]
7506 006
A5 LEF
*CTL
7506 044
HLT LEF
*CTL
7506 133
A4 SEF
*CTL
7506 134
A5 SEF
*CTL
7506 142
B5 SEF
*CTL
7506 164
LG SEF
*CTL
7506 166
LT SEF
*CTL
7506 172
HLT SEF
*CTL
7506 255
Others
*CTL
Displays the number of jams according to
the paper size.
SM
Service
Tables
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
5-181
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7507
[Dsply-P Jam Hist] Paper Jam History Display
7507 001
Latest
*CTL
7507 002
Latest 1
*CTL
7507 003
Latest 2
*CTL
7507 004
Latest 3
*CTL
7507 005
Latest 4
*CTL
7507 006
Latest 5
*CTL
7507 007
Latest 6
*CTL
7507 008
Latest 7
*CTL
7507 009
Latest 8
*CTL
7507 010
Latest 9
*CTL
7801
[Memory/Version/PN] Memory Version and Part Number Display
7801 250
Memory/Version/PN
G190
*CTL
Displays the 10 most recently detected
paper jams.
Displays the part number and version of all
ROMs in the machine.
5-182
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[PM Counter] Preventive Maintenance Counter Display
7803
(Sheets or Rotations (%), Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit
T. Roll 2: Transfer Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottles
Displays the PM counter for each unit.
7803 001
Paper
*EGB
7803 002
S: PCU: [K]
*EGB
7803 003
S: PCU: [M]
*EGB
7803 004
S: PCU: [C]
*EGB
7803 005
S: PCU: [Y]
*EGB
7803 009
S: Transfer Belt Unit
*EGB
7803 010
S: T. Roll 2
*EGB
7803 011
S: Fusing Unit
*EGB
7803 012
S: By-pass
*EGB
7803 013
S: Tray 1
*EGB
Displays the number of sheets printed for
each current maintenance unit. When a unit
is replaced, the machine automatically
detects that the new unit is installed. Then,
the current PM counter value is
automatically moved to the PM Counter Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to
“0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the
last unit replaced can be checked with
Service
Tables
SP7-906-1 to 10.
SP7-803-001: This shows the number of
pages printed.
7803 014
S: Tray 2
*EGB
7803 015
S: Tray 3
*EGB
7803 016
S: Tray 4
*EGB
7803 017
R: PCU: [K]
*EGB
7803 018
R: PCU: [M]
*EGB
7803 019
R: PCU: [C]
*EGB
7803 020
R: PCU: [Y]
*EGB
7803 025
R: Trans Belt Unit
*EGB
7803 026
R: T. Roll 2
*EGB
SM
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Displays the number of revolutions of
motors or clutches for each current
maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
When a unit is replaced, the machine
automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter
value is automatically moved to the PM
5-183
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and
is reset to “0”. The total number of
7803 027
R: Fusing Unit
revolutions made with the last unit replaced
*EGB
can be checked with SP7-906-11 to 20.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 rotation/step]
7803 033
Toner Supply: [K]
*EGB
7803 034
Toner Supply: [M]
*EGB
7803 035
Toner Supply: [C]
*EGB
7803 036
Toner Supply: [Y]
*EGB
7803 037
R%: PCU: [K]
*EGB
7803 038
R%: PCU: [M]
*EGB
7803 039
R%: PCU: [C]
*EGB
7803 040
R%: PCU: [Y]
*EGB
7803 045
R%: Trans Belt Unit
*EGB
7803 046
R%: T. Roll 2
*EGB
Displays the number of sheets printed until
the waste toner bottle becomes full or toner
runs out.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the value given by the following
formula:
(Current revolution / Target revolution) ×
100, where “Current revolution” is the
current value for the counter of the part, and
“Target revolution” is the values of
SP7-803-17 through 27. This shows how
much of the unit’s expected lifetime has
been used up.
The R% counter is based on rotations, not
prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end
7803 047
R%: Fusing Unit
condition for that unit. If the print count
*EGB
lifetime is reached first, the machine also
enters the end condition, even though the
R% counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 999 / 0 / 1 rotation%/step]
7803 050
PCU Life: [K]
*EGB
7803 051
PCU Life: [Col]
*EGB
7803 052
reserved
*EGB
7803 053
reserved
*EGB
G190
Displays the PCU unit life.
[-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step]
5-184
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7803 054
TransBeltU.Life
*EGB
7803 055
T.Roll2 Life
*EGB
7803 056
FusingUnit Life
*EGB
Displays the transfer belt unit life.
[-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step]
Displays the paper transfer unit life.
[-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step]
Displays the fusing unit life.
[-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step]
[PM Counter Reset] Preventive Maintenance Counter Reset
7804
(Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit, T. Roll 2: Transfer
Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottles
Clears the PM counter for each unit.
Paper
7804 002
PCU: [K]
-
7804 003
PCU: [M]
-
7804 004
PCU: [C]
-
7804 005
PCU: [Y]
-
7804 009
Trans Belt Unit
-
7804 010
Transfer Roller 2
-
7804 011
Fusing Unit
-
7804 012
S: By-pass
-
7804 013
S: Tray 1
-
7804 014
S: Tray 2
-
7804 015
S: Tray 3
-
7804 017
S: Toner: [K]
-
7804 018
S: Toner: [M]
-
SM
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine
asks “Execute?”.
When a unit is replaced, the machine
automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter
value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter-Previous (SP7-906-1 to 40) and
is reset to "0".
5-185
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
7804 001
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7804 019
S: Toner: [C]
-
7804 020
S: Toner: [Y]
-
7804 021
Toner Supply: [K]
-
7804 022
Toner Supply: [M]
-
7804 023
Toner Supply: [C]
-
7804 024
Toner Supply: [Y]
-
7804 025
S: Tray 4
7804 050
All
G190
5-186
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7806
[Procon Counter] Process Control Counter ([Color])
7806 001
[K]
*EGB
7806 002
[Cl]
*EGB
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1/step]
[MUSIC Counter] ([Color])
7806 003
[K]
*EGB
Counts the paper printed after previous
MUSIC.
7806 004
[Cl]
*EGB
[0 to 999 / 0 / 1/step]
[P. Pattern Coun.] P. Sensor Pattern Counter ([Color])
7806 005
[K]
*EGB
7806 006
[Cl]
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
[Low Resolution] Low Resolution Counter ([Color])
Sheets: [K]
*EGB
7806 008
Sheets: [M]
*EGB
7806 009
Sheets: [C]
*EGB
7806 010
Sheets: [Y]
*EGB
7806 011
Counter
*EGB
7807
[SC/ Jam Counter Reset]
7807 001
SC/ Jam Counter
Reset
-
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
[0 to 2000 / - / 1 /step]
Clears the all counters related to SC codes
and paper jams.
7810
[Engine Cnt Reset] Engine Counter Reset
7810 001
All Clear
SM
-
Service
Tables
7806 007
Clears the all Engine counters other than
the total counter (SP7812).
5-187
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7812
[Total Cnt. Rst.] Total Counter Reset
7812 001
Color Counter
-
Clears the total color counter.
7812 002
Black Counter
-
Clears the total black counter.
7812 100
All Reset
-
Clears the total all counter.
[Rep. Cnter Reset] Replacement Counter Reset
7815
(Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt unit, Waste Toner:
Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottle
7815 001
PCU: [K]
-
7815 002
PCU: [M]
-
7815 003
PCU: [C]
-
7815 004
PCU: [Y]
-
Clears the replacement counter and the
previous unit counter of the black PCU.
Clears the replacement counter and the
previous unit counter of the magenta PCU.
Clears the replacement counter and the
previous unit counter of the cyan PCU.
Clears the replacement counter and the
previous unit counter of the yellow PCU.
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 005
Trans Belt Unit
-
previous unit counter of the Transfer belt
unit.
7815 006
Transfer Roller 2
-
7815 007
Fusing Unit
-
Clears the replacement counter and the
previous unit counter of the Transfer Roller.
Clears the replacement counter and the
previous unit counter of the Fusing unit.
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 008
S: By-pass
-
previous unit counter of the Paper pick up
roller at by-pass.
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 009
S: Tray 1
-
previous unit counter of the Paper pick up
roller at tray 1.
G190
5-188
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 010
S: Tray 2
-
previous unit counter of the Paper pick up
roller at tray 2.
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 011
S: Tray 3
-
previous unit counter of the Paper pick up
roller at tray 3.
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 012
S: Tray 4
-
previous unit counter of the Paper pick up
roller at tray 4.
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 029
Toner: [K]
-
previous unit counter of the black toner
bottle
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 030
Toner: [M]
-
previous unit counter of the magenta toner
bottle
Clears the replacement counter and the
Toner: [C]
-
previous unit counter of the cyan toner
Service
Tables
7815 031
bottle
Clears the replacement counter and the
7815 032
Toner: [Y]
-
previous unit counter of the yellow toner
bottle
All
7817
[Rep Cnter Reset] Replacement Counter Reset
7817 100
All Clear
SM
-
Clears the all replacement and the
7815 100
-
previous unit counters.
Clears the all adjustment counters.
5-189
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7832
[Display-Self-Diag] Display Self-Diagnostic Result
Displays the result of the diagnostics. To
7832 001
Display-Self-Diag
-
scroll the return codes, press the up-arrow
key or the down-arrow key.
7834
[Cov. Counter] Coverage Counter
7834 255
All Clear
7836
[Resident Memory]
7836 001
G190
-
Clears the all coverage counters.
-
Shows the total storage size.
5-190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Rep. Count. Disp] Replacement Counter Display
7853
(Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt unit, Waste Toner:
Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottle
7853 002
PCU: [K]
*EGB
7853 003
PCU: [M]
*EGB
7853 004
PCU: [C]
*EGB
7853 005
PCU: [Y]
*EGB
7853 009
Trans Belt Unit
*EGB
7853 010
Transfer Roller 2
*EGB
7853 011
Fusing Unit
*EGB
7853 012
S: By-pass
*EGB
7853 013
S: Tray 1
*EGB
7853 014
S: Tray 2
*EGB
7853 015
S: Tray 3
*EGB
7853 016
S: Tray 4
*EGB
7853 028
Waste Toner
*EGB
Displays the replacement counter for each
unit.
SM
Service
Tables
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-191
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.
Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
ƒ
[A] 5 % (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
ƒ
[B] 20 % (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
ƒ
The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].
7855
The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each
coverage range are displayed with the following SPs.
ƒ
Color1 counter: SP8601-021
ƒ
Color2 counter: SP8601-022
ƒ
Color3 counter: SP8601-023
7855 001
Coverage Range 1
*CTL
[1 to 200 / 5 /1]
7805 002
Coverage Range 2
*CTL
[1 to 200 / 20 /1]
7901
[Assert Info]
7901 001
File Name
*CTL
7901 002
Number of Lines
*CTL
7901 003
Location
*CTL
Records the location where a problem is
detected in the program. The data stored in
this SP is used for problem analysis.
G190
5-192
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[PM Counter-PREV] Previous Preventive Maintenance Counter Display
7906
(Sheets or Rotation (%),Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit, T.
Roll 2: Transfer Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner
Bottles
7906 001
S: PCU: [K]
*EGB
7906 002
S: PCU: [M]
*EGB
7906 003
S: PCU: [C]
*EGB
7906 004
S: PCU: [Y]
*EGB
7906 008
S: Trans Belt Unit
*EGB
7906 009
S: T. Roll 2
*EGB
7906 010
S: Fusing Unit
*EGB
7906 011
R: PCU: [K]
*EGB
7906 012
R: PCU: [M]
*EGB
7906 013
R: PCU: [C]
*EGB
7906 014
R: PCU: [Y]
*EGB
7906 018
R: Trans Belt Unit
*EGB
7906 019
R: Paper Trans
*EGB
7906 020
R: Fusing Unit
*EGB
7906 026
Toner Supply: [K]
*EGB
7906 027
Toner Supply: [M]
*EGB
7906 028
Toner Supply: [C]
*EGB
7906 029
Toner Supply: [Y]
*EGB
7906 030
R%: PCU: [K]
*EGB
7906 031
R%: PCU: [M]
*EGB
Displays the number of sheets printed with
the previous maintenance units.
Displays the number of revolutions for each
unit in the previous maintenance units.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
SM
Displays the toner supply time for each
color in the previous toner bottles.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the value given by the following
formula:
5-193
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7906 032
R%: PCU: [C]
*EGB
7906 033
R%: PCU: [Y]
*EGB
7906 034
R%: Trans Belt Unit
*EGB
7906 035
R%: T. Roll 2
*EGB
7906 036
R%: Fusing Unit
*EGB
7906 037
S: By-pass
*EGB
7906 038
S: Tray 1
*EGB
7906 039
S: Tray 2
*EGB
7906 040
S: Tray 3
*EGB
7906 041
S: Tray 4
*EGB
(Current count / Yield count) x 100, where
“Current count” is the current values in the
counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the
recommended yield.
[0 to 999 / 0 / 1%/step]
Displays the number of sheets fed with the
previous maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7931
[Toner Info [K]] Toner Bottle Information [K]
(R: Replacement or E: End)
7931 001
Model ID
*EGB
7931 002
Cartridge Ver
*EGB
7931 003
Brand ID
*EGB
7931 004
Area ID
*EGB
7931 005
Production ID
*EGB
7931 006
Color ID
*EGB
7931 007
Maintenance ID
*EGB
7931 008
New
*EGB
7931 009
Recycle Count
*EGB
7931 010
Prod. Date
*EGB
7931 011
Serial No.
*EGB
G190
Displays the information number for each
category.
5-194
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Displays the remaining toner rate.
7931 012
Remaining Toner
*EGB
7931 013
Toner End
*EGB
Displays the toner end record.
7931 014
Refill Flag
*EGB
Displays the refilling record.
7931 015
R: Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the total number of sheets when
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w
7931 016
R: Color Counter
*EGB
mode or the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7931 017
E: Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the total number of sheets when
detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or
7931 018
E: Color Counter
*EGB
the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Near End
*EGB
7931 020
Install Date
*EGB
7931 021
Toner End Date
*EGB
7932
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the date of the install the toner
bottle.
Displays the date of the toner end.
[Toner Info [M]] Toner Bottle Information [M]
(R: Replacement or E: End)
7932 001
Model ID
*EGB
7932 002
Cartridge Ver
*EGB
7932 003
Brand ID
*EGB
7932 004
Area ID
*EGB
7932 005
Production ID
*EGB
7932 006
Color ID
*EGB
7932 007
Maintenance ID
*EGB
SM
Displays the toner near end record.
Service
Tables
7931 019
Displays the information number for each
category.
5-195
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7932 008
New
*EGB
7932 009
Recycle Count
*EGB
7932 010
Prod. Date
*EGB
7932 011
Serial No.
*EGB
7932 012
Remaining Toner
*EGB
7932 013
Toner End
*EGB
Displays the toner end record.
7932 014
Refill Flag
*EGB
Displays the refilling record.
7932 015
R: Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the total number of sheets when
Displays the remaining toner rate.
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w
7932 016
R: Color Counter
*EGB
mode or the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7932 017
E: Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the total number of sheets when
detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or
7932 018
E: Color Counter
*EGB
the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7932 019
Near End
*EGB
7932 020
Install Date
*EGB
7932 021
Toner End Date
*EGB
G190
Displays the toner near end record.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the date of the install the toner
bottle.
Displays the date of the toner end.
5-196
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7933
[Toner Info [C]] Toner Bottle Information [C]
(R: Replacement or E: End)
7933 001
Model ID
*EGB
7933 002
Cartridge Ver
*EGB
7933 003
Brand ID
*EGB
7933 004
Area ID
*EGB
7933 005
Production ID
*EGB
7933 006
Color ID
*EGB
7933 007
Maintenance ID
*EGB
7933 008
New
*EGB
7933 009
Recycle Count
*EGB
7933 010
Prod. Date
*EGB
7933 011
Serial No.
*EGB
7933 012
Remaining Toner
*EGB
7933 013
Toner End
*EGB
Displays the toner end record.
7933 014
Refill Flag
*EGB
Displays the refilling record.
7933 015
R: Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the total number of sheets when
Displays the information number for each
Service
Tables
category.
Displays the remaining toner rate.
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w
7933 016
R: Color Counter
*EGB
mode or the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7933 017
E: Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the total number of sheets when
detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or
7933 018
E: Color Counter
*EGB
the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
SM
5-197
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7933 019
Near End
*EGB
7933 020
Install Date
*EGB
7933 021
Toner End Date
*EGB
7934
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the date of the install the toner
bottle.
Displays the date of the toner end.
[Toner Info [Y]] Toner Bottle Information [Y]
(R: Replacement or E: End times)
7934 001
Model ID
*EGB
7934 002
Cartridge Ver
*EGB
7934 003
Brand ID
*EGB
7934 004
Area ID
*EGB
7934 005
Production ID
*EGB
7934 006
Color ID
*EGB
7934 007
Maintenance ID
*EGB
7934 008
New
*EGB
7934 009
Recycle Count
*EGB
7934 010
Prod. Date
*EGB
7934 011
Serial No.
*EGB
7934 012
Remaining Toner
*EGB
7934 013
Toner End
*EGB
G190
Displays the toner near end record.
Displays the information number for each
category.
Displays the remaining toner rate.
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
Displays the toner end record.
5-198
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7934 014
Refill Flag
*EGB
Displays the refilling record.
Displays the total number of sheets when
7934 015
R: Total Counter
*EGB
replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w
mode or the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7934 016
R: Color Counter
*EGB
7934 017
E: Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the total number of sheets when
detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or
7934 018
E: Color Counter
*EGB
the full color mode.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Near End
*EGB
7934 020
Install Date
*EGB
7934 021
Toner End Date
*EGB
7935
Displays the toner near end record.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the date of the install the toner
bottle.
Displays the date of the toner end.
[PM Interval] Preventive Maintenance Interval
(Sheets or Rotations, Unit)
7935 004
R: Trans. Belt
*EGB
[0 to 500.00 / 106.32 / 0.01 Km/step]
7935 005
S: Fusing
*EGB
[0 to 255 / 100 / 1 K/step]
7935 006
R: Fusing
*EGB
[0 to 200.00 / 170.54 / 0.01 Km/step]
SM
Service
Tables
7934 019
5-199
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7936
[PM Count. Reset] Preventive Maintenance Counter Reset
Resets the following SP counters.
7936 001
G190
All
ƒ
SP3251-001 to -004
ƒ
SP3303-001 to -004
ƒ
SP3821-001 to -010
ƒ
SP7931-001 to -021
ƒ
SP7932-001 to -021
ƒ
SP7933-001 to -021
ƒ
SP7934-001 to -021
ƒ
SP9001-001 to -024
ƒ
SP9001-029 to -032
ƒ
SP9001-059 to -061
ƒ
SP9001-075 to -077
ƒ
SP9901-001, 002
ƒ
SP9914-005 to -006
5-200
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7941
[TonerLog1 [K]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K]
(R: Replacement or E: End)
7941 001
S/N
*EGB
7941 002
Installed Date
*EGB
7941 003
Total Count
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the previous
bottle.
Displays the installed date of the previous
bottle.
Displays the total counter of the previous
bottle.
[TonerLog2 [K]]
S/N
*EGB
7941 005
Installed Date
*EGB
7941 006
Total Count
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the one
before the previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the one before
the previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the previous bottle.
Service
Tables
7941 004
[TonerLog3 [K]]
7941 007
S/N
*EGB
7941 008
Installed Date
*EGB
7941 009
Total Count
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the one
before the second previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the one before
the second previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the second previous bottle.
[TonerLog4 [K]]
7941 010
S/N
*EGB
7941 011
Installed Date
*EGB
SM
Displays the serial number of the third
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the third
previous bottle.
5-201
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7941 012
Total Count
*EGB
Displays the total counter of the third
previous bottle.
[TonerLog5 [K]]
Displays the serial number of the fourth
7941 013
S/N
*EGB
7941 014
Installed Date
*EGB
7941 015
Total Count
*EGB
7942
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the fourth
previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the fourth
previous bottle.
[TonerLog1 [M]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K]
(R: Replacement or E: End)
Displays the serial number of the previous
7942 001
S/N
*EGB
7942 002
Installed Date
*EGB
7942 003
Total Counter
*EGB
bottle.
Displays the installed date of the previous
bottle.
Displays the total counter of the previous
bottle.
[TonerLog2 [M]]
Displays the serial number of the one
7942 004
S/N
*EGB
7942 005
Installed Date
*EGB
7942 006
Total Counter
*EGB
before the previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the one before
the previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the previous bottle.
[TonerLog3 [M]]
7942 007
G190
S/N
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the one
before the second previous bottle.
5-202
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7942 008
Installed Date
*EGB
7942 009
Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the installed date of the one before
the second previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the second previous bottle.
[TonerLog4 [M]]
7942 010
S/N
*EGB
7942 011
Installed Date
*EGB
7942 012
Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the third
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the third
previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the third
previous bottle.
[TonerLog5 [M]]
S/N
*EGB
7942 014
Installed Date
*EGB
7942 015
Total Count
*EGB
7943
Displays the serial number of the fourth
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the fourth
Service
Tables
7942 013
previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the fourth
previous bottle.
[TonerLog1 [C]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K]
(R: Replacement or E: End)
7943 001
S/N
*EGB
7943 002
Installed Date
*EGB
7943 003
Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the previous
bottle.
Displays the installed date of the previous
bottle.
Displays the total counter of the previous
bottle.
[TonerLog2 [C]]
SM
5-203
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Displays the serial number of the one
7943 004
S/N
*EGB
7943 005
Installed Date
*EGB
7943 006
Total Counter
*EGB
before the previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the one before
the previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the previous bottle.
[TonerLog3 [C]]
Displays the serial number of the one
7943 007
S/N
*EGB
7943 008
Installed Date
*EGB
7943 009
Total Counter
*EGB
before the second previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the one before
the second previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the second previous bottle.
[TonerLog4 [C]]
Displays the serial number of the third
7943 010
S/N
*EGB
7943 011
Installed Date
*EGB
7943 012
Total Counter
*EGB
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the third
previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the third
previous bottle.
[TonerLog5 [C]]
Displays the serial number of the fourth
7943 013
S/N
*EGB
7943 014
Installed Date
*EGB
7943 015
Total Count
*EGB
G190
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the fourth
previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the fourth
previous bottle.
5-204
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
7944
[TonerLog1 [Y]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K]
(R: Replacement or E: End)
7944 001
S/N
*EGB
7944 002
Installed Date
*EGB
7944 003
Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the previous
bottle.
Displays the installed date of the previous
bottle.
Displays the total counter of the previous
bottle.
[TonerLog2 [Y]]
S/N
*EGB
7944 005
Installed Date
*EGB
7944 006
Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the one
before the previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the one before
the previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the previous bottle.
Service
Tables
7944 004
[TonerLog3 [Y]]
7944 007
S/N
*EGB
7944 008
Installed Date
*EGB
7944 009
Total Counter
*EGB
Displays the serial number of the one
before the second previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the one before
the second previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the one before
the second previous bottle.
[TonerLog4 [Y]]
7944 010
S/N
*EGB
7944 011
Installed Date
*EGB
7944 012
Total Counter
*EGB
SM
Displays the serial number of the third
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the third
previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the third
5-205
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
previous bottle.
[TonerLog5 [Y]]
Displays the serial number of the fourth
7944 013
S/N
*EGB
7944 014
Installed Date
*EGB
7944 015
Total Count
*EGB
G190
previous bottle.
Displays the installed date of the fourth
previous bottle.
Displays the total counter of the fourth
previous bottle.
5-206
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)
The counters in Data Log 2 are commonly used in multiple machines. Data Log 2 includes
the counters of the functions or units that are not supported by Model G-P1a and P1b. The
counters in Data Log 2 are cleared by SP5-801 (Memory Clear) or SP7-808 (Counter
Reset).
Keys and abbreviations in Data Log 2
Program-related keys and abbreviations
T:
The grand total of the counters of all application programs
The counter of the printer application program excluding the events related
P:
to the document server
The counter of other application programs including remote application
O:
programs
[T: Total Jobs]
*CTL
8004
[P: Total Jobs]
*CTL
Total jobs
Service
Tables
8001
The number of times the application program starts a job
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
ƒ
The jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted.
ƒ
The jobs executed by SPs are not counted.
8021
[T: Pjob/LS]
*CTL
8024
[P: Pjob/LS]
*CTL
8027
[O: Pjob/LS]
*CTL
Print job
/ Local storage; document server
The number of times the application program stores data on the document
server
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
SM
5-207
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
ƒ
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm
2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
8031
[T: Pjob/DesApl]
*CTL
8034
[P: Pjob/DesApl
*CTL
8037
[O: Pjob/DesApl]
*CTL
Print job/ Designated application program
The number of times the application program retrieves data from the
document server
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
ƒ
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the counter of
the application program that executes the print job increases.
8061
[T: FIN Jobs]
*CTL
8064
[P: FIN Jobs]
*CTL
8067
[O: FIN Jobs]
*CTL
Finish, post-print processing jobs
The number of times the application program uses the finisher
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
001
Sort
002
Stack
003
Staple
The number of times the application program starts
the sort mode
The number of times the application program starts
the stack mode
The number of times the application program starts
the staple mode
The number of times the application program starts
the booklet mode
004
Booklet
ƒ
The counter of the staple mode (003) can
also increase.
G190
5-208
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
The number of times the application program starts
005
the Z-fold mode
Z-Fold
ƒ
The booklet mode is not included.
The number of times the application program starts
the punch mode
006
Punch
ƒ
The counter of the printer application
program (P:) can also increase.
007
Other
(Reserved)
8071
[T: Jobs/PGS]
*CTL
8074
[P: Jobs/PGS]
*CTL
8077
[O: Jobs/PGS]
*CTL
Jobs/ Pages
The number of jobs that try to output a specific number of pages
-001
1 Page
-008
21 to 50 Pages
-002
2 Pages
-009
51 to 100 Pages
-003
3 Pages
-010
101 to 300 Pages
-004
4 Pages
-011
301 to 500 Pages
-005
5 Pages
-012
501 to 700 Pages
-006
6 to 10 Pages
-013
701 to 1000 Pages
-007
11 to 20 Pages
-014
1001 to Pages
ƒ
The jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted.
ƒ
If a job is suspended and restarted later, the job is seen as one job.
SM
5-209
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8381
[T: Total PrtPGS]
*CTL
8384
[P: Total PrtPGS]
*CTL
8387
[O: Total PrtPGS]
*CTL
Total print pages
The number of sheets that the application program tries to print (excluding the
pages printed in the SP mode)
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The following pages are not counted as printed pages:
ƒ
Blank pages in a duplex printing job
ƒ
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets
ƒ
Reports printed to confirm counts
ƒ
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports,
etc.)
ƒ
Test prints for machine image adjustment
ƒ
Error notification reports
ƒ
Partially printed pages as the result of a printer jam
8391
[LSize PrtPGS]
The number of sheets printed on A3/DLT
Large size print pages
*CTL
and larger sizes
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8411
[Prints/Duplex]
The number of sheets used in duplex
Prints/Duplex
*CTL
printing
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
ƒ
The counter increases by +1 when both sides (front/back) are printed. The counter
does not increase when one of the two sides is not printed (e.g., the last page of the
documents that have three pages, five pages, seven pages, and so on).
G190
5-210
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8421
8424
8427
[T: PrtPGS/Dup
*CTL
Comb]
[P: PrtPGS/Dup
Print pages/ Duplex printing combine
*CTL
Comb]
[O: PrtPGS/Dup
Comb]
*CTL
The number of sheets used in binding and combining
001
Simplex> Duplex
*CTL
004
Simplex Combine
*CTL
005
Duplex Combine
*CTL
006
2>
*CTL
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
007
4>
*CTL
4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
008
6>
*CTL
6 pages on 1 side (6-Up)
009
8>
*CTL
8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)
010
9>
*CTL
9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
011
16>
*CTL
16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
012
Booklet
*CTL
013
Magazine
*CTL
ƒ
Service
Tables
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These counters are useful for the users who want to know how much paper they have
saved.
ƒ
Partially printed sheets are also counted as 1 page (e.g, the last page in the 4-Up
mode is only partially printed when the documents have 5, 6, or 7 pages, 9, 10, or 11
pages, 13, 14, or 15 pages, and so on.).
ƒ
SM
Here is a summary of how the counters work in the booklet and magazine modes.
5-211
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Booklet
Magazine
Original Pages
Count
Original Pages
Count
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
4
2
4
2
5
3
5
4
6
4
6
4
7
4
7
4
8
4
8
4
8431
[T: PrtPGS/ImgEdt]
*CTL
8434
[P: PrtPGS/ImgEdt]
*CTL
8437
[O: PrtPGS/ImgEdt]
*CTL
Print pages/ Image editing performed on
the original with the copier GUI
The number of pages that the application program handles in a specific way
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The number of cover sheets or slip sheets
inserted
001
Cover/Slip Sheet
*CTL
ƒ
A duplex-printed cover is counted
as two.
002
Series/Book
*CTL
The number of pages printed in series (one
side) or in the booklet mode
The number of pages where stamps were
003
User Stamp
*CTL
applied (including page numbering and
date stamping)
G190
5-212
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8441
[T: PrtPGS/Ppr Size]
*CTL
8444
[P: PrtPGS/Ppr Size]
*CTL
8447
[O: PrtPGS/Ppr Size]
*CTL
Print pages/ Paper size
The number of sheets of a specific paper size that the application program
uses
001
A3
007
LG
002
A4
008
LT
003
A5
009
HLT
004
B4
010
Full Bleed
005
B5
254
Other (Standard)
006
DLT
255
Other (Custom)
Service
Tables
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
8451
[PrtPGS/Ppr Tray]
*CTL
Print pages/ Paper tray
The number of sheets fed from a specific tray
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8451 001
Bypass Tray
*CTL
By-pass Tray
8451 002
Tray 1
*CTL
Printer
8451 003
Tray 2
*CTL
Paper Tray Unit/LCT (Optional)
8451 004
Tray 3
*CTL
Paper Tray Unit (Optional)
8451 005
Tray 4
*CTL
(Not used)
8451 006
Tray 5
*CTL
(Not used)
8451 007
Tray 6
*CTL
(Not used)
SM
5-213
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8451 008
Tray 7
*CTL
(Not used)
8451 009
Tray 8
*CTL
(Not used)
8451 010
Tray 9
*CTL
(Not used)
8461
[T: PrtPGS/Ppr Type]
*CTL
8464
[P: PrtPGS/Ppr Type]
*CTL
Print pages/ Paper type
The number of sheets of specific paper types
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
ƒ
001
Normal
005
Normal (Back)
002
Recycled
006
Thick (Back)
003
Special
007
OHP
004
Thick
008
Other
These counters increase when the paper is output. On the other hand, the PM counter
increases (to measure the service life of each feed roller) when the paper is fed.
ƒ
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
ƒ
During duplex printing, a sheet printed on two sides and a sheet printed on one side
are both counted as 1.
8471
*CTL
[PrtPGS/Mag]
Print pages/ Magnification
The number of pages magnified or reduced
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8471 001
ƒ
to 49%
8471 002
50% to 99%
8471 003
100%
8471 004
101% to 200%
8471 005
201%
to
Some application programs (on the computer) can specify the magnification setting of
G190
5-214
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
the printer driver (e.g., MS Excel). In a case like this, SP8-471 recognizes the setting
and increases the corresponding counter. Other application programs can magnify or
reduce the print images on their own. In a case like this, SP8-471 does not recognize
the magnification setting of the application programs and increase the counter of
100%.
ƒ
Magnification adjustment conducted on the document server is not counted.
ƒ
Blank cover sheets and slip sheets are regarded as 100%.
8481
[T: PrtPGS/TonSave]
*CTL
8484
[P: PrtPGS/TonSave]
*CTL
Print pages/ Toner save
The number of pages printed with the toner save feature activated
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These counters display the same result.
8501
8504
8507
[T: PrtPGS/Col Mode] *CTL
Service
Tables
ƒ
Print pages/ Color mode
[P: PrtPGS/Col
*CTL
Mode]
[O: PrtPGS/Col
Mode]
The number of pages printed in a specific color mode
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
001
B/W
004
Single Color
002
Single Color
005
Two Color
003
Full Color
8511
[T: PrtPGS/Emul]
*CTL
8514
[P: PrtPGS/Emul]
*CTL
SM
Print pages/ Emulation
5-215
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
The number of pages printed by the printer emulation mode
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
ƒ
001
RPCS
008
RTIFF
002
RPDL
009
PDF
003
PS3
010
PCL5e/5c
004
R98
011
PCL XL
005
R16
012
IPDL-C
006
GL/GL2
013
BM-Links (for local models only)
007
R55
014
Other
These counters display the same result.
8521
[T: PrtPGS/FIN]
*CTL
8524
[P: PrtPGS/FIN]
*CTL
Print pages/ Finish post-print processing
The number of pages processed by the finisher
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
ƒ
001
Sort
005
Z-Fold
002
Stack
006
Punch
003
Staple
007
Other
004
Booklet
Even if the pages are too many for the finisher to staple, all pages are counted
(including unstapled pages).
ƒ
The counter of stapling (003) increases by +1 when the paper is transported from the
printer to the tray of the finisher. Even if a paper jam occurs on this path, the counter
(003) increases. If the same job is retried, the counter (003) increases once again.
G190
5-216
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8531
[Staples]
*CTL
Staples
*CTL
Total counter
The number of staples
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8581
[T: Counter]
The number of outputs in a specific color mode
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Total
010
Total: Color
002
Total: Full Colo
011
Total: B/W
003
B&W/Single Color
012
Full Colour: A3
004
Development: CMY
013
Full Colour: B4
005
Development: K
014
Full Colour Print
008
Print: Color
015
Mono Colour Print
009
Print: B/W
8584
Service
Tables
001
*CTL
[P: Counter]
Print counter
The number of outputs in a specific color mode
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8584 001
B/W
8584 004
Single Color
8584 002
Mono Color
8584 005
Two Color
8584 003
Full Color
SM
5-217
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8591
*CTL
[O: Counter]
Other counter
The number of A3/DLT, duplex printing, or staples
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8591 001
ƒ
A3/DLT
8591 002
Duplex
Note that these counters are not for the printer application program.
8601
*CTL
[CvgCounter]
The coverage rate of B/W printing or Color printing/ The number of prints out
in B/W printing or Color printing
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8601 001
Cvg: BW %
8601 021
CvgCounter 1
8601 002
Cvg: FC %
8601 022
CvgCounter 2
8601 011
Cvg: BW Pages
8601 023
CvgCounter 3
8601 012
Cvg: FC Pages
8771
[Dev Counter]
*CTL
Development counter
The number of rotations of the development rollers
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8771 001
Total
8771 004
M
8771 002
K
8771 005
C
8771 003
Y
G190
5-218
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8781
[TonerBotolInfo] Toner Bottle Information
8781 001
Last [BK]
*EGB
8781 002
Last [Y]
*EGB
8781 003
Last [M]
*EGB
8781 004
Last [C]
*EGB
8801
[Toner Remain]
*CTL
8801 001
K
*CTL
8801 001
Y
*CTL
8801 001
M
*CTL
8801 001
C
*CTL
already replaced
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Toner remain
The percentage of the remaining toner
[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
[Cvr Cnt: 0-10%] Coverage Counter
Service
Tables
8851
The number of toner bottles (bottles)
(Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] (*EGB)
8851 011
0 - 2%: BK
8851 031
5 - 7%: Bk
8851 012
0 - 2%: Y
8851 032
5 - 7%: Y
8851 013
0 - 2%: M
8851 033
5 - 7%: M
8851 014
0 - 2%: C
8851 034
5 - 7%: C
8851 021
3 - 4%: BK
8851 041
8 - 10%: Bk
8851 022
3 - 4%: Y
8851 042
8 - 10%: Y
8851 023
3 - 4%: M
8851 043
8 - 10%: M
8851 024
3 - 4%: C
8851 044
8 - 10%: C
SM
5-219
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8861
8871
8881
ƒ
[Cvr Cnt: 11-20%] Coverage Counter
(Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets
[Cvr Cnt: 21-30%] Coverage Counter
(Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets
[Cvr Cnt: 31%-] Coverage Counter
(Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets
001
[K]
*EGB
002
[Y]
*EGB
003
[M]
*EGB
004
[C]
*EGB
The number of printed sheets of a specific
coverage ratio
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
For example, SP8-851-001 displays the number of printed sheets whose
black-coverage ratio is 0 percent through 10 percent. SP8-881-004 displays the
number of scanned sheets whose cyan-coverage ratio is 31 percent or higher.
8891
[Page/Toner Bottle]
(Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets
8891 001
[K]
*EGB
8891 002
[Y]
*EGB
8891 003
[M]
*EGB
8891 004
[C]
*EGB
G190
The number of printed sheets
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-220
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
8901
[Page/Ink Prev1]
8901 001
[K]
*EGB
8901 002
[Y]
*EGB
8901 003
[M]
*EGB
8901 004
[C]
*EGB
8911
[Page/Ink Prev2]
8911 001
[K]
*EGB
8911 002
[Y]
*EGB
8911 003
[M]
*EGB
8911 004
[C]
*EGB
8921
[Cvr Cnt/Total]
*CTL
8921 001
Coverage (%): Bk
*CTL
8921 002
Coverage (%): Y
*CTL
8921 003
Coverage (%): M
*CTL
8921 004
Coverage (%): C
*CTL
8921 011
Coverage/P: Bk
*CTL
8921 012
Coverage/P: Y
*CTL
8921 013
Coverage/P: M
*CTL
8921 014
Coverage/P: C
*CTL
SM
The number of printed sheets with the
previously replaced units
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The number of printed sheets with the units
that was replaced before the previous unit.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
Coverage Counter Total
The amount of total coverage rate and
printouts in each coverage rate
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-221
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Machine Status]
8941
*CTL
Machine status
The amount of time the machine spends in a specific mode
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The engine is operating. The counter does
8941 001
Operation Time
*CTL
not include the time when the data is being
saved in the HDD (while engine is not
operating).
The engine is not operating. The counter
includes the time when the data is being
8941 002
Standby Time
*CTL
saved in the HDD. The counter does not
include the time when the machine is n the
Energy Saver Mode, the Low Power Mode,
or the Off Mode.
The machine is in the Energy Saver Mode.
8941 003
Energy Save Time
*CTL
The counter includes the time when the
background printing is being executed.
The machine is in the Low Power Mode.
The counter includes the time when the
8941 004
Low Power Time
*CTL
engine is on in the Energy Saver Mode. The
counter also includes the time when the
background printing is being executed.
G190
5-222
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
The machine is in the Off Mode. The
counter includes the time when the
8941 005
Off Mode Time
*CTL
background printing is being executed. The
counter does not include the time when the
main power switch is off.
SC
*CTL
The total downtime caused by SC codes
8941 007
PrtJam
*CTL
The total downtime caused by paper jams
8941 008
OrgJam
*CTL
The total downtime caused by original jams
8941 009
Supply PM Unit E
*CTL
The total downtime caused by toner ends
8999
[AdminCounter]
*CTL
Coverage Counter Total
8999 001
Total
*CTL
8999 006
Printer: FC
*CTL
8999 007
Printer: FC
*CTL
8999 008
Printer: OneC
*CTL
8999 009
Printer: TwoC
*CTL
8999 013
Duplex
*CTL
8999 014
Cvg:FC %
*CTL
8999 015
Cvg:BW %
*CTL
8999 016
Cvg:FC Pges
8999 017
Cvg:BW Pages
SM
Service
Tables
8941 006
Displays the administrator counter in the
UP mode.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-223
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP9-XXX
9001
[Shutter Motor]
9001 064
Open Time
*EGB
9001 065
Close Time
*EGB
Adjusts the open shutter time.
[0 to 990 / 210 / 10 ms/step]
Adjusts the closed shutter time.
[0 to 990 / 100 / 10 ms/step]
[Filming Remov.] Filming Removal
Adjusts the threshold for filming removal.
9001 074
Interval: [k]
*EGB
This SP is executed even the print job is
proceeding.
[0 to 65535 / 150 / 1/step]
[Vb: LS] Vb at Low Process Speed
9001 083
Vb Shift
*EGB
[0 to 65535 / 10 / 1/step]
[Vc: LS] Vc at Low Process Speed
9001 084
Vc Shift
*EGB
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
[Filming Remov.] Filming Removal: Job end
Displays the counter that counts the
number of sheets in black and white
9001 099
Interval (E): [K]
*EGB
printing mode from previous filming
removal.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
G190
5-224
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Displays the counter that counts the
9001 100
Interval (E): [FC]
*EGB
number of sheets in full color printing mode
from previous filming removal.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Adjusts the threshold for job end filming
9001 101
Interval: [end]
*EGB
removal. This SP is not executed until the
print job has ended.
[0 to 65535 / 75 / 1/step]
9001 102
Vk Coef.
[0.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 /step]
9001 103
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
Displays the paper jam counter of the
9001 104
Fusing JAM Cnt
fusing unit.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
[Time Adjust.] Time Adjustment
Service
Tables
9003
Adjusts the current year, month, date, hour, and minute.
9003 001
Year
-
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 y/step]
9003 002
Month
-
[1 to 12 / 1 / 1 m/step]
9003 003
Date
-
[1 to 31 / 1 / 1 d/step]
9003 004
Hour
-
[0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step]
9003 005
Minute
-
[0 to 59 / 0 / 1 m/step]
SM
5-225
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
[Gamma] Gamma Table
9903
(Process Speed, [Color]) RS: Regular Speed, LS: Low Speed
Adjusts the gamma table lists for each mode.
9903 028
OHP: K3
*EGB
9903 031
OHP: M3
*EGB
9903 034
OHP: C3
*EGB
9903 037
OHP: Y3
*EGB
9906
[0 to 31 / 7 / 1/step]
[Vpp]
Adjusts the AC charge bias correction for each environment.
9906 001
Vpp1: LL
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 1950 / 1 V/step]
9906 002
Vpp2: LL
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 2200 / 1 V/step]
9906 003
Vpp1: ML
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 1780 / 1 V/step]
9906 004
Vpp2: ML
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 2030 / 1 V/step]
9906 005
Vpp1: MM
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 1770 / 1 V/step]
9906 006
Vpp2: MM
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 2020 / 1 V/step]
9906 007
Vpp1: MH
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 1810 / 1 V/step]
9906 008
Vpp2: MH
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 2060 / 1 V/step]
9906 009
Vpp1: HH
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 1770 / 1 V/step]
9906 010
Vpp2: HH
*EGB
[0 to 3000 / 2020 / 1 V/step]
G190
5-226
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
9908
[Background Po.] Background Potential
Adjusts the upper or lower threshold for disabling the charge bias.
9908 001
Upper Limit
*EGB
9908 002
Lower Limit
*EGB
9910
[Factory Adj.]
9910 001
Charge Output
*EGB
Performs the charge output.
9910 003
[All] TC Initial
*EGB
Performs the toner supply for all colors.
9910 004
[All] TC Initial
*EGB
9910 005
[K] TC Initial
*EGB
9910 006
[M] TC Initial
*EGB
9910 007
[C] TC Initial
*EGB
9910 008
[Y] TC Initial
*EGB
9910 010
[K] Toner FillUP
*EGB
Fills up the black toner.
9910 011
[M] Toner FillUP
*EGB
Fills up the magenta toner.
9910 012
[C] Toner FillUP
*EGB
Fills up the cyan toner.
9910 013
[Y] Toner FillUP
*EGB
Fills up the yellow toner.
SM
[0 to 300 / 130 / 1/step]
Performs the developer initializing for all
colors.
Performs the developer initializing for black.
Performs the developer initializing for
Performs the developer initializing for cyan.
Performs the developer initializing for
yellow.
5-227
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
magenta.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
Specifies the threshold for completing the
9910 020
Upper Limit
*EGB
toner filled up. When the toner is detected
three times, the filling up the toner ends.
[0 to 5/ 3 / 1 /step]
Selects the Vsg adjustment execution when
the line position adjustment is manually
done.
9910 021
MUSIC Vsg Adj.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
*EGB
1: Normal (ON except the line position
adjustment at printout interval)
2: Always ON
3: Always OFF
9911
[TC Initial]
Adjusts the maximum toner cartridge
9911 001
Maximum Repeat
*EGB
initializing time.
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the threshold for toner cartridge
9911 002
Threshold
*EGB
initializing.
[1 to 100 / 20 / 0.01 V/step]
9912
[ST Sensor]
9912 001
read
9914
*EGB
Adjusts the Vcnt. DFU
[Waste Toner NF] Waste Toner Near Full
Specifies the number of sheets to be printed after waste toner near full.
9914 001
Print 1
*EGB
[0 to 5000 / 1250 / 1/step]
9914 002
Print 2
*EGB
[0 to 5000 / 250 / 1/step]
G190
5-228
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
9914 003
Print 3
*EGB
[0 to 5000 / 125 / 1/step]
Specifies the number of sheets to be
9914 004
Print 4
*EGB
printed after replacing the waste toner
bottle.
[0 to 5000 / 2500 / 1/step]
9914 005
Detection Times
*EGB
Displays the times of waste toner near full.
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the total counter for waste toner
9914 006
Near Full Count.
*EGB
near full.
[0 to 100000 / 0 / 1 /step]
[LD Pow. Change] LDB Power Change
9918 001
9923
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Not execute, 1: Execute
[Vt ShiftAdj Mode]
Service
Tables
9918
These SP's measure the Vt values at regular speed or low speed. DFU
9923 001
Vt ShiftAdj Mode
*EGB
9923 002
[K]Vt Shift
*EGB
9923 003
[M]Vt Shift
*EGB
9923 004
[C]Vt Shift
*EGB
9923 005
[Y]Vt Shift
*EGB
9923 006
[K]Vt Normal Speed
*EGB
9923 007
[M]Vt Normal Speed
*EGB
9923 008
[C]Vt Normal Speed
*EGB
9923 009
[Y]Vt Normal Speed
*EGB
SM
5-229
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
9923 010
[K]Vt Half Speed
*EGB
9923 011
[M]Vt Half Speed
*EGB
9923 012
[C]Vt Half Speed
*EGB
9923 013
[Y]Vt Half Speed
*EGB
9923 014
Agitate Time: STD
*EGB
9923 015
Agitate Time: HALF
*EGB
9924
[ACS Setting]
Turns on or off the ASC.
9923 001
ON/OFF
*EGB
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Specifies the threshold of changing mode
9923 002
Switching
*EGB
from color to BW when ACS is set to "0:
OFF" with SP9923-001.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sheet/step:
G190
5-230
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5.2.3 INPUT CHECK TABLE
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Result
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
SP5-803
-XXX
001
Bit
Reading
Description
0
1
Input Check 1
Not used
0
1
002
003
Color OPC Motor
Black OPC/ Development
Motor
Locked
Not locked
Locked
Not locked
2
Color Development Motor
Locked
Not locked
3
Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor
Locked
Not locked
4
Registration Sensor
Paper detected
5
Paper Exit Sensor
6
Interlock Switch 5V
Open
Close
7
Top Cover Sensor
Close
Open
Paper not
detected
Service
Tables
Input Check 2
Paper not
detected
Paper detected
Input Check 3
Not used
SM
5-231
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP5-803
-XXX
Bit
Description
Reading
Input Check 4
004
0-3
Not used
-
-
4
Polygon Motor Fan
Locked
Not locked
5
6
7
005
Color Drum Gear Position
Sensor
Activated
(Actuator inside
Deactivated
sensor)
Black Drum Gear Position
Sensor
Activated
(Actuator inside
Deactivated
sensor)
Interlock Switch 24V
Opened
Closed
Input Check 5
Not used
006
Input Check 6
Not used
011
G190
Input Check 11
0
Paper Size Sensor 1
Pushed
Not Pushed
1
Paper Size Sensor 2
Pushed
Not Pushed
2
Paper Size Sensor 3
Pushed
Not Pushed
3
Paper Size Sensor 4
Pushed
Not Pushed
4
Paper Width Sensor
Pushed
Not Pushed
5
Paper Height Sensor 1
Pushed
Not Pushed
6
Paper Height Sensor 2
Pushed
Not Pushed
5-232
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP5-803
-XXX
Bit
7
Description
Reading
Paper End Sensor
Not End
End
Input Check 12
Transfer Belt Contact Sensor
Not Contact
Contact
1
Transfer Roller Contact Sensor Not Contact
Contact
2
Duplex Jam Sensor 1
Paper detected
3
Duplex Jam Sensor 1
Paper detected
4
Fusing New Unit Sensor
New
Old
5
Fusing Unit Set Sensor P1
Set
Not Set
6
Fusing Unit Set Sensor P2
Set
Not Set
7
Not Used
-
-
Not overflow
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Service
Tables
012
0
Input Check 13
0
Paper Overflow Sensor
Overflow
1
Fusing Exit Sensor
Paper detected
2
Inverter Sensor
Paper detected
3
Fusing Unit Fan
Locked
Not locked
4
PSU Fan
Locked
Not locked
5
Drive Unit Fan
Locked
Not locked
6
Paper Exit Fan
Locked
Not locked
7
Not used
013
SM
5-233
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP5-803
-XXX
Bit
Description
Reading
Input Check 14
014
0
Toner End Sensor [Y]
End
Not end
1
Toner End Sensor [C]
End
Not end
2
Toner End Sensor [M]
End
Not end
3
Toner End Sensor [K]
End
Not end
4
New PCU Detection [Y]
New
Old
5
New PCU Detection [C]
New
Old
6
New PCU Detection [M]
New
Old
7
New PCU Detection [K]
New
Old
Input Check 15
015
G190
0
LDU Shutter Sensor
Close
Open
1
Left Cover Sensor
Close
Open
2
Waste Toner Overflow Sensor
Not overflow
Overflow
3
By-pass Paper Detection
Paper detected
Sensor
4
By-pass Paper Size Sensor 1
Not used
5
By-pass Paper Size Sensor 2
Not used
6
By-pass Paper Size Sensor 3
Not used
7
By-pass Paper Size Sensor 4
Not used
5-234
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper not
detected
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP5-803
-XXX
Bit
Description
Reading
Input Check 16
016
0-2
Not used
-
3
Fusing Entrance Sensor
Paper detected
4
5-7
Transfer Belt New Unit
Detection
Not used
Paper not
detected
New
Old
-
-
Input Check 17
0-4
Not used
-
-
5
Front Door Sensor
Close
Open
6-7
Not used
-
-
Pushed
Not Pushed
Pushed
Not Pushed
Not end
Service
Tables
017
Input Check 20
0
1
Tray 2 Paper Near End Sensor
1
Tray 2 Paper Near End Sensor
2
2
Tray 2 Paper End Sensor
End
3
Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor
Paper detected
4
Tray 2 Paper Size 4
Pushed
Not Pushed
5
Tray 2 Paper Size 3
Pushed
Not Pushed
6
Tray 2 Paper Size 2
Pushed
Not Pushed
7
Tray 2 Paper Size 1
Pushed
Not Pushed
020
SM
5-235
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper not
detected
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
SP5-803
-XXX
Bit
Description
Reading
Input Check 21
0
1
Tray 3 Paper Near End Sensor
1
Tray 3 Paper Near End Sensor
2
Pushed
Not Pushed
Pushed
Not Pushed
Not end
2
Tray 3 Paper End Sensor
End
3
Tray 3 Paper Feed Sensor
Paper detected
4
Tray 3 Paper Size 4
Pushed
Not Pushed
5
Tray 3 Paper Size 3
Pushed
Not Pushed
6
Tray 3 Paper Size 2
Pushed
Not Pushed
7
Tray 3 Paper Size 1
Pushed
Not Pushed
021
G190
5-236
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper not
detected
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5804
[Output Check]
5804 001
Fusing Fan H
Fusing Unit Fan: High speed
5804 002
Fusing Fan L
Fusing Unit Fan: Low speed
5804 003
PSU Fan
PSU Fan
5804 005
Polygon Fan
Polygon Motor Fan
5804 007
PSU Inner Fan
PSU Inner Fan
5804 008
Drive Fan
Drive Unit Fan
5804 009
Exit Paper Fan H
Paper Exit Fan: High speed
5804 010
Polyg. Mir. Motor
Polygon Mirror Motor
5804 011
Exit Paper Fan L
Paper Exit Fan: Low speed
5804 012
Duplex Fan
Duplex Motor
5804 020
Paper Feed Motor
Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor
5804 022
Mono. PCU Motor
Black OPC/ Development Motor
5804 024
Color PCU Motor
Color OPC Motor
5804 026
Color Dev. Motor
Color Development Motor
5804 030
[Y] Toner Motor
Toner Supply Motor [Y]
5804 031
[C] Toner Motor
Toner Supply Motor [C]
5804 032
[M] Toner Motor
Toner Supply Motor [M]
5804 033
[K] Toner Motor
Toner Supply Motor [K]
5804 034
T. Belt Contact M
Transfer Belt Contact Motor
5804 035
T. Roll 2 Contact M
Transfer Roller Contact Motor
5804 036
LDU Shutter Motor
LDU Shutter Motor
SM
5-237
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
5.2.4 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Table
5804 040
Trans. Belt Motor
Transfer Belt Unit Motor
5804 042
Duplex In Motor
Inverter Motor
5804 044
Duplex Exit Motor
Duplex Motor
5804 060
Paper Feed Clutch
Paper Feed Clutch
5804 061
Relay Clutch
Relay Transport Clutch
5804 062
Regist. Clutch
Registration Clutch
5804 063
Develop. Clutch
Development Clutch
5804 064
By-pass Solenoid
By-pass Solenoid
5804 065
Duplex Solenoid
Junction Gate Solenoid
5804 100
[Y]: Charge DC
Charge Roller DC: Yellow PCU
5804 102
[C]: Charge DC
Charge Roller DC: Cyan PCU
5804 104
[M]: Charge DC
Charge Roller DC: Magenta PCU
5804 106
[K]: Charge DC
Charge Roller DC: Black PCU
5804 110
[Y]: Charge AC
Charge Roller AC: Yellow PCU
5804 112
[C]: Charge AC
Charge Roller AC: Cyan PCU
5804 114
[M]: Charge AC
Charge Roller AC: Magenta PCU
5804 116
[K]: Charge AC
Charge Roller AC: Black PCU
5804 118
Charge AC Trigger
Charge Roller AC Trigger
5804 120
[Y]: Develop. DC
Development DC: Yellow
5804 122
[C]: Develop. DC
Development DC: Cyan
5804 124
[M]: Develop. DC
Development DC: Magenta
5804 126
[K]: Develop. DC
Development DC: Black
5804 130
[Y]: Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt Bias: Yellow
G190
5-238
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
5804 132
[C]: Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt Bias: Cyan
5804 134
[M]: Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt Bias: Magenta
5804 136
[K]: Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt Bias: Black
5804 140
T. Roll 2 Posi.
Transfer Roller: Positive Voltage
5804 142
T. Roll 2 Nega.
Transfer Roller: Negative Voltage
5804 200
[Y]: TD. Sensor Vcnt
TD Sensor Vcnt: Yellow
5804 201
[C]: TD. Sensor Vcnt
TD Sensor Vcnt: Cyan
5804 202
[M]: TD. Sensor Vcnt
TD Sensor Vcnt: Magenta
5804 203
[K]: TD. Sensor Vcnt
TD Sensor Vcnt: Black
5804 204
ID. Sensor LED
ID Sensor LED
5804 205
Toner End Sensor
Toner End Sensor
5804 210
ID. Sensor Left
ID. Sensor Left
5804 211
ID. Sensor Center
ID. Sensor Center
5804 212
ID. Sensor Right
ID. Sensor Right
5804 220
Color PCL
Color PCL
5804 221
Mono. PCL
Monochrome PCL
5804 230
PFU 1 Motor
Optional paper tray unit 1 Motor
5804 231
PFU 1 Clutch
Optional paper tray unit 1 Clutch
5804 240
PFU 2 Motor
Optional paper tray unit 2 Motor
5804 241
PFU 2 Clutch
Optional paper tray unit 2 Clutch
SM
5-239
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
Service Mode Table
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE
To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware
downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2
on the left side of the controller box.
5.3.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE
There are 12 types of firmware as shown below.
Type of firmware
Location of
Function
firmware
Engine
Printer engine control
System
Operating system
System
Net File
Feature application
NetworkDocBox
Printer
Feature application
Printer
NIB
Network Interface
WebSystem
Web Service application
FONT
EGB Flash ROM
Message shown
Controller flash
ROM
Page description
Engine
Network Support
Web Support
PS3 Font
language (PostScript3)
FONT1
Font
Fonr
DESS
Security control
Security Module
PictBridge
PictBridge control
G190
PictBridge SD
card
5-240
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Option PctBrgd
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
5.3.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you
handle SD cards:
ƒ
Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card
into the slot with the power on.
ƒ
Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
ƒ
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
ƒ
Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high
humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
ƒ
Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD
card get exposed to shock or vibration.
ƒ
Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an
application to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
ƒ
“Upload” means to send data from the machine to the SD card. “Download” means to
ƒ
To select an item on the LCD, press the appropriate key on the operation panel.
ƒ
Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for
arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update
procedure.
5.3.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE
File Arrangement
How the Program Works:
The firmware-update program for this machine searches the folder romdata for necessary
firmware. When you save the firmware in an SD card, make the folder ‘romdata’. You must
not make the folder ‘romdata’ in another folder.
ƒ
Do not make another firmware-update program folder in the folder ‘romdata’.
ƒ
Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction for the firmware updating. You just keep
only one firmware update program folder in the folder ‘romdata’.
The firmware program contains the file information. Before downloading the firmware from
an SD card, the firmware-update program reads the file information. The firmware is
downloaded only when the file information is correct.
SM
5-241
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
send data from the SD card to the machine.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
ƒ
The file information can identify the firmware, but this information does not
guarantee that the data is not corrupted.
When you save the firmware, we recommend that you arrange folders and files as follows:
ƒ
In the folder romdata, make only one folder and use this folder for one model. Use the
machine code as the name of this folder.
ƒ
When you save some files other than firmware, make a new folder outside romdata.
Save the files in this folder. Do not save any file outside the folders. (The diagram
shows an example. Three folders, log, nvramdata, and prt, are outside romdata. These
folders can store debug logs, NVRAM data, and captured files respectively.)
Update Procedure
1.
Turn off the main power switch.
2.
Disconnect the printer from the network.
3.
Remove the slot cover from slot 2 ( x 1).
ƒ
Do not use slot 1. Slot 1 is for customer use.
4.
Turn the SD card face to the rear side of the printer, and insert it into slot 2.
5.
Slowly push the SD card into the slot until it clicks.
6.
Make sure that the SD card is locked in place.
ƒ
To remove the SD card, push it in until it clicks, and release it slowly. The slot
pushes out the SD card.
7.
Turn on the main power switch.
G190
5-242
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
8.
Wait until a firmware name is shown on the display (about 1 minute).
ƒ
The firmware name is read from inside the firmware. The firmware name is not
changed even if you change the file name on your PC.
9.
If the necessary firmware name is shown on the display, check the firmware version
with the left-arrow or right-arrow keys. Pressing the left or right-arrow key shows a
firmware name, firmware version and serial number in order.
10. To use a different firmware, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key to find the
necessary firmware.
ƒ
Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the
same time. It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
11. To select the firmware, push the OK key. Make sure that the selected firmware is
high-lighted.
12. If you update more than one firmware program at the same time, find each of them and
select each of them. Make sure that the selected firmware is high-lighted.
ƒ
If the customer has used all of the slots, you have to keep an empty slot for
13. To start firmware update, push the "UpDate" key. While each firmware is downloaded,
the underscores on the operation panel are replaced by stars.
14. Wait until the message “Update done” is shown.
15. Turn off the main power switch.
16. Remove the SD card from the slot 2.
17. Attach the slot cover to the SD card slot 2 ( x 1).
18. Connect the printer to the network physically.
19. Turn on the main power switch.
20. Print the Configuration Page to check that the every firmware is correctly updated:
Menu > List/Test Print > Config. Page
Error Handling
An error code is shown if an error occurs during the download. Error codes have the letter
“E” and a number. If an error occurs, the firmware is not correctly downloaded; see the
error code table ( Handling Firmware Update Errors) and do the necessary steps. After
this, download the firmware again.
Power Failure
If firmware update is interrupted by power failure, the firmware is not correctly downloaded.
SM
5-243
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
this procedure. Ask the customer to temporarily remove the SD card in slot 2.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
In this condition, machine operation is not guaranteed. You have to download the firmware
again.
G190
5-244
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
5.3.4 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
ƒ
Turn off the main power switch before you insert or remove an SD card. Make sure
that the controller and the EGB are correctly connected.
Uploading NVRAM Data
Copy the data from the NVRAM to an SD card (referred to as “to upload NVRAM data” in
this section) before you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot upload NVRAM data, manually
input the necessary settings referring to the factory settings sheet stored inside the front
door of the mainframe after replacing the NVRAM.
1.
Prepare a formatted SD card.
2.
Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
3.
Start the SP mode.
4.
Select SP5990-001 (ALL (Data List)).
5.
Do the SP.
6.
See if the SMC Report is correctly output.
ƒ
You may need the SMC Report when the machine did not complete an
7.
Go out of the SP mode.
8.
Turn off the main power switch.
9.
Insert an SD card into SD card slot 2.
Service
Tables
NVRAM data upload or download ( "Downloading NVRAM Data") correctly.
10. Turn on the main power switch.
11. Start the SP mode.
12. Select SP5-824-001(NVRAM Upload).
13. Push the "OK" key. The upload starts.
ƒ
When uploading ends correctly, the following file is made:
NVRAM¥serial_number.NV where “NVRAM” is the folder name in the SD card and
“serial_number.NV” is the file name with the extension “.NV”. The serial number of
the printer is used as the file name. For example, if the serial number is G1330017,
the file name is “G1330017.NV”.
14. Go out of the SP mode.
15. Turn off the main power switch.
16. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
17. Install the SD slot cover to SD card slot 2.
18. Mark the SD card with, for example, the machine code. You need this SD card when
SM
5-245
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
you download NVRAM data ( "Downloading NVRAM Data").
ƒ
One SD card can store the NVRAM data from two or more machines.
Downloading NVRAM Data
Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (referred to as “to download NVRAM data”
in this section) after you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot download NVRAM data,
manually input the necessary settings referring to the factory settings sheet stored inside
the front door of the mainframe.
1.
Make sure that the main power switch is off. If it is on, turn it off.
2.
Make sure that you have the correct SD card that contains the necessary NVRAM
data.
3.
Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2.
4.
Turn on the main power switch.
5.
Start the SP mode.
6.
Select SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Download).
7.
Push the "OK" key. The download starts.
ƒ
The machine cannot do the download if the file name in the SD card is
different from the serial number of the printer ( "Uploading NVRAM Data").
8.
Go out of the SP mode.
9.
Turn off the main power switch.
10. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
11. Install the SD slot cover on SD card slot 2.
12. Turn on the main power switch.
13. Check that the NVRAM data is correctly downloaded.
ƒ
G190
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
ƒ
Total Count
ƒ
Serial Number
5-246
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
5.3.5 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
Download
1.
Prepare a formatted SD card.
2.
Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
3.
Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
4.
Remove the SD slot cover from SD card slot 2 at the left rear side
of the machine ( x 1).
5.
Install the SD card into SD card slot 2 (for service use).
6.
Turn on the main power switch.
7.
Enter the SP mode.
8.
Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9.
Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
10. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
11. Install the SD slot cover on SD card slot 2.
ƒ
If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an
error message is displayed.
ƒ
Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it
Service
Tables
back to your location.
Upload
1.
Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
2.
Remove the SD slot cover from SD card slot 2 at the left rear side
of the machine ( x 1).
3.
Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2.
4.
Turn on the main power switch.
5.
Enter the SP mode.
6.
Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7.
Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
8.
Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
9.
Install the SD slot cover on SD card slot 2.
SM
5-247
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
ƒ
The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.
ƒ
The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor
uploaded.
ƒ
If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error
message is displayed.
G190
5-248
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
5.3.6 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error
code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example).
Error Message Table
Code
20
Cannot map logical address
21
Cannot access memory
23
24
30
31
32
33
34
Solution
Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
HDD connection incorrect or replace hard
disks.
Cannot decompress
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card or data is
compressed data
corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM
Controller program abnormal. If the second
update program started
attempt fails, replace controller board.
SD card access error
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use
another SD card.
Service
Tables
22
SM
Meaning
No HDD available for stamp data HDD connection incorrect or replace hard
download
disks.
Data incorrect for continuous
download
Insert the SD card with the remaining data
required for the download, the re-start the
procedure.
Data incorrect after download
interrupted
Execute the recovery procedure for the
intended module download, then repeat the
installation procedure.
Incorrect SD card version
Module mismatch - Correct
module is not on the SD card)
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the
correct data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.)
then install again.
5-249
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Firmware Update
35
36
Module mismatch – Module on
SD card is not for this machine
Cannot write module – Cause
other than E34, E35
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the
SD card is for another machine. Acquire
correct update data then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the
SD card is for another machine. Acquire
correct update data then install again.
Replace the update data for the module on
40
Engine module download failed
the SD card and try again, or replace the
EGB board.
42
43
44
50
G190
Operation panel module
download failed
the SD card and try again, or replace the
LCDC.
Stamp data module download
failed
Replace the update data for the module on
the SD card and try again, or replace the hard
disks.
Controller module download
failed
Replace the update data for the module on
the SD card and tray again, or replace
controller board.
Electronic confirmation check
failed
Replace the update data for the module on
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the
SD card is for another machine. Acquire
correct update data then install again.
5-250
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Controller Self-Diagnostics
5.4 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.4.1 OVERVIEW
There are two types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
1.
Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just
after the power has been turned on.
2.
SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during
operation.
Service
Tables
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
SM
5-251
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Using the Debug Log
5.5 USING THE DEBUG LOG
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to
save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this
information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
ƒ
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for
later retrieval.
ƒ
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved
automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then ask the user
to reproduce the problem.
5.5.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG
The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function has been
switched on and a target has been selected.
1.
Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
ƒ
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
1.
Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, select “1” with the # or % key.
2.
On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press "OK" key. This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
ƒ
The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for
the debug information to be saved.
3.
Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under “5857
Save Debug Log”, select “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel key with the #
or % key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press "OK".
ƒ
Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is
inserted in the service slot.
4.
Now select “SP5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log.
SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
G190
5-252
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Using the Debug Log
1
Engine SC Error
2
Controller SC Error
3
Any SC Error
4
Jam
Saves data when an engine-related SC code
is generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related
SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you
specify by entering code number.
Saves data for jams.
ƒ
More than one event can be selected.
ƒ
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
ƒ
Push the # or % key to select the appropriate items(s). Press the “OK” key
for each selection. This example shows “Engine SC Error” selected.
ƒ
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code
ƒ
Push the # or % key to select “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code
entry for SC670.
ƒ
For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Chpater 4.
“Troubleshooting”.
5.
Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information.
Select “SP5859”.
Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number with the # or % key. Then press"OK".
ƒ
Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses
indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
SM
5-253
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
number with the # or % key. Then press"OK" key. This example shows an
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Using the Debug Log
Key No.
Printer
1
2222 (SCS)
2
14000 (SRM)
3
256 (IMH)
4
1000 (ECS)
5
1025 (MCS)
6
4400 (GPS)
7
4500 (PDL)
8
4600 (GPS-PM)
9
2000 (NCS)
10
2224 (BCU)
ƒ
The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).
Key to Acronyms
G190
5-254
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Using the Debug Log
Acronym
Meaning
Acronym
Meaning
ECS
Engine Control Service
NFA
Net File Application
GPS
GW Print Service
PDL
Printer Design Language
PTS
Print Server
System Control Service
GSP-PM
GW Print Service – Print
Module
IMH
Image Memory Handler
SCS
MCS
Memory Control Service
SRM
NCS
Network Control Service
WebDB
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the
target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected with SP5858 and the
Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
ƒ
The initial settings are all zero.
ƒ
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that
key.
ƒ
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding
4-digit numbers from the table.
ƒ
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited
to 4 MB.
SM
5-255
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
memory modules selected with SP5859.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Using the Debug Log
5.5.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD
Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1.
Insert the SD card into the service slot of the printer.
2.
Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)) to
write the debugging data to the SD card.
3.
Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.
G190
5-256
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Using the Debug Log
5.5.3 DEBUG LOG CODES
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly
from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in
the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from
one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data. Unique file names are
created for the data during the copy operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name.
This means that log data from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC
card. This command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a completely
empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key number and other
non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the HDD when
the first log is stored on the HDD (it takes some time to complete this operation). This
creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be
created completely. If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly
With the file already created on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded.
A new log file does not need to be created. To create a new log file, do SP5857-011 to
delete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a completely
empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key number and other
non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the SD card
when the first log is stored on the SD card (it takes some time to complete this operation).
This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can
be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will
greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the
SD card. With the file already created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to
be recorded; a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, do
SP5857-012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card. Then do SP5857-017.
SM
5-257
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Service
Tables
reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DIP Switches
5.6 DIP SWITCHES
5.6.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch settings.
DIP SW No.
Default
1
ON
2
3
OFF
4
G190
5-258
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Overview
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6.1 OVERVIEW
1. Toner bottle [Y]
2. Toner bottle [C]
3. Toner bottle [M]
4. Toner bottle [K]
5. Transfer Belt Unit
6. Fusing Unit
7. Duplex Unit
8. ID sensor
9. By-pass Feed Table
SM
Detailed
Descriptions
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
10. Transfer roller
11. PCU (Photo Conductor Unit)
12. Development Unit
13. Standard tray
14. PSU (Power Supply Unit)
15. Polygon Mirror Motor
16. LDU
17. Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit
6-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Overview
6.1.2 PAPER PATH
[A]: Duplex Unit
[B]: By-pass Feed Table
[C]: 1 Tray Paper Feed Unit, 2 Tray Paper Feed Unit
[D]: Standard tray
[E]: Standard Paper Exit Tray
G190
6-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Overview
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1.
Black OPC/ Development Motor:
This controls the black OPC and development unit for black.
2.
Color OPC Motor:
This controls the OPCs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
3.
Color Development Motor:
4.
Detailed
Descriptions
This controls the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow).
Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor:
This controls the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/by-pass tray), fusing unit, paper,
registration roller, transport relay roller and paper exit roller.
5.
Transfer Belt Unit Motor:
This controls the transfer belt unit and the transfer roller.
6.
Duplex Motor:
This controls the duplex exit, relay and exit rollers.
7.
Inverter Motor:
This controls the inverter roller.
SM
6-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Overview
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE
The EGB (Engine Board) controls machine functions along with the CTL (Controller). The
IOB (In/Out Board) controls input/output, drivers and input/output connections. The IOB is
part of the EGB expansion board.
One of the following options can be installed in the I/F slot: (IEEE1284, IEEE802.11a/g, g,
Bluetooth, and Gigabit Ethernet).
The controller connects to the EGB through the PCI Bus (Peripheral Component
Interconnect Bus).
1.
EGB (Engine Board):
This controls the Engine, the controller interface, image processing, MUSIC (Mirror
Unit for Skew and Interval Correction), and input/output. MUSIC is also called
Automatic Line Position Adjustment).
2.
IOB (Input/Output Board):
This controls input/output, and the interfaces with the optional units, and the operation
panel.
3.
Controller:
G190
6-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Overview
The controller board controls the following functions:
4.
ƒ
SD card (Option/Service)
ƒ
Memory DIMM
ƒ
IEEE1284
ƒ
IEEE802.11a/g
ƒ
IEEE802.11g
ƒ
Bluetooth
ƒ
Gigabit Ethernet
ƒ
NVRAM
ƒ
HDD
ƒ
PictBridge
LD Drive Board:
This is the laser diode drive circuit board.
5.
HDD Unit (Option):
The HDD unit stores data for the following.
6.
ƒ
Additional software fonts
ƒ
Collation
ƒ
Locked print
ƒ
Sample print
ƒ
Downloaded forms for form overlay
Memory DIMM (Resident: 256MB DRAM, Option: 128/256MB DRAM):
This increases printer processing memory, and is also used for collation and for soft
fonts.
Operation Panel Board:
Detailed
Descriptions
7.
Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad.
8.
IEEE1284 Interface (Option):
This is a parallel printer port.
9.
USB 2.0:
Lets you connect the machine to a computer.
10. Bluetooth (Option):
Lets you connect the machine to a computer with a wireless connection.
11. IEEE802.11a/g or g wireless LAN (Option):
Lets you connect the machine to a computer with a wireless connection.
12. Gigabit Ethernet (Option):
This lets computers connect to the machine with a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
SM
6-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Overview
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS
This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams for color
printing. Each PCU contains a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and blade.
The toner image on each drum is moved to the transfer belt. The four colors are put on the
belt. All four toners are put on the belt at the same time. Then the completed four-color
image is moved to the paper.
1.
Drum charge:
The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge
2.
Laser exposure:
The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors and to the
drum. To make a latent image on the drum, the machine turns the laser beam on and
off.
3.
Development:
The development roller moves negatively-charged toner to the latent image on the
drum surface. This machine uses four development units (one for each color).
4.
Image transfer:
The charge that is applied to the transfer roller pulls the toner from the drum to the
transfer belt. Four toner images are put on the paper.
5.
Cleaning for OPC drum:
The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after image
G190
6-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Overview
transfer to the paper.
6.
Quenching for OPC drum:
Quenching is done at the end of each page with a quenching lamp (LED array) in the
PCU.
7.
Paper registration:
The registration roller controls the paper feed timing to make sure that the image
transfers to the correct location on the paper. It also removes skew.
8.
Paper Transfer and Separation:
Toner transfers from the transfer belt to the paper when the paper is fed between the
transfer belt and transfer roller. At this time, the paper also separates from the transfer
belt, because of a discharge plate immediately after the transfer roller.
9.
ID sensor:
The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (one at the left, one at the center, and
one at the right). The ID sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the
transfer belt. The ID sensor output is used for process control and for automatic
Detailed
Descriptions
line-position adjustment, skew, and color registration adjustments for the latent image.
SM
6-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has the following two forms of process control:
ƒ
Potential control
ƒ
Toner supply control
Process control uses the following components:
ƒ
Three ID (image density) sensors (left [A], center [B], and right [C]). Only the center ID
sensor is used for process control. The left, center, and right ID sensors are used for
line positioning and other adjustments.
ƒ
TD (toner density) sensor in each development unit.
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL
Overview
Potential control controls development to keep the toner images on the drums at the same
density. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and toner density.
The machine uses the ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer belt and the
density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process control self-check.
The machine measures these values from the ID sensor output and a reference table in
memory.
ƒ
VD: Drum potential without exposure – to adjust this, the machine adjusts the charge
roller voltage.
ƒ
VB: Development bias
ƒ
VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure – to adjust this, the machine adjusts the
laser power.
(Also, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.)
This controls the development potential to make sure that the maximum quantity of toner
G190
6-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
applied to the drum is constant.
If SP 3501 1 is set to "1" (Fixed), the machine does not do the potential control, but uses
the following parameters:
ƒ
Development bias adjusted with SP 2212 1 to 8
ƒ
Charge roller voltage adjusted with SP 2201 1 to 9
ƒ
Laser power selected with SP 2105 1 to 12.
These SPs are not normally adjusted in the field.
Process Control Self-check
This machine does potential control with a procedure that is known as the process control
self-check. This procedure is done at these 9 times.
1.
Initial
This starts automatically at the following times:
ƒ
Immediately after the power is turned on
ƒ
When the machine comes back from energy saver mode
ƒ
6 hours after the power was turned on (adjusted with SP 3554 1)
ƒ
If absolute humidity changes more than ± 6 g/m3 (e.g. changes from 23°C/ 50% to
27°C/ 70%). The humidity threshold can be changed with SP 3554 2.
2.
Interval: Job End
At the end of a job, process control is done after the interval of time that is set with SP
3555 1, if more than 450 prints were made after the previous process control (this
number can be adjusted with SP 3551 1 and 2).
At the end of a job, process control is done immediately, if more than 450 prints were
and 4).
The default setting of SP 3555 1 is "0". Because of this, there is no difference between
these two processes, and the 450-print setting is not used.
After process control is done (except for forced process control), the counters are reset
to “0.”
3.
Interval: Interrupt (default: 500)
If the machine makes a sequence of 500 or more color prints in the same job, printing
stops and process control is done. After it is completed, the machine continues to
make prints. The default value of 500 can be adjusted with SP 3551 5 to 6
SM
6-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
made after the previous process control (this number can be adjusted with SP 3551 3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
4.
Non-use Time (6 hours)
This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for 6 hours. If the non-use
time process control is done (N) times after the user turns on the power, it will not be
done. N is adjusted with SP 3558.
5.
Installation
This starts only when this machine turns on at first installation. The machine does this if
SP 5950 1 is set to "1" (set in the factory).
6.
After Toner End Recovery
This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.
7.
After Developer Initialization
This starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs
automatically after a new PCU is installed.
8.
After Transfer Belt Unit Initialization
This starts after a transfer belt unit initialization is done. Transfer belt unit initialization
occurs automatically after a new transfer belt unit is installed.
9.
Forced
This is done when SP 3820 1 is used.
Process Control Self-Check Procedure
Step 1: VSG Adjustment
This machine uses three ID sensors (direct-reflection type). They are located at the left,
center, and right of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used for process control.
The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt's reflectivity and the machine calibrates the ID
sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.
ƒ
VSG = 4.0 ± 0.5 Volts
This calibration adjusts for the transfer belt's condition and the ID sensor condition, for
example, dirt on the belt or ID sensor.
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation
The machine mixes the developer and then makes a gradation pattern on the transfer belt
for each toner color. The pattern has one square (the sequence is as follows: one black
square, one magenta square, one cyan square and one yellow square). Each of the
squares is 15.03 mm x 12.23 mm, and is a solid-color square. To make the squares, the
machine changes the development bias and charge roller voltage. The difference between
development bias and charge roller voltage is always the same.
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection
The ID sensor detects the densities of the one solid-color square for each color. This data
goes to memory.
G190
6-10
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation
The quantity of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is calculated
for each of the 10 gradations of the sensor pattern. To do this, the machine uses the ID
sensor output value from each gradation of the pattern.
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment
The machine makes a plot of the 10 values of M/A against the development potential that
was used to make each of the gradations. Then it makes a line through the 10 points.
Then, it finds the development potential that is necessary to put the ‘target M/A’ of toner on
the OPC.
charge roller voltage and laser power for the machine in its current condition. To do this, it
refers to a table in memory.
The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time. As a result, the
development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP 3561 1 to 4
(do not adjust in the field unless told to do this).
After that, the transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt.
SM
6-11
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
This development potential is then used to find the best values of development bias,
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
6.2.3 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL
Toner Supply Control Modes
This machine has four toner supply control modes. They are selected with SP 3301-1 to 4.
(Default: SP3301 - 4)
1.
Fixed supply mode
This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes defective. The amount of toner
supply can be adjusted with SP 3302 1 -4 if the image density is incorrect (the default
setting is 5%).
2.
Proportional control mode 1 (Pixel)
This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes defective. Only the pixel count is
used to control toner supply. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP 3306
1 to 4.
3.
Proportional control mode 2 (TD sensor)
This mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes defective. Only the TD
sensor is used to control toner supply. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted
with SP 3306 5 to 8.
4.
Hybrid control mode
This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor or the pixel count are
used in this mode.
ƒ
If the image coverage ratio is less than the value of SP 3701 2 to 5, pixel count is
used.
ƒ
If the image coverage ratio is more than the value of SP 3701 2 to 5, the TD
sensor is used.
ƒ
But, if SP 3701 1 is "off", then the TD sensor is always used. The default setting for
this SP is "off". Because of this, pixel count is not used.
The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP 3306 9 to 20.
The TD sensor is in the PCU. If the TD sensor becomes defective, the technician must
replace the PCU. But if this is not possible, the technician can change the toner supply
mode with SP 3301 1 to 4.
Low Image Coverage
After process control, toner refresh mode is done (this can be switched off with SP3721-1).
ƒ
It is only done if the percentage of pages (after the previous process control) that had
low image coverage is more than the value of SP3721-2.
ƒ
SP 3701-2 to-5 control the limits that the machine uses to detect if the image coverage
is low.
G190
6-12
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
Toner refresh mode supplies new toner, because there is old toner in the developer after
printing many pages that have low image coverage.
During toner refresh mode, the machine does the following:
1.
Mixes the developer for 5 seconds.
2.
Performs an engine free run, which simulates printing of 10 sheets of A4 size paper
with the image data (2 by 2) and normal toner supply.
3.
Mixes the developer for 10 seconds.
6.2.4 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION
Introduction
Toner Near End
ƒ
Detailed
Descriptions
To detect toner near-end the machine uses:
Pixel count (memory chip on the toner bottle)
Toner End
To detect toner end the machine uses:
ƒ
SM
Output from the toner end sensor [A]
6-13
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
Toner Near End Detection
The machine uses the pixel count.
1.
The controller counts the printed pixels. Then, it calculates the remaining toner
quantity from the record in the ID chip for each toner bottle.
2.
If the remaining toner quantity is less than 10% of a full bottle, the machine detects
toner near-end.
3.
The remaining toner quantity and “Toner near end” are recorded in the ID chip.
4.
Toner near-end is displayed.
ƒ
Toner near-end detection uses the pixel counter in the ID chip. If new toner is
added to the empty toner bottle, the contents of the ID chip are not reset, so
the toner near-end or end condition is not reset. Also, near-end detection
cannot be done.
Toner End Detection
The machine detects toner end when the toner end sensor detects toner end 3 times in a
row 3.1 seconds after toner was supplied. At this time, “Toner end” is recorded in the ID
chip.
Toner End Recovery
The machine detects that the toner bottle was replaced if one of the following events
occurs during a toner end condition:
ƒ
The top cover is opened and closed.
ƒ
The main switch is turned off and on.
The machine then starts to supply toner to the development unit. After this, the machine
resets the toner end condition.
ƒ
When “Toner near end” is detected, “Toner end recovery” is not done. If there is no
“Toner end” information in the ID chip, the machine detects that there is toner in
the toner bottle and “Toner end recovery” is done.
G190
6-14
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Process Control
6.2.5 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION
When the machine detects that a new PCU was installed, it initializes the developer.
To do this, the machine mixes the developer for a few seconds, and adjusts VCNT (control
voltage for TD sensor) to make VT (TD sensor output) equal to 2.5 ± 0.1 volts. The machine
stores this VT as VREF.
During PCU initialization, the machine automatically supplies toner because there is no
toner in the toner supply pipe at installation. Then the machine does the process control
Detailed
Descriptions
self-check.
SM
6-15
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
6.3 PAPER FEED
6.3.1 OVERVIEW
1. Paper feed roller
5. Transfer roller
2. Relay transport roller
6. Duplex relay roller
3. Registration roller
7. Duplex exit roller
4. Transfer belt drive roller
8. By-pass feed roller
The machine has a paper tray (550 sheets) and a by-pass paper feed table (100 sheets).
The paper feed mechanism uses a friction pad system.
G190
6-16
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
6.3.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE
The paper feed and fusing motor controls the paper feed roller [A], by-pass feed roller [B]
and registration roller [C] with clutches and gears. The paper feed roller and by-pass feed
roller feed a sheet of paper to the registration roller.
The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew. The
Detailed
Descriptions
paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-003-001 to -045.
SM
6-17
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
6.3.3 PAPER TRAY
Paper Lift
When the tray [A] is put in the machine, the tray arms [B] move along the guide slopes [C]
of the main frame. This makes the springs [D] lift the bottom plate. The bottom plate [E]
pushes the paper against the paper feed roller and keeps the top sheet of paper at the
correct height.
The paper pressure switch [F] adjusts the bottom plate pressure. When you use thick paper
of 75g/m2 or more, move this switch to the left.
G190
6-18
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Paper Size Detection
The paper size sensor is at the rear of the tray. This sensor has four switches. The outputs
from the switches detect the paper size, as shown in the table. The actuators are on the
side plate [A]. The side plate is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].
1
2
3
4
LG SEF
Pushed
Pushed
-
-
A4 SEF
-
Pushed
Pushed
-
LT SEF
Pushed
Pushed
Pushed
Pushed
US. EXE SEF
Pushed
-
-
-
B5 SEF
Pushed
-
-
-
A5 SEF/ HLT SEF
-
Pushed
Pushed
Pushed
A5 LEF/ HLT LEF
-
-
Pushed
Pushed
SM
6-19
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
Switch Location
Paper Size
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Paper Near End/End Detection
There are four sensors in tray 1: the two near end sensors [B] [E], the end sensor [C] and
the paper width sensor [A].
Near-end detection
Two near end sensors detect the amount of paper in the tray.
When the quantity of paper decreases, the bottom-plate-pressure lever moves up and the
actuator [F] (on the pressure-lever drive shaft) turns.
Remaining paper
Near end sensor 1 [E]
Near end sensor 2 [B]
Full ~ 450
ON
OFF
450 ~ 250
ON
ON
250 ~ 50
OFF
ON
50 ~ 0
OFF
OFF
OFF: No actuator
End detection
When the paper tray is empty, the actuator [D] goes into the end sensor. The sensor
detects paper end.
Paper width sensor
G190
6-20
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
When paper with a small width (less than A5) is put in the tray, it does not lift the actuator
[G] of the paper width sensor. Because of this, the paper width sensor detects the paper
that has a width less than A5.
6.3.4 BY-PASS TRAY FEED AND SIZE DETECTION
Paper Feed Mechanism
When the paper detection feeler [A] detects a sheet of paper, the by-pass solenoid [B]
unlocks the feed shaft stopper at the left end of the by-pass feed shaft [C].
paper support plate [F] up and down and pushes the sheets of paper against the feed roller.
Paper Size Detection Mechanism
There is no paper size detection mechanism on the by-pass tray in this printer. Paper size
on the by-pass tray can be adjusted with the operation panel or printer driver.
SM
6-21
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
The by-pass feed shaft has the feed roller [D] and two cams [E]. These cams move the
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
6.3.5 DUPLEX
1. Inverter roller
5. Duplex relay roller
2. Inverter sensor
6. Duplex jam sensor 2
3. Duplex jam sensor 1
7. Duplex exit sensor
4. Duplex entrance roller
8. Junction gate
G190
6-22
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Drive
The inverter motor [A] controls the inverter roller [B] that feeds the sheet of paper to the
The duplex motor [C] controls the duplex entrance roller [D], duplex relay roller [E] and
duplex exit roller [F] that feed the sheet of paper to the registration roller.
SM
6-23
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
duplex unit.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Interleaving
Step 1:
This duplex unit uses the interleaving mechanism. This decreases the total time of duplex
printing.
The machine prints on side [1]. Then, the first sheet of paper is fed out of the exit, but not
fully.
Then the exit roller changes direction and the paper goes to the duplex feed path. At the
same time, the second sheet of paper is fed between the transfer belt and the transfer roller,
and side [3] is printed.
G190
6-24
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Paper Feed
Step 2:
The machine prints side [3] on the second sheet of paper.
The second sheet of paper is fed to the paper exit, and into the duplex feed path. At the
same time, the first sheet of paper is fed between the transfer belt and the transfer roller,
and side [2] is printed.
The second sheet of paper immediately follows the first sheet of paper in the duplex feed
Detailed
Descriptions
path. Then side [4] is printed.
SM
6-25
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
6.4 LASER EXPOSURE
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
1. LDB unit-C
8. Synchronizing detector board-M, K-S
2. LDB unit-Y
9. Mirror
3. LDB unit-K
10. Synchronizing detector board-Y, C-S
4. LDB unit-M
11. Polygon mirror motor
5. Synchronizing detector board-M, K-E
12. Synchronizing detector board-Y, C-E
6. LD Mirror-K
13. F-theta lens-Y, C
7. F-theta lens-M, K
14. LD Mirror-Y
This machine uses four LDB units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent images
on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).
There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LDB units.
Laser exposure for yellow and cyan starts from the right side of the drum, but for magenta
and black it starts from the left side of the drum. This is because the units for yellow and
cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units for magenta and black.
G190
6-26
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
6.4.2 OPTICAL PATH
The laser beams for cyan [B] and magenta [D] are sent to the upper part of the polygon
mirror [C]. The laser beams for yellow [A] and black [E] are sent to the lower part of the
polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) reflect the laser beams for yellow
and black to the lower polygon mirror.
The mirror [F] corrects the main scan line. Without this mirror, the line bends at the middle
of the main scan. The central bend of the mirror is adjusted in the factory.
The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode (see below).
B/W
(except OHP/
Thick paper)
Color
Polygon motor
(dpi)
speed (rpm)
600 x 600
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
(except OHP/ Thick 1,200 x 600
paper)
1,200 x 1,200
Process line
speed
(mm/s)
Print speed
(ppm)
42993
182
30
42993
91
15
42993
182
30
42993
91
15
42993
91
15
Detailed
Descriptions
Mode
Resolution
600 x 600
OHP/Thick
1,200 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
SM
6-27
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
6.4.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR
Overview
The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD) as shown above. Each
pair of boards detects two colors. The machine knows each color from the time that they
are detected. The two LSDs [A] [B] are used for magenta and black, and the two [C] [D] are
used for yellow and cyan.
Main Scan Start Detection
For magenta and black, the LSD [B] detects the start of the main scan. For yellow and cyan,
the LSD [C] detects the start of the main scan. The arrows [E] [F] show the direction of the
laser scan.
G190
6-28
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
Detailed
Descriptions
6.4.4 LD SAFETY SWITCH
A safety switch turns off when the front cover or the right door is opened. As a result, the
relay on the PSU cuts off the power supply (+5V) to the four LD boards. (The electric
circuits go through the EGB and IOB.)
The LD safety switch system stops the laser beam when the cover is open.
SM
6-29
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
6.4.5 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Overview
YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color
KY, KC, KM: Spaces between a black line and a color line
During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are made eight times on
the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC, KM) are
measured by the left, center, and right ID sensors. The controller reads the average of the
spaces, and adjusts the following items:
ƒ
Sub scan line position for YCM
ƒ
Main scan line position for KYCM
ƒ
Magnification ratio for KYCM
ƒ
Skew for YCM (see the note below)
ƒ
In this procedure, only the skew for YCM is measured. If you want to adjust it, do
the main skew adjustment procedure. (See ‘Replacements and Adjustments –
Laser Optics – LD Unit’)
The transfer-belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are measured.
Summary of Each Adjustment
Sub scan line position for YCM
G190
6-30
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM uses the line position for K (color
registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the
pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct, the machine moves the
image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser write
timing for that color.
Main scan line position for KYCM
If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it
changes the laser-write-start timing for each scan line.
Magnification adjustment for KYCM
If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock
frequency for the necessary color.
Skew for YCM
The adjustment of the skew for YCM uses the line position for K.
Adjustment Conditions
If SP 2153 1 is set to "1 (ON)", then automatic line position adjustment is done at the times
shown below.
After process control is done
If SP 2153 2 is set to "1 (ON)", then the adjustment is done when the following types of
process control are successfully done.
ƒ
Initial process control
ƒ
Interval process control
ƒ
No-use time process control
If SP2153 3 is set to "1 (ON)", then the adjustment is done when the main power is turned
on or the machine comes back from the standby mode, but only if one of the following
conditions occurs.
ƒ
At a set time after the previous adjustment. The default value is 360 minutes. You can
adjust the time with SP 2153 13.
ƒ
When the temperature changes after a previous adjustment by more than a set value.
The default value is "5°C ". You can adjust the temperature change value with SP 2153
12.
Printing
If SP 2153 4 is set to "1 (ON)", then the adjustment is done when the machine gets print job
data, but only if one of the following conditions occurs.
ƒ
At a set time after the previous adjustment. The default value is 360 minutes. You can
adjust the time with SP 2153 13.
SM
6-31
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
Initialization
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
ƒ
When the temperature changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value.
The default value is "5°C". You can adjust the temperature change value with SP 2153
12.
ƒ
When the magnification changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value.
The default value is "1%". You can adjust the magnification change value with SP 2153
15.
Interrupt
If SP 2153 5 is set to "1 (Yes)", then the adjustment is done when the one of the following
conditions occurs during a print job with many pages.
ƒ
When the number of printed pages after the previous adjustment becomes more than
a set number. The number of pages includes black and color printing. The default
value is 190 pages. (If this condition occurs, automatic line position adjustment after
the next interval process control will not be cancelled.) You can adjust the default value
with SP 2153 10.
ƒ
When the temperature changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value.
The default value is "5°C". You can adjust the temperature change value with SP 2153
12.
ƒ
When the magnification changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value.
The default value is "1%". You can adjust the magnification change value with SP 2153
15.
Summary Table
The below table shows when the automatic line position adjustment is done. It also shows
the main SPs that control the timing of the adjustment. If SP 2153 1 is "Off", then the
automatic adjustment is never done. Note that the adjustments for the sub-scan line
position, main scan line position, and magnification are done at the same time.
G190
6-32
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
Disabled
(SP 2153
1)
After Process
Initialization
Printing
Interrupt
Control
(SP 2153
(SP 2153
(SP 2153
(SP 2153 2)
3)
4)
5)
ON
Remarks
On
Default
Off
On
Off
On
Off
ON
ON
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
ON
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
ON
Detailed
Descriptions
Enabled/
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
ƒ
SM
-
-
-
-
No
Adjustment
You can also do the automatic line position adjustment manually with SP 2111 1.
6-33
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Laser Exposure
Main Scan Skew Adjustment
You can adjust the mirror adjustment cam for magenta [C], cyan [B], and yellow [A] with a
screwdriver. This mechanism corrects the main scan skew. The diagram shows the effect
on line skew [D] when you turn the cam in a counterclockwise direction.
For more about this adjustment, ( LD unit).
LDU Shutter
The LD unit has a shutter. As a result, toner and other dust does not fall on the LDU glass.
The shutter motor [A] moves the shutter [B] in the direction of the arrow with the gear [C].
SC270 occurs if the output of the LDU shutter sensor [D] does not change 1 second after
the LDU shutter motor turned on.
G190
6-34
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
6.5 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
1. OPC drum
4. Cleaning blade
2. Cleaning brush
5. Cleaning brush roller
3. Waste toner collection coil
6. Charge roller
charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm
(circumference: about 94.2 mm).
The photoconductor gap between each PCU and development roller is set by the drum
positioning plate and the rear shaft. It is not adjustable in the field.
SM
6-35
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
This machine has four PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU contains an OPC drum,
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
6.5.2 DRIVE AND DRIVE GEAR POSITION SENSOR
The black OPC/development motor [F] controls the PCU for black.
The color development motor [A] controls the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow. One
motor controls these three drums to help reduce the CMY color registration errors.
Mechanism
The machine uses the drum gear position sensors to detect if the drum motors turn. SC380
occurs when it detects that the drum motor does not move. These sensors also help the
machine to initialize the positions of the gears when the main switch is turned on and at
initialization. This prevents changes between printouts in how the gears engage. This can
cause changes in copy quality.
There is an actuator on each of the black [D] and magenta [B] drum gears. The drum gear
position sensors [C][E] detect the positions of these actuators. The sensors check that the
two actuators are parallel. This mechanism makes sure that output quality does not change.
The cyan [G] and yellow [H] drum gears operate with the magenta drum gear because
these three drum gears are connected through other gears.
ƒ
In the ready condition, the two actuators are parallel. If they are not in a parallel
position, the machine adjusts the position of the black drum gear.
Initialization Process and SC Codes
When a drum gear position sensor has found an error, SC code 396 or 397 is shown. The
table shows the steps of the initialization procedure, possible errors, and corresponding SC
codes.
G190
6-36
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
Initialization process
Possible error
The black drum gear actuator
The four drums turn at the same
Step 1
is not detected.
time for seven seconds. The two
The color drum gear actuator
drum position sensors detect the
is not detected.
SC code
396
397
two drum gear interrupters
Both black and yellow drum
several times.
gear actuators are not
396
detected.
The time lags between detection
of the black drum gear interrupter
Step 2
and detection of the color drum
gear interrupter are checked. The
average time lag is calculated.
The black drum turns. The
position of the gear is adjusted for is not detected. (Refer to the
the average time difference.
ƒ
396
following note.)
If the connector of the black drum position sensor is connected to the yellow drum
position sensor (and the connector of the yellow drum position sensor is
connected to the black drum position sensor), no error occurs in step 1 and step 2.
SM
6-37
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
Step 3
The black drum gear actuator
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
6.5.3 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING
This machine uses a charge roller [A]. The charge roller gives the drum surface a negative
charge. The high voltage supply board, which is at the rear of the machine, applies a dc
and ac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to make sure that
the charge given to the drum is as constant as possible.
The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process control is
enabled (that is, if SP3-501-001 is set to 0). However, if process control is turned off, (that
is, if SP3-501-001 is set to 1), the dc voltage is the value stored in SP2-201-001 to –004 or
SP2-201-006 to -009 (do not adjust in the field unless told to do this).
The diameter of the roller is 30 mm (the circumference is about 94.2 mm).
The cleaning brush roller [B], which always touches the charge roller, cleans the charge
roller.
For quenching at the end of every job, light from the quenching lamp (LED array in the
PCU) hits the full area of the drum.
G190
6-38
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
6.5.4 DRUM CLEANING
The cleaning brush [A] makes flat the waste toner on the drum. The lubricant bar [B]
lubricates the brush. The cleaning blade [C] then removes the waste toner. The toner
Detailed
Descriptions
collection coil [D] moves the toner to the waste toner collection duct.
SM
6-39
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
6.5.5 WASTE TONER COLLECTION
The waste toner from the collection coils in the four PCUs falls into the waste-toner
collection bottle from the four openings [I][J][K][M] at the rear of the PCUs. The toner
collection coils [B][C][D][G] move this waste toner to the waste toner bottle [L].
Coils [B][C][D] are controlled by the color development motor and coil [G] is controlled by
the black OPC/development motor.
ƒ
The openings [I] to [M] are for these PCUs: black → [I], cyan → [J], magenta → [K],
yellow → [M].
The waste toner from the transfer-belt cleaning unit falls into the waste toner collection
bottle from a different opening [N]. The toner collection coil [A] moves this waste toner to
the waste toner bottle.
The waste toner collection coil [H] is controlled by the transfer roller contact motor.
The waste toner bottle has five seals (one at each entrance). These prevent scattering
waste toner.
The pin [E] at the waste toner entrance pushes the shutter spring [F] in the rear of the PCU.
Because of this, waste toner can fall into the waste toner bottle. If the left cover is open, the
waste toner does not come out from the rear of the PCUs.
G190
6-40
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
6.5.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION AND SET
DETECTION
The left cover sensor in the main frame detects when the left cover is open. It also detects if
the waste toner bottle is put in the machine. If the “Close Front/Left Cover” shows on the
LCD when the cover is closed, check if the waste toner bottle is in the machine.
The waste toner sensor [A] detects when the bottle is almost full.
When the bottle contains a set quantity of waste toner, the sensor turns off. The machine
detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full.
sheets, it shows “Replace Waste Toner bottle” and after the end of the job, the printer
cannot be used until the bottle is replaced or emptied.
ƒ
The number of sheets is calculated for a paper size of A4 and an image coverage
ratio for each color of 5%.
SM
6-41
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
After that, the machine can print approximately 1250 more sheets. After printing 1250
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Photoconductor Unit
6.5.7 PCU DETECTION (DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION)
Unit Set Detection Pins
Each PCU has a connector [A]. The machine uses this to detect if the PCUs and
development units are in the machine. Each PCU is detected through this connector when
the drum positioning plate is closed.
New Unit Detection
Each PCU also has a circular hook [B]. The machine uses this to detect when a new PCU
is installed.
On a new unit, the hook holds up the terminal [C]. This hook turns the switch on, and the
machine detects that the unit is new.
When the unit operates for the first time, the hook turns and releases the terminal and the
switch turns off. The hook cannot pick up the terminal again. Because of this, the machine
detects that this PCU is not new.
Error Message
When the machine cannot detect a PCU, it outputs the first message, “Reset PCU
Correctly,” and the second message, “Xxxxx”; where “Xxxxx” is a color, for example
“Magenta”.
The operation panel shows the first message and then shows the second message, and
then back to the first. Each message is shown for 3 seconds.
If two or more PCUs are not detected, the second message shows those colors, for
example “Yellow/Cyan” and “Yellow/Magenta Black.
G190
6-42
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
6.6 DEVELOPMENT
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
1. Doctor blade
4. TD sensor
2. Developer hopper
5. Mixing coil (right)
3. Mixing coil (left)
6. Development roller
This machine has four development units, one for each color. The developer in each unit is
supplied to the development roller by the two mixing coils. Electrostatic attraction moves
Detailed
Descriptions
the developer to the surface of the roller.
The drum positioning plate and the rear shaft set the photoconductor gap between the
PCU and development roller. It is not adjustable in the field.
The TD sensor detects toner density. Each development unit has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (the circumference is approximately 56.5
mm).
SM
6-43
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
6.6.2 DRIVE
The black development motor [A] drives the development roller and the photoconductor for
black through gears and the development clutch [B].
The color development motor [C] drives the development unit for magenta, cyan, and
yellow through gears.
The machine only contains one development clutch, and it is only used for black.
6.6.3 DEVELOPER MIXING
The toner is supplied from the hopper [A]. Two mixing coils [B and C] move the developer
G190
6-44
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
forward and rearward to mix the developer.
This occurs at these times:
ƒ
Immediately after a new PCU is installed.
ƒ
During the process control self check
ƒ
During toner supply
ƒ
During development.
ƒ
Every 36 hours (can be changed with SP 3554 003)
ƒ
If absolute humidity changes more than ± 6 g/m3 (e.g. 23°C/ 50% ­ 27°C/ 70%). The
humidity threshold can be changed with SP 3554 004.
6.6.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
The high voltage supply board #2 supplies development bias to the development roller
through the receptacle at the rear of each development unit.
There are ac and dc bias voltages. The ac bias improves toner transfer to the drum.
The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control is enabled.
However, if process control is turned off, (that is, if SP3-501-001 is set to 1), the dc bias is
Detailed
Descriptions
the value stored in SP2212-001 to –009 (do not adjust in the field unless told to do this).
SM
6-45
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Development
6.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM
Overview
This machine uses four toner bottles [A]. Each bottle has a spiral groove [B] in it. The toner
supply motor [F] turns the toner bottle (each bottle has a separate motor).
When the toner supply drive-mechanism starts, the toner bottles turn and the groove
moves toner to the mouth of the bottle. Here, toner spills into a hopper [C]. Mylar blades
turn and move the toner to an opening in the side of the hopper and the toner falls into the
development unit [D]. The quantity of toner that is added is controlled by the length of time
that the toner supply mechanism turns.
Toner Near End Detection:
Toner end sensors [E] detect toner end conditions ( Toner near end/toner end detection).
Toner Bottle Detection:
Each toner bottle is detected by connection to the ID chip connector [G].
G190
6-46
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
6.7 IMAGE TRANSFER
6.7.1 OVERVIEW
2. Belt transfer roller
3. Transfer belt drive roller
4. Transfer roller
5. Belt entrance roller
6. Transfer belt tension roller
7. Cleaning blade
8. Toner collection coil
9. Cleaning brush
The toner is moved from the four OPC drums to the transfer belt. For a full color print, all
four colors are moved from the PCUs to the transfer belt at the same time.
The transfer roller then moves the four-colour toner image from the transfer belt to the
paper.
SM
6-47
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
1. Transfer belt
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
6.7.2 TRANSFER UNIT DETECTION AND NEW UNIT
DETECTION
Transfer belt unit detection:
The transfer belt unit is detected when the connector [A] is connected.
The transfer belt rotation sensor [B] detects when the transfer belt entrance roller turns. It
also detects the belt speed. To do this, it monitors the black and white stripes on the shaft.
If the sensor detects that the rotation speed is out of specification, the machine shows
SC443.
Changes in temperature have an effect on the transfer belt drive roller. This can cause
changes in belt speed. Color registration errors occur if belt speed is not constant. The
rotation sensor detects the speed change and the machine keeps the transfer belt speed
constant. You can enable or disable this belt speed correction with SP 2153 8.
New transfer belt unit detection:
The transfer belt rotation sensor has a fuse when the transfer belt unit is new. The fuse is
blown when the machine is turned on. At this time, it is detected as a new unit.
G190
6-48
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
6.7.3 DRIVE AND TRANSFER BELT ROLLER VOLTAGE
The transfer belt motor [A] controls the transfer belt drive roller [B]. The belt tension roller
[C] adds tension to the transfer belt to help to turn this belt. The speed of transfer belt drive
is set by the process line speed.
The belt transfer rollers [D] are charged from the terminal plates to move the toner from the
Detailed
Descriptions
PCUs to the transfer belt.
SM
6-49
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
Transfer belt contact
The transfer belt does not touch the color PCUs (cyan, magenta and yellow) when the
machine makes a black and white print.
The transfer belt contact motor [A] turns the CMY contact cam shaft [B] when the machine
starts to make a color print. The CMY contact cam lifts the belt transfer roller unit for CMY
[C] to the transfer belt. Because of this mechanism, the life of the transfer belt is longer (it is
not necessary for the transfer belt to touch the color PCUs when the machine makes a
black and white print).
The transfer belt contact sensor [D] detects if the transfer roller unit for CMY touches the
transfer belt. If it does not touch the transfer belt during color printing, the machine stops
and shows SC 442.
G190
6-50
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
[A]: Cleaning brush
[D]: Transfer belt cleaning blade
[B]: Seal
[E]: Toner collection coil
[C]: Transfer belt drive roller
[F]: Pressure spring
The transfer belt cleaning blade [A] removes remaining toner from the transfer belt to
prevent “ghosting” on the next print. This blade is included in the blade holder. The
pressure spring applies pressure to the center of the blade holder. This blade gets constant
pressure because of the pressure spring [F].
The toner collection coil [E] moves the remaining toner to the waste toner bottle from its
opening [G].
SM
6-51
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
Transfer Belt Cleaning
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
6.7.4 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
[A]: Transfer roller
[E]: Belt transfer roller
[B]: Registration roller
[F]: Transfer belt drive roller
[C]: Transfer belt
[G]: Discharge plate
[D]: OPC
Transfer from the belt:
The belt transfer roller [E] is given a positive voltage, and this pulls the toner from OPC [D]
to the transfer belt.
After all four layers of toner are transferred to the transfer belt [C], the registration roller [B]
turns on and feeds the paper to the transfer roller [A]. Paper feed is timed to align the
leading edge of the toner image on the belt at 4 mm from the leading edge of the paper.
The paper moves at the same speed as the transfer belt.
Image transfer:
Charged with a negative voltage, the transfer belt drive roller [F] pushes out the toner from
the transfer belt to the paper. This voltage is automatically corrected for the ambient
temperature and humidity, print speed, and paper type.
To clean the transfer roller, positive and negative voltages are applied to this roller to pull
toner particles from the transfer roller to the belt. The belt-cleaning mechanism then
removes this toner from the belt.
G190
6-52
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
Discharge
The discharge plate [A] removes remaining voltage from the printed paper. This is given a
positive voltage. As a result, the voltage is cancelled and paper separation from the transfer
Detailed
Descriptions
belt occurs.
SM
6-53
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Image Transfer
Transfer Roller Contact
The transfer roller [A] is kept away from the transfer belt during the machine ready
condition.
When printing starts, the transfer roller contact motor [B] turns the cam shaft [C]. This shaft
has two cams [D] and an actuator [E]. The two cams push the transfer roller contact levers
and these push the transfer roller against the transfer belt. The actuator turns on the
transfer roller contact sensor [F] when the cam shaft turns. Then, the machine detects that
the transfer roller touches the transfer belt.
G190
6-54
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
6.8 FUSING
6.8.1 OVERVIEW
2. Cleaning roller
3. Pressure lever
4. Pressure roller
5. Hot roller
6. Fusing belt
ƒ
7. Heating roller
8. Heating lamp
9. New fusing unit detection fuse
10. Thermistor
11. Thermostat
A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a standard hot and
pressure roller system.
ƒ
The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing belt
quickly.
ƒ
The hot roller is made of sponge, which becomes a little flat, and this increases the
fusing nip. This roller does not contain a heating lamp.
ƒ
The heating roller thermistor controls the temperature of the lamp.
ƒ
Each new fusing unit contains a fuse. A short time after a new fusing unit is installed,
this fuse blows. When this occurs, the machine detects that a new fusing unit is
installed.
SM
6-55
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
1. Fusing tension roller
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
6.8.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Overall Procedure
The machine starts to warm up the fusing unit to get the print ready condition. When the
heating roller temperature gets to the idling ready temperature [A], the idling procedure
starts to warm up the heating roller. The temperature becomes higher than the machine
ready temperature [B] and gets to the print ready temperature [C] after the heating roller
completes the idling.
The temperature increases to the target printing temperature. Then printing starts. If the
temperature does not get to the target printing temperature before 30 seconds (SP 1104
22), printing starts.
The temperature increases to the first print temperature [G] when the first sheet of paper is
printed, but this is only for the first page.
After the printing job, the machine turns the heating roller to prevent overheating [F]. You
can adjust the fusing temperature settings.
Fusing Roller Idling
This is done at the following three times:
1.
Immediately after the power is turned on, or when the machine comes back from
energy saver mode, if the fusing unit temperature is less than 100ºC.
ƒ
This is [E] on the diagram.
ƒ
This idling keeps the heating roller warmed up equally while it is heated. This
temperature is controlled with SP 1912 5, and the durations of fusing idling are
controlled with SP 1912 6, and 8 to 14
ƒ
2.
You can also adjust this with SP 1912 2 and SP 1105 43
At the end of a job: [F]
ƒ
G190
This prevents the heating roller’s overheating. After printing, the machine turns the
6-56
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
heating roller with no heating. You can adjust the setting with SP 1912 7
3.
At intervals of 4 hours if the machine is not used for a long time
ƒ
This prevents the deformation of the hot roller and pressure roller.
ƒ
Controlled by SP 1912 3 (interval) and 4 (duration)
ƒ
Enable/disable this idling feature: SP 1912 1
For fusing idling at the start of a job, the duration and the fusing unit temperature during
idling are also corrected for ambient temperature. SP 1917 controls all the corrections. The
temperature/humidity sensor measures the room temperature. Corrections are made at the
following times:
ƒ
Room temperature is below 18ºC (L threshold, controlled by SP 1917 8)
ƒ
Room temperature is above 30ºC (H threshold, controlled by SP 1917 7)
Idling Ready Temperature before First Print Job: [A]
This is the idling ready temperature for the heating roller before the first print job. You can
adjust the setting with SP 1912 5. The default is 100°C. If the heating roller temperature
does not reach this temperature within 15 seconds after the heating lamp turns on, SC 542
occurs.
Machine Ready Temperature: [B]
You can adjust the setting with SP 1913 2. The default is 150°C.
Print ready temperature: [C]
You can adjust the setting with SP 1105 22. The default is 160°C.
Target Printing Temperature: [D]
temperature. The default is “10°C".
First Print Temperature: [G]
When the machine prints the first page, the heating roller temperature can easily decrease.
If necessary, you can increase the temperature for the first page. This is a good adjustment
for cold environments.
If fusing is not sufficient for the first page of a job, adjust these SPs:
ƒ
Temperature increase for the first page of a job: SP 1104 25 This value is added to the
target printing temperature. The default is "8°C ".
ƒ
Duration for application of the temperature increase: SP 1104 26
ƒ
The increase is applied if the interval between jobs is greater than these values:
SM
ƒ
OHP, Thick paper, or 1200 x 1200 dpi: SP 1104 24
ƒ
Other types of job: SP 1104 27
6-57
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
This is adjusted by the value stored in SP 1104 23. This value is added to the print ready
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
Corrections for Small Paper Sizes (less than A5)
These corrections prevent too much heating of the fusing unit when paper widths less than
A5 are used. In multi-page printing with this size of paper, the heating roller’s temperature
is not the same in all areas because the small size paper does not go through the two ends
of the heating roller. The temperature of locations that do not touch the paper becomes
higher than other locations during multi-page printing. The following corrections decrease
this problem.
ƒ
Print speed: This is decreased after 15 pages. Then, 30 seconds after this, the print
speed increases to the standard temperature again. You can adjust this with SP 1911 1
to 3.
ƒ
Fusing temperature: This is decreased in three stages, as shown below.
ƒ
Decreased by 2°C after 25 pages are printed (controlled by SP 1911 4 and 14)
ƒ
Decreased by 5°C again after 10 more pages are printed (controlled by SP 1911 6
and 16)
ƒ
Reduced by 5°C again after 15 more pages are printed (controlled by SP 1911 8
and 18)
There are also temperature reductions for one-sided printing and two-sided printing.
ƒ
ƒ
One sided printing: The temperature is decreased in two steps as shown below
ƒ
After 100 pages, decreased by 2°C (controlled by SP 1911 21 and 23)
ƒ
After 10 more pages, decreased by 5°C (controlled by SP 1911 22 and 24)
Duplex printing: The temperature is decreased in two steps as shown below
ƒ
After 80 pages, decreased by 2°C (controlled by SP 1911 25 and 27)
ƒ
After 10 more pages, decreased by 5°C (controlled by SP 1911 26 and 28)
Overheat Protection
ƒ
If the heating roller temperature becomes higher than 230°C, the CPU cuts off the
power to the heating lamp and SC543 shows.
ƒ
If 250°C is detected, the thermostat is opened, and then the heating lamp power is cut
off. SC545 shows.
ƒ
If the thermistor output is less than 0°C for six seconds, SC541 occurs.
ƒ
If the heating lamp gets full power for 8 seconds after the heating roller gets to the
print ready temperature, SC545 occurs.
G190
6-58
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Fusing
6.8.3 DRIVE
After the toner image is transferred to the paper [A], it goes through the fusing unit. The
fusing unit contains the heating roller [B]. The heating lamp [C] applies heat to the heat
roller. The heat roller applies heat to the fusing belt [D] to melt the toner on the paper. The
paper receives pressure between the fusing belt and the pressure roller [E], and melted
When the paper goes out of the fusing unit, it goes to the exit tray. The fusing exit sensor
[F] detects paper jams.
SM
6-59
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Detailed
Descriptions
toner bonds to the paper.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Controller
6.9 CONTROLLER
The controller uses GW (Ground Work) architecture.
ƒ
ASCI 1. GW architecture ASIC
ƒ
CPU. (RM7935-835MHz). The central processing unit that controls the operation of the
controller board.
ƒ
DDR SDRAM. The image memory (Resident: 256MB, Optional: 128MB or 256MB)
image compression, image rotation and other operations are done.
ƒ
SD. This is the interface for SD card slots 1 and 2. Slot 2 is for optional applications or
service slot for firmware version updates, moving. applications to other SD cards, and
downloading/uploading NVRAM contents
ƒ
Board Option Slot. Only one of the following options can be installed in either I/F Slot:
IEEE1284 Interface Board (Centronics), IEEE802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth
Interface Unit, Gigabit Ethernet Interface Board.
ƒ
Flash ROM. Firmware area, work area for PDF direct print, VM card. Maximum
G190
6-60
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Controller
capacity: 128 MB.
ƒ
USB. The interface for USB 2.0 devices. Supports both low-speed and high-speed
modes. USB support is built-into the controller. No installation is required for the USB
function.
ƒ
NIB. The Ethernet interface connection. Network support is built-into the controller. No
installation is required for the network function.
Boot ROM. Stores the boot program.
ƒ
NVRAM. The memory that stores the system configuration and user code.
ƒ
HDD. 2.5 inches HDD (option)
Detailed
Descriptions
ƒ
SM
6-61
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
7. SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 SPECIFICATIONS
7.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G190
Configuration:
Desktop
Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Print Process:
4 drums tandem method
Printer Languages:
PictBridge, RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream),
PCL5c, PCL6, Adobe PostScript 3, PDF
Resolution:
RPCS: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
PCL5c: 600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi
PCL-6: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Adobe PS 3: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
PDF: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
PictBridge: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi
1 bit, 256 gradations
Specifications
Gradations:
SM
7-1
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
G190
Printing Speeds
Plain Paper
Thick/OHP
600 x 600 dpi (ppm)
30
15
1200 x 600 dpi (ppm)
30
15
1200 x 1200 dpi (ppm)
15
15
Printing Speeds [Color]
Plain Paper
Thick/OHP
600 x 600 dpi (ppm)
30
15
1200 x 600 dpi (ppm)
30
15
1200 x 1200 dpi (ppm)
15
15
[Monochrome]
G190
PCL5c:
Resident Fonts:
ƒ
45 Manager Intelli fonts
ƒ
13 TrueType fonts
ƒ
4 Bitmap fonts
Adobe PostScript 3:
ƒ
Host Interfaces:
Network Protocols:
First Print Speed:
G190
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
ƒ
Ethernet (10/100 Base-TX): Standard
ƒ
USB2.0: Standard
ƒ
IEEE802.11a/g,11g (Wireless LAN): Optional
ƒ
Parallel (IEEE1284: Optional): Optional
ƒ
Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional
ƒ
USB Host: Standard
ƒ
Gigabit Ethernet: Optional
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, RHPP
ƒ
Color: 15 seconds or less (from tray 1)
ƒ
Black and White: 10 seconds or less (from tray 1)
7-2
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Warm-up Time
Print Paper Capacity:
(80 g/m2, 20lb)
Print Paper Size:
Less than 30 seconds (at 23°C/50%)
ƒ
Standard tray: 550 sheets
ƒ
By-pass tray: 100 sheets
ƒ
Optional paper feed tray: 550 sheets
(See "Supported Paper Sizes".)
Standard Tray A4 / B5 / 8.5" x 11" / 8.5" x 14" (SEF)
By-pass: Minimum 90 x 148 mm
By-pass: Maximum 216 x 356 mm
Optional Tray A4 / B5 / 8.5" x 11" / 8.5" x 14" (SEF)
Standard tray, Optional paper tray, and bypass tray:
ƒ
One-sided: 52-216 g/m2 (16-55 lb)
ƒ
60-157 g/m2 (16-43 lb)
Duplex:
Paper weight settings at printer driver and operation panel:
Printing Paper Weight:
ƒ
Thin: 52 – 60.2 g/m2
ƒ
Plain paper 1 (Plain): 60.2 – 90.2 g/m2
ƒ
Plain paper 2 (Plain and Recycled): 90.2 – 104.7
g/m2
ƒ
Thick paper 1: 104.7 – 157 g/m2
ƒ
Thick paper 2: 157 – 216 g/m2
Output Paper Capacity: Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
SM
Standard 256 MB
Up to 512 MB with optional Memory Unit
Specifications
Memory:
120 V, 60 Hz: More than 11 A (for North America)
220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 6 A (for Europe/Asia)
ƒ
120 V: 990 W or less
ƒ
220-240 V: 1200 W or less
ƒ
Energy Saver: 6 W or less
7-3
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level,
The measurements
were made in
accordance with
ISO9296 at the
operator position.)
Dimensions (W x D x
H):
Weight:
G190
Printing
ƒ
Mainframe Only: 63 dB or less
ƒ
Full System: 67 dB or less
Stand-by
ƒ
Mainframe Only: 40 dB or less
ƒ
Full System: 40 dB or less
446 x 589.5 x 487 mm (17.4" x 23.2" x 19.2")
Less than 50 kg (110.3 lb)
7-4
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
7.1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
Size (W x L)
Main Tray
PFU
By-pass Tray
NA
E/A
NA
E/A
NA
E/A
Duplex
A3
297 x 420 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
A4 SEF
210 x 297 mm
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y#
Y#
Y
A4 LEF
297 x 210 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
A5 SEF
148 x 210 mm
Y#
Y
Y#
Y
Y#
Y#
Y
A5 LEF
210 x 148 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
A6 SEF
105 x 148 mm
Y#
Y
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y
B4 SEF
257 x 364 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
B5 SEF
182 x 257 mm
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
B5 LEF
257 x 182 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
B6 SEF
128 x 182 mm
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
Ledger
11" x 17"
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Letter SEF
8.5" x 11"
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y#
Y#
Y
Letter LEF
11" x 8.5"
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Legal SEF
8.5" x 14"
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y#
Y#
Y
Half Letter SEF
5.5" x 8.5"
Y
Y#
Y
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
Executive SEF
7.25" x 10.5"
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y#
Y#
Y
Executive LEF
10.5" x 7.25"
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
F SEF
8" x 13"
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
Foolscap SEF
8.5" x 13"
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
Folio SEF
8.25" x 13"
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
SM
7-5
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Specifications
Paper
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Paper
Size (W x L)
Main Tray
PFU
By-pass Tray
NA
E/A
NA
E/A
NA
E/A
Duplex
8K
267 x 390 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
16K SEF
195 x 267 mm
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
16K LEF
267 x 195 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Custom (Width)
70 x 216 mm *1
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
Custom
5.5" x 14" *2
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
14" ∼ 900 mm
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
N
100 x 148 mm
Y#
Y#
N
N
Y#
Y#
N
200 x 148 mm
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
Com10 Env.
4.125" x 9.5"
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
Monarch Env.
3.875" x 7.5"
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
C6 Env.
114 x 162 mm
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
C5 Env.
162 x 229 mm
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
DL Env.
110 x 220 mm
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
(Length)
Postcard
Double postal
card
*1: This size is only for the by-pass tray. The size for the main tray and OPU is 98 mm.
*2: This size is only for the main tray and by-pass tray. The size for OPU is 148 mm.
Y: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
Y#: Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
N: Not supported
G190
7-6
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
7.1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer
allows you to select which components to install.
Printer Drivers
Printer
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Vista
Macintosh
PCL 5c/6
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
PS3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RPCS
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Language
ƒ
The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows 2000,
which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the
driver.
The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 7.6 or later versions.
Specifications
ƒ
SM
7-7
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Utility Software
Software
Font Manager 2000
(2000, XP, Server2003)
Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer
Smart Device Monitor for
Admin
(Win2000, XP, Vista,
A printer management utility for administrator.
Server2003)
DeskTopBinder Lite Ver.5, DeskTopBinder itself can be used as personal document
Professional Ver.5
management software and can manage both image data
(Win2000, XP, Vista,
converted from paper documents and application files saves
Server2003)
in each client’s PC.
Web Smart Device
Monitor Ver.2
A printer management, Account/Logging management for
(Win2000, XP,
administrator.
Server2003)
G190
7-8
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
SM
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
Specifications
7.1.4 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Item
Machine Code
Main Unit
G190
Paper Feed Unit
G392
128 MB DIMM Memory
M345-21
256 MB DIMM Memory
D362-21
IEEE1284 I/F Board
B679
IEEE802.11a/g Board
Up to three tray units can be
installed.
Common with model G-P1/G-P2
EU/ASIA: M344-02
NA: M344-01
IEEE802.11g Board
EU/ASIA: M344-08
HDD Encryption Unit
M344-05
VM Card
Remarks
EU/ASIA: G344-09
NA: M344-07
Bluetooth Board
B826
Common with model G-P2
Gigabit Ethernet
G874-01
Common with model G-P2
HDD Type 420
M344-00
40GB
PictBridge
M344-03
Data Storage Card
G874-36
SM
Specifications
Data Overwrite Security Unit M344-06
Common with model G-P2
7-9
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
G190
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising